Nortel Communication Server 1000 Circuit Card Reference Release: 5.5 Document Revision: 02.06 www.nortel.com NN43001-311 .
Nortel Communication Server 1000 Release: 5.5 Publication: NN43001-311 Document status: Standard Document release date: 27 August 2008 Copyright © 2003-2008 Nortel Networks All Rights Reserved. Sourced in Canada LEGAL NOTICE While the information in this document is believed to be accurate and reliable, except as otherwise expressly agreed to in writing NORTEL PROVIDES THIS DOCUMENT "AS IS" WITHOUT WARRANTY OR CONDITION OF ANY KIND, EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED.
. Contents New in this release Other 13 Revision History 13 How to get help Getting Getting Getting Getting help help help help 13 15 from the Nortel web site 15 over the telephone from a Nortel Solutions Center 15 from a specialist by using an Express Routing Code 15 through a Nortel distributor or reseller 16 Overview 17 Contents 17 Line cards 18 Trunk cards 45 Installation 46 Operation 47 Serial Data Interface (SDI) cards 55 Circuit card installation 59 Contents 59 Card slots - Large Syst
Option settings 79 Contents 79 Circuit card grid 80 NT1R20 Off-Premise Station card 81 NT5D12 Dual DTI/PRI (DDP) card 82 NT6D42 Ringing Generator DC 87 NT6D80 Multi-purpose Serial Data Link card 89 NT8D14 Universal Trunk card 90 NT8D15 E and M Trunk card 92 NT8D17 Conference/TDS card 93 NT8D21 Ringing Generator AC 94 NT8D22 System Monitor 94 NT8D22 jumper settings 98 NT8D41BA Quad Serial Data Interface Paddle Board 99 QPC43 Peripheral Signaling card 101 QPC414 Network card 101 QPC441 3-Port Extender ca
Clocking Requirement 214 Connecting MGC DECT Clock Reference Cable 214 Man-Machine T1 maintenance interface software 217 Applications 247 NT5D33 and NT5D34 Lineside E1 Interface cards 255 Contents 255 Introduction 255 Physical description 256 Functional description 260 Electrical specifications 264 Installation and Configuration 266 Installation 272 Clocking Requirement 282 Connecting MGC DECT Clock Reference Cable 282 Man-Machine E1 maintenance interface software 284 Applications 307 NT5D60/80/81 CLA
NT6D70 SILC Line card 367 Contents 367 Introduction 367 Physical description 368 Functional description 369 NT6D71 UILC line card 377 Contents 377 Introduction 377 Physical description 378 Functional description 378 NT6D80 MSDL card 383 Contents 383 Introduction 383 Physical description 384 Functional description 385 Engineering guidelines 390 Installation 395 Maintenance 402 Replacing MSDL cards 408 Symptoms and actions 409 System disabled actions 409 NT8D02 and NTDK16 Digital Line cards Conten
Functional description 493 Operation 501 Electrical specifications 592 Connector pin assignments 602 Configuration 606 Applications 627 NT8D15 E and M Trunk card 633 Contents 633 Introduction 633 Physical description 637 Functional description 641 Operation 665 Electrical specifications 691 Connector pin assignments 696 Configuration 702 Applications 713 NT8D41BA Quad Serial Data Interface Paddle Board 721 Contents 721 Introduction 721 Physical description 722 Functional description 722 Connector pi
Physical description 778 Functional description 781 Architecture 783 NTAK20 Clock Controller daughterboard 803 Contents 803 Introduction 803 Physical description 809 Functional description 810 NTAK79 2.
Operation 903 Electrical specifications 905 Connector pin assignments 906 Configuration 906 Applications 914 NTDK20 Small System Controller card 917 Contents 917 Introduction 917 Memory 919 100BaseT IP daughterboards 920 PC card interface 923 Security device 924 SDI ports 924 Conferencing 925 Media Gateway/Media Gateway Expansion card slot assignment 925 NTDW60 Media Gateway Controller Card 929 Contents 929 Introduction 929 Processor 932 Ethernet ports 932 External connections 932 Internal connectio
TLAN 939 Serial data interface ports 940 TTY parameters 940 USB 2.
Hardware architecture 982 Functional description 984 QPC841 Quad Serial Data Interface card 985 Contents 985 Introduction 985 Physical description 986 Functional description 987 Connector pin assignments 988 Configuring the QSDI card 990 Applications 994 The TDS/DTR card 997 Contents 997 Introduction 997 Features 997 LAPB Data Link Control protocol Contents 1009 Introduction 1009 Operation 1009 Frame structure 1010 LAPB balanced class of procedure 1011 Commands and responses 1011 Description of pr
Nortel Communication Server 1000 Circuit Card Reference NN43001-311 02.06 Standard 27 August 2008 Copyright © 2003-2008 Nortel Networks .
. New in this release This technical document provides information about circuit cards for the CS 1000 Release 5.5. Non-supported circuit cards have been deleted from the document. Other Revision History August 2008 Standard 02.06. This document is up-issued to include additional information in the section ’Jumper and switch settings’ for Release 5.5. December 2007 Standard 02.05. This document has been up-issued to support Communication Server Release 5.5. June 2007 Standard 01.02.
New in this release • • Circuit Cards: Installation and Testing, (553-3001-211) • Circuit Card Reference, (553-3023-211) Option 11C and 11C mini Technical Reference Guide, (553-3011-100) (Content from Option 11C and 11C mini Technical Reference Guide, (553-3011-100) also appears in Telephones and Consoles Fundamentals (NN43001-567) Nortel Communication Server 1000 Circuit Card Reference NN43001-311 02.06 Standard 27 August 2008 Copyright © 2003-2008 Nortel Networks .
. How to get help This chapter explains how to get help for Nortel products and services. Getting help from the Nortel web site The best way to get technical support for Nortel products is from the Nortel Technical Support web site: www.nortel.com/support This site provides quick access to software, documentation, bulletins, and tools to address issues with Nortel products.
How to get help Getting help through a Nortel distributor or reseller If you purchased a service contract for your Nortel product from a distributor or authorized reseller, contact the technical support staff for that distributor or reseller. Nortel Communication Server 1000 Circuit Card Reference NN43001-311 02.06 Standard 27 August 2008 Copyright © 2003-2008 Nortel Networks .
. Overview Contents This section contains information on the following topics: “Line cards” (page 18) “Installation” (page 19) “Operation” (page 21) “Analog line interface units” (page 26) “Digital line interface units” (page 28) “Analog line call operation” (page 30) “Digital line call operation” (page 34) “Lineside T1 and E1 call operation” (page 34) “Voice frequency audio level” (page 43) “Off-premise line protection” (page 43) “Line protectors” (page 43) “Line protection grounding” (page 44) “Line
Overview Line cards The following line cards are designed using the Intelligent Peripheral Equipment (IPE) architecture and are recommended for use in all new system designs. Each of the line cards was designed to fit a specific system need. Table 1 "Line card characteristics" (page 18) lists the line card characteristics.
Line cards 19 NT5D11 and NT5D14 Lineside T1 interface card The NT5D11/14 Lineside T1 Interface card is an intelligent 24-channel digital line card that is used to connect the switch to T1-compatible terminal equipment on the lineside. The T1-compatible terminal equipment includes voice mail systems, channel banks containing FXS cards, and key systems such as the Nortel Norstar.
Overview Figure 1 IPE line cards shown installed in an NT8D37 IPE module When installing line cards, follow these general procedures: Step Action 1 Configure the jumpers and switches on the line card (if any) to meet system needs. 2 Install the line card into the selected slot. 3 Install the cable that connects the backplane connector on the IPE module to the module I/O panel. 4 Connect a 25-pair cable from the module I/O panel connector to the Main Distribution Frame (MDF).
Line cards 21 Operation This section describes how line cards fit into the CS 1000E, CS 1000M, and Meridian 1architecture, the busses that carry signals to and from the line cards, and how they connect to terminal equipment. These differences are summarized in Table 2 "IPE module architecture" (page 21). Host interface bus Cards based on the IPE bus use a built-in microcontroller.
Overview Signaling data is information directly related to the operation of the telephone line. Some examples of signaling commands include: • • • off-hook/on-hook ringing signal on/off message waiting lamp on/off Maintenance data is data relating to the configuration and operation of the IPE card, and is carried on the card LAN link.
Line cards 23 Figure 2 Typical IPE analog line card architecture DS-30X loops The line interfaces provided by the line cards connect to conventional 2-wire (tip and ring) line facilities. IPE analog line cards convert the incoming analog voice and signaling information to digital form and route it to the Call Server over DS-30X network loops.
Overview IPE digital line cards receive the data from the digital phone terminal as 512 kHz Time Compressed Multiplexed (TCM) data. The digital line card converts that data to a format compatible with the DS-30X loop and transmits it in the next available timeslot. When a word is received from the DS-30X loop, the digital line card converts it to the TCM format and transmits it to the digital phone terminal over the digital line facility.
Line cards 25 Figure 3 DS-30X loop data format DS-30Y network loops extend between controller cards and superloop network cards in the Common Equipment (CE). They function in a manner similar to DS-30X loops. See Figure 5 "Digital line interface unit block diagram" (page 29). A DS-30Y loop carries the PCM timeslot traffic of a DS-30X loop. Four DS-30Y network loops form a superloop with a capacity of 128 channels (120 usable timeslots).
Overview In normal operation, the controller card continually scans (polls) all of the slave cards connected to the card LAN to monitor their presence and operational status. The slave card sends replies to the controller on the input bus along with its card slot address for identification. In its reply, the slave informs the controller if any change in card status has taken place. The controller can then prompt the slave for specific information.
Line cards 27 Figure 4 Typical analog line interface unit block diagram Coder/Decoder circuit The Coder/Decoder (CODEC) performs Analog to Digital (A/D) and Digital to Analog (D/A) conversion of the line analog voiceband signal to and from a digital PCM signal. This signal can be coded and decoded using either the A-Law or the µ-Law companding algorithm. On some analog line cards, the decoding algorithm depends of the type of CODEC installed when the board is built.
Overview amplifies the result. On some of the line cards, the gain of these filters can be programmed by the system controller. This allows the system to make up for line losses according to the loss plan. Balancing network Depending on the card type, the balancing network provides a 600 3/4, 900 3/4, 3COM or 3CM2 impedance matching network. It also converts the 2-wire transmission path (tip and ring) to a 4-wire transmission path (Rx/ground and Tx/ground).
Line cards 29 The digital line interface card contains one or more digital line interface units. See Figure 5 "Digital line interface unit block diagram" (page 29). Each digital line interface unit contains a Digital Line Interface Circuit (DLIC). The purpose of each DLIC is to demultiplex data from the DS-30X Tx channel into integrated voice and data bitstreams and transmit those bitstreams as Bi-Polar Return to Zero, Alternate Mark Inversion (BPRZ-AMI) data to the TCM loop.
Overview Each TCM loop interface circuit can service loops up to 3500 ft. in length when using 24 gauge wire. The circuit allows for a maximum ac signal loss of 15.5 dB at 256 KHz and a maximum DC loop resistance of 210 ohms. Signaling The digital line interface units also contain signaling and control circuits that establish, monitor, and take down call connections. These circuits work with the system controller to operate the digital line interface circuits during calls.
Line cards 31 Figure 6 Call connection sequence - near-end station receiving call Nortel Communication Server 1000 Circuit Card Reference NN43001-311 02.06 Standard 27 August 2008 Copyright © 2003-2008 Nortel Networks .
Overview Figure 7 Call connection sequence - near-end originating call Nortel Communication Server 1000 Circuit Card Reference NN43001-311 02.06 Standard 27 August 2008 Copyright © 2003-2008 Nortel Networks .
Line cards 33 Message waiting Line cards that are equipped with the message waiting feature receive notification that a message is waiting across the Card LAN link (IPE cards). On cards that drive a message waiting light, the light is turned on by connecting the ring side of the telephone line to the –150 V dc power supply. When the line card senses that the telephone has gone off-hook, it removes the –150 V dc voltage until the telephone goes back on-hook.
Overview of the ground connection to the tip lead for a specific length of time. The length of time is programmed in LD10, and ranges from a minimum of 10 milliseconds to a maximum of 2.55 seconds. See Software Input/Output Reference — Administration (NN43001-611) for more information. Digital line call operation Digital line call operation is controlled entirely by use of messages between the digital telephone and the system. These messages are carried across the TCM loop interface.
Line cards 35 Figure 8 Battery reversal answer and disconnect supervision sequence Nortel Communication Server 1000 Circuit Card Reference NN43001-311 02.06 Standard 27 August 2008 Copyright © 2003-2008 Nortel Networks .
Overview Figure 9 Hook flash disconnect supervision sequence Call operation is described by categorizing the operation into the following main states: Nortel Communication Server 1000 Circuit Card Reference NN43001-311 02.06 Standard 27 August 2008 Copyright © 2003-2008 Nortel Networks .
Line cards 37 • • • • • Idle (on-hook) Incoming calls Outgoing calls Calls disconnected by the CO Calls disconnected by the telephone Loop Start Mode In Loop Start mode, the A and B bits meaning is: • Transmit from LTI:A bit = 0 (tip ground on); B bit = Ringing (0=on, 1=off) • Receive to LTI: A bit = Loop (0=open, 1=closed); B bit = 1 (no ring ground) When a T1 channel is idle, the Lineside T1 card simulates a ground on the tip lead and –48Vdc on the ring lead to the terminal equipment by setting it
Overview the Lineside T1 card responds to the distant end disconnect message by momentarily changing its transmit A bit to 1 and then returning it to 0. The duration of time that the transmit A bit remains at 1 before returning to 0 depends upon the setting that was configured using the SAL. If the terminal equipment is capable of detecting distant end disconnect, it responds by changing the Lineside T1 card’s receive A bit to 0 (open loop).
Line cards 39 Table 3 Loop Start Call Processing A/B Bit Settings Transmit Receive State A B A B Idle 0 1 0 1 Idle 0 1 0 1 Ringing is applied from Lineside T1 card 0 1/0 0 1 Terminal equipment goes off-hook 0 1/0 1 1 Lineside T1 card stops ringing 0 1 1 1 Idle 0 1 0 1 Terminal equipment goes off-hook 0 1 1 1 Incoming Calls: • • • • Outgoing Calls: • • Call Disconnect from far end: • • Steady state (call in progress) 0 1 1 1 Far end disconnects by dropping
Overview Incoming Calls Incoming calls to terminal equipment that is connected to the Lineside T1 card can originate either from stations that are local (served by the PBX), or remote (served through the public switched telephone network).
Line cards 41 • In order to detect distant end disconnect for calls terminating on the Lineside T1 card, the "hook flash" feature within the SAL software must be enabled. • In order to detect distant end disconnect for calls originating and terminating on the Lineside T1 card, both the "battery reversal" and "hook flash" features within the SAL software must be enabled.
Overview Table 4 Ground Start Call Processing A/B Bit Settings (cont’d.) Transmit Receive State A B A B • • Terminal equipment goes open loop current 0 1 0 1 Lineside T1 card opens tip ground 1 1 0 1 Ground Start Restrictions If the Lineside T1 card is used in ground start mode, certain restrictions should be considered.
Line cards 43 attempt to use a Lineside T1 line, the system completes the call termination. It does not back down and allow the CPE to complete the call origination, as in normal ground start operation. If both incoming and outgoing calls are to be handled through the Lineside T1 interface, separate channels should be configured in the system and the CPE for each call direction. This eliminates the possibility of glare conditions on call origination.
Overview Nortel has tested line protection devices from three manufacturers. See Table 5 "Line protection device ordering information" (page 44). Each manufacturer offers devices for protection of digital as well as analog telephone lines.
Trunk cards 45 Line cards • • NT1R20 Off-Premise Station Line card NT8D02 Digital Line card Trunk cards The following trunk cards are designed using the IPE architecture, and are recommended for use in all new system designs. Each of the trunk cards was designed to fit a specific system need. Use Table 6 "Trunk card characteristics" (page 45) to select the trunk card that meets system needs.
Overview • • Recorded Announcement (RAN) trunks Paging (PAG) trunks The universal trunk card also supports Music, Automatic Wake Up, and Direct Inward System Access (DISA) features.
Operation 2 47 Install the trunk card into the selected slot. Figure 10 IPE trunk cards installed in an NT8D37 IPE module 3 Install the cable that connects the backplane connector on the IPE module to the module I/O panel. 4 Connect a 25-pair cable from the module I/O panel connector to the Main Distribution Frame (MDF). 5 Connect the trunk card output to the selected terminal equipment at the MDF.
Overview Host interface bus Cards based on the IPE bus use a built-in microcontroller. The IPE microcontroller is used for the following: • • to perform local diagnostics (self-test) • to report back to the system processor information such as card identification (type, vintage, and serial number), firmware version, and programmed configuration status.
Operation 49 Figure 11 Typical IPE trunk card architecture The switch communicates with IPE modules over two separate interfaces. Voice and signaling data are sent and received over DS-30X loops and maintenance data is sent over a separate asynchronous communication link called the card LAN link. Signaling data is information directly related to the operation of the telephone line.
Overview Maintenance data is data relating to the configuration and operation of the IPE card, and is carried on the card LAN link.
Operation 51 Eight of the 10 bits are for PCM data, one bit is the call signaling bit, and the last bit is a data valid bit. The 8-bit PCM portion of a channel is called a timeslot . The DS-30X loop is clocked at 2.56 Mbps (one-half the 5.12 MHz clock frequency supplied by the controller card). The timeslot repetition rate for a single channel is 8 kHz. The controller card also supplies a locally generated 1 kHz frame sync signal for channel synchronization.
Overview Card LAN link Maintenance communication is the exchange of control and status data between IPE line or trunk cards and the CE CPU by way of the NT8D01 Controller Card. Maintenance data is transported via the card LAN link. This link is composed of two asynchronous serial buses (called the Async card LAN link in Figure 11 "Typical IPE trunk card architecture" (page 49)). The output bus is used by the controller for output of control data to the trunk card.
Operation 53 A card LAN link bus is common to all of the line/trunk card slots within an IPE module (or IPE section of a CE module). This bus is arranged in a master/slave configuration where the controller card is the master and all other cards are slaves. The module backplane provides each line/trunk card slot with a unique hardwired slot address. This slot address enables a slave card to respond when addressed by the controller card. The controller card communicates with only one slave at a time.
Overview Figure 14 Typical trunk interface unit block diagram Coder/Decoder circuit The coder/decoder (codec) performs Analog to Digital (A/D) and Digital to Analog (D/A) conversion of the line analog voiceband signal to and from a digital PCM signal. This signal can be coded and decoded using either the A-Law or the µ-Law companding algorithm. On some trunk cards the decoding algorithm depends of the type of codec installed when the board is built.
Serial Data Interface (SDI) cards 55 (tip and ring) to a 4-wire transmission path (Rx/ground and Tx/ground). The balancing network is a transformer/analog (hybrid) circuit combination. Signaling circuits Signaling circuits are relays that place outgoing call signaling onto the trunk. Signal detection circuits monitor the incoming call signaling.
Overview The QPC841 Quad SDI card mounts in standard backplane slots and its serial interface connectors are located on the card front panels. A list of the modules that can be mounted in is given in the section on the individual card.
Serial Data Interface (SDI) cards 57 Table 9 Power consumption Maximum power consumption Voltage NT8D41BA QPC841 +5 VDC ±5% 1.0 Amp 1.5 Amp +12 VDC ±5% 100 mA 100 mA –12 VDC ±5% 100 mA 100 mA Environmental The SDI cards operate without degradation under the conditions listed in Table 10 "Environmental specifications" (page 57).
Overview Instructions for cabling the serial data interface cards to the various system consoles and peripherals are found in Communication Server 1000M and Meridian 1 Large System Installation and Configuration (NN43021-310). Configuring the system software Once an SDI card has been installed in the system, the system software needs to be configured to recognize it. This is done using the Configuration Record program LD 17.
. Circuit card installation Contents This section contains information on the following topics: “Card slots - Large System” (page 59) “Circuit and installation” (page 60) “Precautions” (page 63) “Installing a circuit card” (page 64) Card slots - Large System The following table in this chapter identifies card slot compatibility in the following modules: • NT4N41 Core/Network module required for CS 1000M SG, CS 1000M MG, Meridian 1 PBX 61CCall Processor (CP) PII, CP PIV, and Meridian 1 PBX 81C • NT
Circuit card installation Circuit and installation Table 11 Large Systemcard slots Component Large System A0786611 Call Processor Pentium II® card 81C Core/Net: "CP" A0810486 Call Processor Pentium II 81C Core/Net: "CP" NT1P61 Fiber Superloop Network card Core/Net: 0–7 NT1P62 Fiber Peripheral Controller card IPE: "Contr" NT1R52 Remote Carrier Interface IPE: "Contr" NT1R20 Off-Premise Station IPE: any slot but "Contr" NT4D18 Hybrid Bus Terminator Core/Net: between 11 and 12 NT4D19 and NT4
Circuit and installation Table 11 Large Systemcard slots (cont’d.
Circuit card installation Table 11 Large Systemcard slots (cont’d.
Precautions 63 Precautions To avoid personal injury and equipment damage, review the following guidelines before handling system equipment. WARNING Module covers are not hinged; do not let go of the covers. Lift covers away from the module and set them out of your work area. WARNING Circuit cards may contain a lithium battery. There is a danger of explosion if the battery is incorrectly replaced. Do not replace components on any circuit card; you must replace the entire card.
Circuit card installation Figure 15 Static discharge points During repair and maintenance procedures do the following: • Turn off the circuit breaker or switch for a module power supply before the power supply is removed or inserted. • In AC-powered systems, capacitors in the power supply must discharge. Wait five full minutes between turning off the circuit breaker and removing the power supply from the module. • Software disable cards, if applicable, before they are removed or inserted.
Installing a circuit card 65 DANGER To avoid personal injury and equipment damage, read all of the guidelines in “Circuit and installation” (page 60) before you begin installation and follow all guidelines throughout the procedure. Procedure 2 Installing a circuit card Step Action 1 Open the protective carton and remove the circuit card from the antistatic bag. Return the antistatic bag to the carton and store it for future use.
Circuit card installation Figure 16 Installing the circuit card in the card cage 7 Insert the card into the card aligning guides in the card cage. Gently push the card into the slot until you feel resistance. The tip of the locking device must be behind the edge of the card cage (see Figure 16 "Installing the circuit card in the card cage" (page 66)). 8 Lock the card into position by simultaneously pushing the ends of the locking devices against the faceplate.
Installing a circuit card 67 NT5D10 Call Processor if the card is associated with the active Call Processor: Note: An initialization causes a momentary interruption in call processing. 11 If you are installing the card in a working system, refer to the work order and the technical document, Software Input/Output Reference — Administration (NN43001-611) to add the required office data to the system memory. 12 Go to the appropriate test procedure in “Acceptance tests” (page 69).
Circuit card installation Nortel Communication Server 1000 Circuit Card Reference NN43001-311 02.06 Standard 27 August 2008 Copyright © 2003-2008 Nortel Networks .
. Acceptance tests Contents This section contains information on the following topics: “Introduction” (page 69) “Conference cards” (page 69) “Digitone receiver cards” (page 72) “Line cards” (page 72) “Multifrequency sender cards” (page 73) “Multifrequency signaling cards” (page 74) “Network cards” (page 74) “Trunk cards” (page 75) “Tone and digit switch cards” (page 76) Introduction Test procedures for most circuit cards require that internal and external cabling be installed.
Acceptance tests LOGI (password) 2 Request the status of a loop on the conference card: LD 38 STAT loop Conference status is formatted as follows: CNFC n DSBL n BUSY "n" represents the number of conference groups disabled and busy CHAN n DSBL n BUSY "n" represents the number of channels disabled and busy UNEQ card is not equipped in the system DSBL card is disabled in software 3 If the conference card loop is disabled, enable it.
Conference cards 71 A manual conference test is performed by stepping through conference channels and groups, listening for noise that indicates a faulty card. The manual conference test can be performed through a system terminal or BCS maintenance telephone. If commands are entered from a maintenance telephone, this telephone automatically becomes part of the manual conference call. Only one manual conference call is allowed at one time.
Acceptance tests Digitone receiver cards Note: The DTR daughterboard connected to a QPC659 Dual Loop Peripheral Buffer card cannot be assigned when the IPE shelf is used in single loop mode. Procedure 4 Testing digitone receiver cards Step Action Use this procedure to test a Digitone receiver (DTR) card, a DTR daughterboard, or the DTR function on the NT8D18 Network/DTR card.
Multifrequency sender cards 73 If the system response is other than OK, see Software Input/Output Reference — Administration (NN43001-611) to analyze the messages.
Acceptance tests See "Communicating with the Meridian 1" in Software Input/Output Reference — Administration (NN43001-611) for details on accessing the system from a maintenance telephone. 4 Obtain 10-second bursts of digits 1 to 9, 0, and 11 to 15 (in that order) for all digits on the specified loop: TONE loop ALL Each burst should sound different. If the bursts do not sound different, replace the card.
Trunk cards 75 If ALL is specified, all enabled loops (except attendant console loops) and all shelves on each loop are tested. If only one loop is being tested and it is disabled, enter ENLL loop to enable and test a network card associated with the specified loop. (This command cannot enable network cards disabled by LD 32.) If the system response is other than OK, see Software Input/Output Reference — Administration (NN43001-611) to analyze the messages.
Acceptance tests 3 To test a trunk from a remote test center, seize a central office (CO) monitor trunk: CALL or CALL l s c u Seize the automatic number identification (ANI) trunk: TRK l s c u loop, shelf, card, and unit numbers When you see the DN? prompt, enter the directory number (DN) you want the system to dial. If the system response is other than OK, see the Software Input/Output Reference — Administration (NN43001-611) to analyze the messages.
Tone and digit switch cards 77 (the TDS/MFS loop is the even loop of the conference/TDS loop pair) Note: The conference/TDS card is not enabled automatically when it is inserted. You must enable the card with the command ENLX. (This command is used in LD 34 and LD 46 to address even loops and in LD 38 to address odd loops.) Enabling the loops with the command ENLL does not enable the hardware for the card.
Acceptance tests Table 12 TDS tone tests (cont’d.) Input command Dial pad equivalent Description RBK#loop## 725#loop## Provides ringback tone from TDS loop specified. RNG#loop## 764#loop## Provides ring tone from TDS loop specified. **** Exits TDS test program. Nortel Communication Server 1000 Circuit Card Reference NN43001-311 02.06 Standard 27 August 2008 Copyright © 2003-2008 Nortel Networks .
. Option settings Contents This section contains information on the following topics: “Circuit card grid” (page 80) “NT1R20 Off-Premise Station card” (page 81) Table 14 "General purpose switch settings" (page 83) “NT6D42 Ringing Generator DC” (page 87) “NT6D80 Multi-purpose Serial Data Link card” (page 89) “NT8D14 Universal Trunk card” (page 90) “NT8D15 E and M Trunk card” (page 92) “NT8D17 Conference/TDS card” (page 93) “NT8D21 Ringing Generator AC” (page 94) “NT8D22 System Monitor” (page 94) “NT8D41B
Option settings Circuit card grid Some circuit cards contain option switches or jumpers, or both, that define specific functions. A switch or jumper can be identified by an alphanumeric coordinate (such as D29) that indicates a location on the card, or by a switch number (such as SW2) printed on the circuit board (see Figure 17 "Circuit card grid" (page 81)). Positions on a switch (for example, positions 1, 2, 3, and 4 on SW2) are labeled on the switch block.
NT1R20 Off-Premise Station card 81 Figure 17 Circuit card grid NT1R20 Off-Premise Station card Table 13 "OPS analog line card configuration" (page 81) lists option settings for the NT1R20 Off-Premise Station analog card. Table 13 OPS analog line card configuration Application On-premise station (ONS) Off-premise station (OPS) Class of Service (CLS) (Note 1) ONP OPX Loop resistance (ohms) 0–460 0–2300 (Note 2) Jumper strap setting (Note 6) Both JX.0 and JX.1 off Both JX.0 and JX.
Option settings Table 13 OPS analog line card configuration (cont’d.) Application On-premise station (ONS) Off-premise station (OPS) ONP OPX Class of Service (CLS) (Note 1) Loop loss (dB) (Note 3) 0–1.5 >1.5–2.5 >2.5–3.0 0–1.5 >1.5–2.5 >2.5–4.5 >4.
NT5D12 Dual DTI/PRI (DDP) card 83 General purpose switches Use switch set SW9 for Trunk 0; use switch set SW15 for Trunk 1 (see Table 14 "General purpose switch settings" (page 83)). Table 14 General purpose switch settings Switch 1 Description SW9/SW15 switch setting Framing Mode off - ESF on - SF 2 Yellow Alarm Method off - FDL on - Digit2 3 Zero Code Suppression Mode off - B8ZS on - AMI 4 Unused off Trunk interface switches A switch provides selection of T1 transmission.
Option settings A set of four DIP switches provides selection among three values for receiver impedance. Use SW8 for Trunk 0; use SW14 for Trunk 1 (see Table 17 "Trunk interface impedance switch settings" (page 84)).
NT5D12 Dual DTI/PRI (DDP) card 85 Table 19 DCH mode and address select switch settings (cont’d.
Option settings Figure 18 Switch functions and areas Figure 19 "Switch default settings" (page 87) displays default settings for switches on the NT5D12 DDP card. Nortel Communication Server 1000 Circuit Card Reference NN43001-311 02.06 Standard 27 August 2008 Copyright © 2003-2008 Nortel Networks .
NT6D42 Ringing Generator DC Figure 19 Switch default settings NT6D42 Ringing Generator DC Table 21 "NT6D42 recommended options for North American and British Telecom" (page 87) through Table 26 "NT6D42CC SW2" (page 89) list option settings for the NT6D42 Ringing Generator.
Option settings Ringing frequency Application Ringing voltage Jumper locations Ringing output message waiting British Telecom 25 Hz 80 V ac Low impedance P4 No high voltage message waiting Table 22 NT6D42 jumper locations P4 and P5 High voltage message waiting Pin location Disable Jumper in P4 Enable Jumper in P5 Note: One jumper must be installed.
NT6D80 Multi-purpose Serial Data Link card Table 25 NT6D42CB SW2 (cont’d.
Option settings Table 27 NT6D80 Multi-purpose Serial Data Link card (cont’d.) RS-232-D DTE or DCE* RS-422-A DTE RS-422-A DCE all off all off all on all off all on all off * RS-232-D DTE and DCE modes are software configured. RS-422-A DTE and DEC modes are switch configured. Note: The device number for the MSDL card is configured in LD17 at the prompt DNUM. You must also set the device number, using switches S9 and S10, on the MSDL card. S9 designates ones and S10 designates tens.
NT8D14 Universal Trunk card 91 Jumper strap settings Trunk types Loop length RAN: continuous operation mode Not applicable: RAN and paging trunks should not leave the building. Paging J1.X J2.X J3.X J4.X Note: Jumper strap settings J1.X, J2.X, J3.X, and J4.X apply to all eight units; "X" indicates the unit number, 0–7. "Off" indicates that no jumper strap is installed on a jumper block.
Option settings Table 31 NT8D14 vintages BA/BB trunk types-termination impedance and balance network (cont’d.
NT8D17 Conference/TDS card 93 Table 33 NT8D15 E and M Trunk card (cont’d.) Mode of operation (Note 2) 2-wire trunk 4-wire trunk DX tip & ring pair Jumper (Note 1) Type I Paging Type I Type II M—rcv M—xmt E—rcv M—xmt J5.X off off off off (Note 4) (Note 4) J6.X off off off off on on J7.X off off off off on on J8.X off off off off on on J9.X Pins 2–3 Pins 2–3 Pins 2–3 Pins 2–3 Pins 1–2 Pins 1–2 Note: Jumper strap settings J1.X through J9.
Option settings Jumper at J3 Companding law 4.5 db on on off 3 db on off off 0 db off on off 0 db off off off Note: Set position 4 to ON to disable the warning tone option. When the warning tone is enabled, select the warning tone level as shown below.
NT8D22 System Monitor 95 Table 34 NT8D22 SW1 Position SW1 function 1 Not used Meridian 1 columns only on off Position 1 is OFF (Meridian 1 columns only) Not used Position 1 is ON, master column contains CP:master slaves 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 on on off off on off on off 7 8 off off on off on off DC-powered system AC-powered system PFTU is activated by this column due to over-temperature PFTU is not activated by this column on off Position 1 is OFF (Meridian 1 columns only) Not used Not used off
Option settings Table 35 NT8D22 SW2 (cont’d.) Position SW2 indication 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 For master, indicates total number of slaves Configure 3–8 according to the Table 37 "NT8D22 settings for total number of slaves-SW2 on master" (page 96). For each slave, indicates the slave address Configure 3–8 according to the Table 38 "NT8D22AD/NT8D22ADE5 slave address-SW2 on slave" (page 97).
NT8D22 System Monitor 97 Table 37 NT8D22 settings for total number of slaves-SW2 on master (cont’d.
Option settings Table 38 NT8D22AD/NT8D22ADE5 slave address-SW2 on slave (cont’d.
NT8D41BA Quad Serial Data Interface Paddle Board 99 NT8D41BA Quad Serial Data Interface Paddle Board Baud rate Switches SW13, SW10, SW11, and SW12 determine the baud rate for ports 1, 2, 3, and 4, respectively. See the configuration for these switches in SDI paddle board baud rate switch settings. Table 39 QSDI paddle board baud rate switch settings SW13 (port 1), SW10 (port 2), SW11 (port 3), SW12 (port 4) Baud rate Baud Clock (kHz) 1 2 3 4 150 2.40 on off on on 300 4.
Option settings 8 9 E X off off off on off off 10 11 E X off off off on off on 12 13 E X off off off on on off 14 15 E X off off off on on on * To enable ports 1 and 2, set SW15 position 1 to ON. To enable ports 3 and 4, set SW16 position 1 to ON. + For each X, the setting for this switch makes no difference, because it is not used. DTE/DCE mode Each serial port can be configured to connect to a terminal (DTE equipment) or a modem (DCE equipment).
QPC441 3-Port Extender cards 101 QPC43 Peripheral Signaling card Options (minimum vintage N) Plug location NT5D21 Core/Network module F13 NT8D35 Network module QPC414 Network card Application Pin connection J3/S2 and J4/S1 T-1 facilities (including PRI/DTI),* channel service unit connect pins 1 and 2 (pin 1 is next to the white dot) Note: Possible jumper locations for vintage B (for different styles/series): J3—E11 or H11 J4—H17 or E7 S1 and S2—E33 Note: Possible jumper locations for vintage A (fo
Option settings Table 42 QPC441 3PE card installed in the NT4N41CP PII Core Net modules (cont’d.
QPC441 3-Port Extender cards 103 Table 43 QPC441 3PE card installed in the NT5D21 modules (cont’d.
Option settings Table 44 QPC441 3PE card installed in the NT8D35 module (cont’d.) 1 0 on on on off 1 on on off off 2 on off on off 3 on off off off 4 off on on off 5 off on off off 6 off off on off 7 off off off off QPC841 4-Port Serial Data Interface card Table 45 "QPC841 port 1 and 2 address selection" (page 104) through Table 47 "QPC841 DTE or DCE selection" (page 105) list option settings for the QPC841 4-Port SDI card.
QPC841 4-Port Serial Data Interface card Device number 105 SW15 Port 3 Port 4 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 0 1 off off off off off on on on 2 3 off off off off off on on off 4 5 off off off off off on off on 6 7 off off off off off on off off 8 9 off off off off off off on on 10 11 off off off off off off on off 12 13 off off off off off off off on 14 15 off off off off off off off off Note 1: On SW16, positions 1, 2, 3, and 4
Option settings Table 47 QPC841 DTE or DCE selection (cont’d.) Mode Port 1—SW8 1 2 3 Port 1—SW9 5 4 6 1 2 Port 3—SW4 4 5 6 Port 3—SW5 DTE on on on on on on off off off off off off DCE off off off off off off on on on on on on Port 4—SW2 Port 4—SW3 DTE on on on on on on off off off off off off DCE off off off off off off on on on on on on Nortel Communication Server 1000 Circuit Card Reference NN43001-311 02.
. NT1R20 Off-Premise Station Analog Line card Contents This section contains information on the following topics: “Introduction” (page 107) “Physical description” (page 109) “Functional description” (page 111) “Electrical specifications” (page 123) “Operation” (page 126) “Connector pin assignments” (page 131) “Configuring the OPS analog line card” (page 132) “Application” (page 136) Introduction The NT1R20 Off-Premise Station (OPS) analog line card is an intelligent eight-channel analog line card des
NT1R20 Off-Premise Station Analog Line card The NT1R20 OPS analog line card provides: • • • line supervision hookflash battery reversal Each unit is independently configured by software control in the Analog (500/2500 type) Telephone Administration program LD 10. You can install this card in any IPE slot. The NT1R20 Off-Premise Station (OPS) Analog Line Card provides eight full duplex analog telephone line interfaces.
Physical description • • • 109 line supervision hookflash battery reversal Each unit is independently configured in software in the analog (500/2500 type) telephone Administration program LD 10. Physical description The line interface and common multiplexing circuitry is mounted on a 31.75 cm by 25.40 cm (12.5 in. by 10 in.) printed circuit board. The OPS analog line card connects to the IPE backplane through a 160-pin connector shroud.
NT1R20 Off-Premise Station Analog Line card The faceplate of the card is equipped with a red LED. See Figure 20 "OPS analog line card - faceplate" (page 111). When an OPS analog line card is installed, the LED remains lit for two to five seconds while the self-test runs. If the self-test is completed successfully, the LED flashes three times and remains lit. When the card is configured and enabled in software; then the LED goes out.
Functional description 111 Figure 20 OPS analog line card - faceplate The faceplate of the card is equipped with a red LED. When an NT1R20 OPS Analog Line Card is installed, the LED remains lit for two to five seconds while the self-test runs. If the self-test completes successfully, the LED flashes three times and remains lit. When the card is configured and enabled in software, the LED goes out.
NT1R20 Off-Premise Station Analog Line card Figure 21 OPS analog line card - block diagram This functional description of the NT1R20 Off-Premise Station (OPS) Analog Line Card is divided into two parts. First, a description of the card’s control, signaling, and power interfaces is given, followed by a description of how the card itself functions. The following information describes the NT1R20 OPS Analog Line Card.
Functional description 113 Voice and signaling interfaces The eight line interfaces provided by the NT1R20 OPS analog line card connect to conventional, 2-wire (tip and ring), analog line facilities. Incoming analog voice and signaling information from a line facility is converted by the OPS analog line card to digital form and routed to the CPU over DS-30 network loops.
NT1R20 Off-Premise Station Analog Line card The card LAN link supports the following functions on the NT1R20 OPS analog line card: • • • • • • • • polling reporting of self-test status CPU initiated card reset reporting of card ID (card type and hardware vintage) reporting of firmware version reporting of line interface unit configuration enabling/disabling of the DS-30X network loop busy reporting of card status Maintenance communications Maintenance communications is the exchange of control and s
Functional description • • • • • • 115 CPU initiated card reset reporting of card ID (card type and hardware vintage) reporting of firmware version reporting of line interface unit configuration enabling/disabling of the DS-30X network loop busy reporting of card status Power interface Power is provided to the NT1R20 OPS analog line card by the NTAK78 ac/dc or NTAK72 DC power supply.Power is provided to the OPS circuit card by the NTAK78 AC/DC or NTAK72 DC power supply.
NT1R20 Off-Premise Station Analog Line card Each codec supports four interface units and contains switchable pads for control of transmission loss on a per unit basis.
Functional description 117 • standard or complex balance impedance (600 or 900 ohm or 3COM1 or 3COM2) selectable on a per unit basis • loopback of PCM signals over DS-30X network loop for diagnostic purposes The OPS analog line card contains eight independently configurable units. Relays are provided in each unit to apply ringing onto the line. Signal detection circuits monitor on-hook/off-hook signaling.
NT1R20 Off-Premise Station Analog Line card Control functions are provided by a microcontroller, a card LAN interface, and signaling and control circuits on the OPS analog line card. Control functions are provided by a microcontroller, a card LAN interface, and signaling and control circuits on the NT1R20 OPS Analog Line Card. Control functions are provided by a microcontroller, a Card LAN link, and signaling and control circuits on the OPS analog line card.
Functional description 119 — maintenance diagnostics — transmission loss levels Microcontroller—The microcontroller controls the following: • reporting to the CPU via the card LAN link: — card identification (card type, vintage, and serial number) — firmware version — self-test status — programmed configuration status • receipt and implementation of card configuration: — of the codecs — enabling/disabling of individual units or entire card — programming of input/output interface control circuits for
NT1R20 Off-Premise Station Analog Line card Card LAN interface Maintenance data is exchanged with the CPU over a dedicated asynchronous serial network called the Card LAN link. The Card LAN link is described in the section “Intelligent Peripheral Equipment” (page 21). The NT1R20 OPS analog line card has the capability of providing an interrupted dial tone to indicate that a message is waiting or that call forwarding is enabled.
Functional description 121 LD 10 is also used to select unit terminating impedance and balance network impedance at the TIMP and BIMP prompts, respectively. The message waiting interrupted dial tone and call forward reminder tone features are enabled by entering data into the customer data block using LD 15. See Software Input/Output Reference — Administration (NN43001-611) for LD 10 and LD 15 service change instructions.
NT1R20 Off-Premise Station Analog Line card Individual line interface units on the OPS analog line card are configured to either OPS (for OPS application) or ONS (for ONS application) Class of Service (CLS) in the Single-line Telephone Administration program (LD10) (see Table 48 "OPS analog line card configuration" (page 121)). LD10 is also used to select unit terminating impedance and balance network impedance at the TIMP and BIMP prompts, respectively.
Electrical specifications 123 Table 49 OPS analog line card - cable loop resistance and loss Cable loop loss (dB) (non-loaded at 1kHz) Cable length 26 AWG 24 AWG 22 AWG Cable loop resistance (ohms) 26 AWG 24 AWG 22 AWG 847 m (2800 ft) 1.5 1.2 0.9 231.4 144.2 90 1411 m (4600 ft) 2.5 2 1.6 385.6 240.3 150 1694 m (5600 ft) 3 2.4 1.9 462.8 288.3 180 2541 m (8300 ft) 4.5 3.7 2.8 694.2 432.5 270 8469 m (27800 ft) 15 12.2 9.4 2313.9 1441.
NT1R20 Off-Premise Station Analog Line card Signaling and control—This portion of the card provides circuits that establish, supervise, and take down call connections. These circuits work with the system CPU to operate line interface circuits during calls. The circuits receive outgoing call signaling messages from the CPU and return incoming call status information over the DS-30X network loop.
Electrical specifications 125 Table 50 OPS analog line card - electrical characteristics (cont’d.) Characteristic Specification Line leakage ≥ 30k ohms, tip-to-ring, tip-to-ground, ring-to-ground AC induction rejection 10 V rms, tip-to-ring, tip-to-ground, ring-to-ground Table 50 "OPS analog line card - electrical characteristics" (page 124) lists the electrical characteristics of OPS analog line card line interface units.
NT1R20 Off-Premise Station Analog Line card Foreign and surge voltage protection The NT1R20 OPS analog line card meets UL-1489 and CS03 over-voltage (power cross) specifications and FCC Part 68 requirements for hazardous and surge voltage limits.Table 51 "OPS analog line card - power requirements" (page 125) shows the maximum power consumed by the card from each system power supply.
Operation 127 The operation of each unit is configured in software and implemented in the card through software download messages. When the NT1R20 OPS analog line card unit is idle, it provides a ground on the tip lead and –48 V dc on the ring lead. The on-hook telephone presents a high impedance toward the line interface unit on the card.
NT1R20 Off-Premise Station Analog Line card Table 54 Call connection sequence-near-end station receiving call Signal / Direction Far-end / Near-end State Line card unit idle Group on tip, battery on ring High resistance loop Remarks No battery current drawn. Far-end station goes off-hook and addresses (dials-up) the near-end station. The system receives the incoming call on a trunk and determine the TN. Incoming call Ringing The system applies 20 Hz ringing to ring lead.
Operation 129 Incoming calls to a telephone connected to the OPS analog line card originate from stations that can be local (served by the Meridian 1 PBX) or remote (served through the public switched telephone network). The alerting signal to telephones is 20 Hz (nominal) ringing.
NT1R20 Off-Premise Station Analog Line card Table 55 Call connection sequence-near-end station receiving call (cont’d.) Signal / Direction Far-end / Near-end State Ringback (or busy) Two-way voice connection Remarks The system decodes addressing, route calls, and supply ringback tone to near-end station if far-end is on-hook. (Busy tone is supplied if far-end is off-hook). When call is answered, ringback tone is removed, and call is put through to far-end station.
Connector pin assignments 131 Connector pin assignments The OPS analog line card brings the eight analog telephone lines to the IPE backplane through a 160-pin connector shroud. The backplane is cabled to the input/output (I/O) panel on the rear of the module, which is then connected to the Main Distribution Frame (MDF) by 25-pair cables. Telephone lines from station equipment cross connect to the OPS analog line card at the MDF using a wiring plan similar to that used for trunk cards.
NT1R20 Off-Premise Station Analog Line card Figure 22 OPS analog line card - typical cross connection example Telephone lines from station equipment cross connect to the OPS analog line card at the MDF using a wiring plan similar to that used for trunk cards.
Configuring the OPS analog line card 133 The line type, terminating impedance, and balance network configuration for each unit on the card is selected by software service change entries at the system terminal and by jumper strap settings on the card. Jumper strap settings Each line interface unit on the card is equipped with two jumper blocks that are used to select the proper loop current depending upon loop length. See Table 57 "OPS analog line card - configuration" (page 134).
NT1R20 Off-Premise Station Analog Line card Table 57 OPS analog line card - configuration Application On-premise station (ONS) Off-premise station (OPS) Class of Service (CLS) (Note 1) ONP OPX Loop resistance (ohms) 0–460 0–2300 (Note 2) Jumper strap setting (Note 6) Both JX.0 and JX.1 off Loop loss (dB) (Note 3) 0–1.5 >0–3.0 TIMP (Notes 1, 4) 600 ohms BIMP (Notes 1, 4) 600 ohms Both JX.0 and JX.1 off Both JX.0 and JX.1 on >2.5–3.0 0–1.5 >1.5–2.5 >2.5–4.5 >4.
Configuring the OPS analog line card 135 Figure 23 OPS analog line card - jumper block locations Each line interface unit on the card is equipped with two jumper blocks that are used to select the proper loop current depending upon loop length. See Table 57 "OPS analog line card - configuration" (page 134). For units connected to loops of 460 to 2300 ohms, both jumper blocks must be installed. For loops that are 460 ohms or less, jumper blocks are not installed.
NT1R20 Off-Premise Station Analog Line card Before the appropriate balance network can be selected, the loop length between the near-end (Meridian 1) and the far-end station must be known. To assist in determining loop length, Table 49 "OPS analog line card cable loop resistance and loss" (page 123) shows some typical resistance and loss values for the most common cable lengths for comparison with values obtained from actual measurements. Set the jumpers on the NT1R20 OPS card.
Application 137 exchange carrier (OPS pairs are usually in the same cable as the PBX-CO trunks). The traditional OPS scenario configuration is shown in Figure 24 "Traditional OPS application configuration" (page 138). Note: OPS service should not be confused with Off-Premise EXtension (OPX) service. OPX service is the provision of an extension to a main subscriber loop bridged onto the loop at the serving CO or PBX.
NT1R20 Off-Premise Station Analog Line card Figure 24 Traditional OPS application configuration Note 1: OPS service should not be confused with off-premise extension (OPS) service. OPS service is the provision of an extension to a main subscriber loop bridged onto the loop at the serving CO or PBX. Additionally, OPS as used to denote off-premise extension service should not be confused with the OPS class-of-service assigned in the Single-line Telephone Administration program (LD10).
Application 139 Other applications The operating range and built-in protection provisions of the NT1R20 OPS analog line card make it suitable for applications which are variants on the traditional configuration shown in Figure 24 "Traditional OPS application configuration" (page 138). Examples of such applications are: • a PBX in a central building serving stations in other buildings in the vicinity, such as in an industrial park, often called a campus environment.
NT1R20 Off-Premise Station Analog Line card environment. Facilities can be provided by the local exchange carrier or can be privately owned.
Application 141 The transmission performance of OPS lines depends on the following factors: • the Meridian 1 port-to-port loss for connections between OPS ports and other Meridian 1 ports • the transmission parameters of the facilities between the Meridian 1 OPS port and the off-premise station or termination • the electrical and acoustic transmission characteristics of the termination These factors must be considered when planning applications using the OPS analog line card.
NT1R20 Off-Premise Station Analog Line card These factors must be considered when planning applications using the OPS analog line card. They are important when considering configurations other than the traditional OPS application as shown in Figure 90 "NTCK80AA/AB/AC/AD" (page 332). The following provides basic transmission planning guidelines for various OPS applications. Port-to-port loss Loss is inserted between OPS analog line card ports and other ports in accordance with the loss plan.
Application 143 The overall range achievable on an OPS line facility is limited by the signaling range (2300 ohms loop including telephone resistance). The signaling range is unaffected by gain treatment;so gain treatment can be used to extend the voice range to the limit of the signaling range. For example, on 26 AWG wire, the signaling range of 2300 ohms corresponds to an untreated metallic loop loss of 15 dB. Gain treatment (such as a VFR) with 10.
NT1R20 Off-Premise Station Analog Line card well as industry standards; they are not designed to compensate for modified ICL designs in the connecting facilities. • Nortel Networks recommends that the attenuation distortion (frequency response) of the OPS facility be within ±3.0 dB over the frequency range from 300 to 3000 Hz. It is desirable that this bandwidth extend from 200 to 3200 Hz. • The terminating impedance of the facility at the OPS port should approximate that of 600 ohms cable.
Application 145 The following requirements are based on historic inserted connection loss (ICL) objectives: — PBX–CO trunk: 5 dB with gain; 0–4.0 dB without gain — OPS line: 4.0 dB with gain; 0–4.5 dB without gain In recent times, economic and technological consideration has led to modifications of these historic objectives.
NT1R20 Off-Premise Station Analog Line card For satisfactory transmission performance, particularly on connections between the public network and an OPS termination, it is recommended that facilities conform to the following: • Total 1 kHz loss from the local serving CO to the OPS terminal should not exceed 7.0 dB. The total loss in the facility between the PBX and the terminal must not exceed 4.5 dB. See Figure 90 "NTCK80AA/AB/AC/AD" (page 332).
Application 147 Termination transmission characteristics The loss plan for OPS connections is designed so that a connection with an OPS termination provides satisfactory end-to-end listener volume when the OPS termination is a standard telephone. The listener volume at the distant end depends on the OPS termination transmit loudness characteristics; the volume at the OPS termination end depends on the OPS termination receive loudness characteristics.
NT1R20 Off-Premise Station Analog Line card • • the termination is a non-compensating telephone set • the OPS termination is to telephone sets behind a local switch providing local current feed, such as a key telephone system the OPS port is served by a line card using a constant-current feeding bridge OPS line terminations with loudness characteristics designed for other applications may also impact transmission performance.
Application 149 On some standard telephone sets, the loudness increases with decreased current. As the line (PBX to OPS termination) facility gets longer and loss increases, the increased loudness of the set compensates for the higher loss, assuming direct current feed from the PBX with constant voltage at the feeding bridge.
NT1R20 Off-Premise Station Analog Line card Nortel Communication Server 1000 Circuit Card Reference NN43001-311 02.06 Standard 27 August 2008 Copyright © 2003-2008 Nortel Networks .
. NT4N39AA CP Pentium IV Card Contents This section contains information on the following topics: “Introduction” (page 151) “Physical description” (page 151) “Functional description” (page 154) “Front panel connector pin assignments” (page 155) Introduction The NT4N39AA Call Processor Pentium IV (CP PIV) Large System processor card was introduced in CS 1000 Release 4.5.
NT4N39AA CP Pentium IV Card The CP PIV front panel is equipped with an EMC gasket and two ejector/injector handles. A reset button and two double LED packages (four LEDs in total) are placed at the front panel as well.
Physical description Figure 25 CP PIV card (front) Nortel Communication Server 1000 Circuit Card Reference NN43001-311 02.06 Standard 27 August 2008 Copyright © 2003-2008 Nortel Networks .
NT4N39AA CP Pentium IV Card Figure 26 CP PIV card (side) Functional description The card employs an Intel Pentium Processor as the central processing unit. The internal core clock frequency reaches from 600MHz to1.1GHz. The processor is manufactured in 0.09 um process technology and provides 32 KB of on die data and instruction cache as well as 1 MB of on die L2 cache running at core clock frequency.
Front panel connector pin assignments 155 Memory CP PIV memory uses DDR SDRAM technology. The CP PIV provides a maximum of two GBytes using two verticall DIMM sockets to install off-the-shelf DIMM modules. CP PIV only supports DDR SDRAM DIMM memory with a supply voltage of +2.5V. are supportedThe memory data path is 72-bit wide. The Intel 855GME Host Bridge supports 64 Mbit, 128 MByte, 256 MByte and 512 Mbyte SDRAM technologies with a maximum ROW page size of 16 Kbytes and CAS latency of 2 or 2.5.
NT4N39AA CP Pentium IV Card Table 29. ITP CONNECTOR Pin Outs Table 59 USB connector pin outs Pin number Pin name 1 USB VCC 2 USB- 3 USB+ 4 USB GND 10/100/1000 Mbps Ethernet ports The physical interface for the two 10/100/1000 Mbps Ethernet ports to the front panel is through a stacked dual RJ 45 connector with magnetics and LEDs. The corresponding pin details are shown in Table 60 "Ethernet connector pin outs" (page 156).
Front panel connector pin assignments 157 Table 61 Front panel LED functionality (cont’d.
NT4N39AA CP Pentium IV Card Nortel Communication Server 1000 Circuit Card Reference NN43001-311 02.06 Standard 27 August 2008 Copyright © 2003-2008 Nortel Networks .
. NT5D11 and NT5D14 Lineside T1 Interface cards Contents This section contains information on the following topics: “Introduction” (page 159) “Physical description” (page 160) “Functional description” (page 167) “Electrical specifications” (page 176) “Installation and configuration” (page 179) “QPC43 Peripheral Signaling card” (page 101) “Applications” (page 247) Introduction This section describes the two Lineside T1 interface cards: • • NT5D11 – applicable for Large Systems only NT5D14 – applicab
NT5D11 and NT5D14 Lineside T1 Interface cards such as the Nortel Norstar. The Lineside T1 card differs from trunk T1 cards in that it supports terminal equipment features such as hookflash, transfer, hold, and conference. This card occupies two card slots in the main or expansion cabinets. The Lineside T1 card can be installed in the system’s main cabinet or one of the expansion cabinets (there are no limitations on the number of cards that can be installed in the Cabinet system).
Physical description 161 printed circuit board. The daughterboard is contained on a 5.08 by 15.24 cm (2.0 by 6.0 in) printed circuit board and mounts to the motherboard on six standoffs. The Lineside T1 card mounts into any two consecutive IPE slots. The card consists of a motherboard and a daughterboard. The motherboard circuitry is contained on a standard 31.75 by 25.40 cm. (12.5 by 10.0 in) printed circuit board. The daughterboard is contained on a 5.08 by 15.24 cm (2.0 by 6.
NT5D11 and NT5D14 Lineside T1 Interface cards Card connections The Lineside T1 card uses the NT8D81AA Tip and Ring cable to connect from the IPE backplane to the 25-pair amphenol connector on the IPE I/O input/output (I/O) panel. The I/O panel connector then connects directly to a T1 line, external alarm, and an MMI terminal or modem using the NT5D13AA Lineside T1 I/O cable available from Nortel.
Physical description 163 In general, the LEDs operate as shown in Table 64 "NT5D14AA Lineside T1 faceplate LEDs" (page 163). Table 64 NT5D14AA Lineside T1 faceplate LEDs LED State Definition STATUS On (Red) The NT5D14AA card either failed its self-test or it hasn’t yet been configured in software. Off The card is in an active state. On (Red) A red alarm has been detected from the T1 link.
NT5D11 and NT5D14 Lineside T1 Interface cards The RED ALARM LED indicates that the Lineside T1 card has detected an alarm condition from the T1 link. Alarm conditions can include such conditions as not receiving a signal or the signal has exceeded bit error thresholds or frame slip thresholds. See “QPC43 Peripheral Signaling card” (page 101) for information on T1 link maintenance. If one of these alarm conditions is detected, the red LED lights.
Physical description 165 Table 65 Lineside T1 card LED operation LED OPERATION STATUS Line card RED ALARM T1 near end YELLOW ALARM T1 far end MAINT Maintenance The STATUS LED indicates that the Lineside T1 card has successfully passed its self test, and is functional. When the card is installed, this LED remains lit for two to five seconds as the self-test runs. If the self-test completes successfully, the LED flashes three times and remains lit.
NT5D11 and NT5D14 Lineside T1 Interface cards Figure 28 Lineside T1 card - faceplate Note: The STATUS LED indicates the enabled/disabled status of both card slots of the Lineside T1 card simultaneously. To properly enable the card, both the motherboard and the daughterboard slots must be enabled. The STATUS LED turns off as soon as either one of the Lineside T1 card slots are enabled. No LED operation is observed when the second card slot is enabled.
Functional description 167 The RED ALARM LED indicates that the Lineside T1 card has detected an alarm condition from the T1 link. Alarm conditions can include such conditions as not receiving a signal or the signal has exceeded bit error thresholds or frame slip thresholds. See “Functional description” (page 385) for information on T1 link maintenance. If one of these alarm conditions is detected, this red LED light.
NT5D11 and NT5D14 Lineside T1 Interface cards Figure 29 Lineside T1 card - block diagram The NT5D14AA provides the following features and functions: • • • • • • • • Card interfaces T1 interface circuit Signaling and control Card control functions Microcontroller Card LAN interface Sanity Timer Man-Machine Interface (MMI) Figure 31 "Lineside T1 card - T1 protocol dip switch locations" (page 182) shows a block diagram of the major functions contained on the Lineside T1 card.
Functional description 169 the system. The terminal equipment is assured access to analog (500/2500-type) telephone type line functionality such as hook flash, SPRE codes and ringback tones generated from the switch. Usually, the Lineside T1 card eliminates the need for channel bank type equipment normally placed between the switch and the terminal equipment. This provides a more robust and reliable end-to-end connection.
NT5D11 and NT5D14 Lineside T1 Interface cards • It is a more cost-effective alternative for connection because it eliminates the need for expensive channel bank equipment. • The Lineside T1 supports powerful T1 monitoring and diagnostic capability. • Overall costs for customer applications can also be reduced because the T1-compatible IPE is often more attractively priced than the analog-port alternatives.
Functional description 171 • It is a more cost-effective alternative for connection because it eliminates the need for expensive channel bank equipment. • The Lineside T1 supports powerful T1 monitoring and diagnostic capability. • Overall costs for customer applications can also be reduced because the T1-compatible peripheral equipment is often more attractively priced than the analog-port alternatives.
NT5D11 and NT5D14 Lineside T1 Interface cards The Lineside T1 card contains one T1 line interface circuit that provides 24 individually configurable voice interfaces to one T1 link in 24 different time slots. The circuit demultiplexes the 2.56 Mbps DS-30X Tx signaling bitstreams from the DS-30X network loop and converts it into 1.544 mHz T1 Tx signaling bitstreams onto the T1 link.
Functional description 173 calls. The circuits receive outgoing call signaling messages from the controller and return incoming call status information to the controller over the DS-30X network loop. The Lineside T1 card also contains signaling and control circuits that establish, supervise, and take down call connections. These circuits work with the system controller to operate the T1 line interface circuit during calls.
NT5D11 and NT5D14 Lineside T1 Interface cards — converts on/off-hook, and ringer control messages from the DS-30X loop into A/B bit manipulations for each time slot in the T1 data stream, using robbed bit signaling. • the front panel LED when the card is enabled or disabled by instructions from the NT8D01 controller card. The Lineside T1 card contains two microcontrollers that control the internal operation of the card and the serial card LAN link to the controller card.
Functional description 175 — control of the T1 line interface — enabling/disabling of individual units or entire card — programming of loop interface control circuits for administration of channel operation — maintenance diagnostics • interface with the line card circuit: — converts on/off-hook, and ringer control messages from the DS-30X loop into A/B bit manipulations for each time slot in the T1 data stream, using robbed bit signaling.
NT5D11 and NT5D14 Lineside T1 Interface cards Man-Machine Interface The Lineside T1 card provides an optional Man-Machine Interface (MMI) that is primarily used for T1 link performance monitoring and problem diagnosis. The MMI provides alarm notification, T1 link performance reporting and fault isolation testing. The interface is accessed through connections from the I/O panel to a terminal or modem.
Electrical specifications 177 Table 66 Lineside T1 card - line interface unit electrical characteristics (cont’d.) Characteristics Description Signaling Loop or ground start A/B robbed-bit Distance to Customer Premise Equipment (CPE) or Channel Service Unit 0-199.
NT5D11 and NT5D14 Lineside T1 Interface cards The Lineside T1 card requires +15 V, –15 V, and +5 V from the backplane. One NT8D06 Peripheral Equipment Power Supply ac or NT6D40 Peripheral Equipment Power Supply dc can supply power to a maximum of eight Lineside T1 cards. Table 69 Lineside T1 card - power required Voltage Current (max.) + 5.0 V dc 1.6 Amp +15.0 V dc 150 mA. –15.0 V dc 150 mA. The Lineside T1 card obtains its power from the Option 11C’s backplane.
Installation and configuration 179 Table 71 Lineside T1 card - environmental specifications Parameter Specifications Operating temperature-normal 15 to +30 C (+59 to 86 F), ambient Operating temperature-short term 10 to +45 C (+50 to 113 F), ambient Operating humidity-normal 20% to 55% RH (non-condensing) Operating humidity-short term 20% to 80% RH (non-condensing) Storage temperature –50 to +70 C (–58 to 158 F), ambient Storage humidity 5% to 95% RH (non-condensing) Table 72 "Lines
NT5D11 and NT5D14 Lineside T1 Interface cards 6 Verify initial T1 operation and configure MMI (optional). --End-- Steps 1-5 are explained in this section. Step 6 is covered in “QPC43 Peripheral Signaling card” (page 101). Installation and configuration of the Lineside T1 card consists of six basic steps: Step Action 1 Configure the dip switches on the Lineside T1 card for the environment. 2 Install the Lineside T1 card into the selected card slots in the IPE shelf.
Installation and configuration 181 When the line-side T1 card is oriented as shown in Figure 31 "Lineside T1 card - T1 protocol dip switch locations" (page 182), the dip switches are ON when they are up, and OFF when they are down. The dip switch settings configure the card for the following parameters: MMI port speed selection This dip switch setting selects the appropriate baud rate for the terminal or modem (if any) that is connected to the MMI.
NT5D11 and NT5D14 Lineside T1 Interface cards Figure 31 Lineside T1 card - T1 protocol dip switch locations T1 framing The Lineside T1 card is capable of interfacing with CPE or CSU equipment either in D4 or ESF framing mode. Make the selection for this dip switch position based on what type of framing the CPE or CSU equipment supports. T1 coding The Lineside T1 card is capable of interfacing with CPE or CSU equipment using either AMI or B8ZS coding.
Installation and configuration 183 DSX-1 length Estimate the distance between the Lineside T1 card and the hardwired local CPE, or the Telco demarc RJ48, for the carrier facility connecting the Lineside T1 and the remote CPE. Make the selection for this dip switch position based on this distance. Line supervision on T1 failure This setting determines in what state all 24 ports of the Lineside T1 card appears to the CS 1000M, CS 1000E and Meridian 1in case of T1 failure.
NT5D11 and NT5D14 Lineside T1 Interface cards Table 73 Lineside T1 card-T1 Switch 1 (S1) dip switch settings (cont’d.
Installation and configuration 185 Table 75 Lineside T1 card - T1 Switch 2 (S2) dip switch settings (cont’d.
NT5D11 and NT5D14 Lineside T1 Interface cards Figure 32 Lineside T1 card - T1 protocol dip switch locations Line Supervisory Signaling protocol As described in “Power requirements” (page 317), the Lineside T1 card is capable of supporting loop start or ground start call processing modes. Make the selection for this dip switch position based on what type of line signaling the CPE equipment supports. Nortel Communication Server 1000 Circuit Card Reference NN43001-311 02.
Installation and configuration 187 Address of Lineside T1 card to the MMI The address of the Lineside T1 card to the MMI is made up of two components: • • The address of the card within the shelf The address of the shelf in which the card resides These two addresses are combined to create a unique address for the card. The MMI reads the address of the card within the shelf from the card firmware; however the address of the shelf must be set by this dip switch.
NT5D11 and NT5D14 Lineside T1 Interface cards Daisy-Chaining to MMI If two or more Lineside T1 cards are installed and the MMI is used, daisy-chain the cards together to use one MMI terminal or modem, See Figure 37 "Lineside T1 card - connecting two or more cards to the MMI" (page 209). Make the selection for this dip switch position based on how many Lineside T1 cards are installed. MMI Master or Slave This setting is used only if daisy-chaining the cards to the MMI terminal or modem.
Installation and configuration 189 Table 78 Lineside T1 card - XPEC address dip switch settings (Switch S1, positions 3 - 6) (cont’d.
NT5D11 and NT5D14 Lineside T1 Interface cards Table 80 Lineside T1 card - CPE or CSU distance dip switch settings (Switch S2, positions 3 - 5) Distance S2 Switch Position 3 S2 Switch Position 4 S2 Switch Position 5 0–133 On Off Off 134–266 Off On On 267–399 Off On Off 400–533 Off Off On 534–655 Off Off Off Installation This section describes how to install and test the Lineside T1 card. When installed, the Lineside T1 card occupies two card slots.
Installation and configuration 191 Table 81 Lineside T1 card - NT8D37 IPE module vintage level port cabling (cont’d.) Vintage Level Number of ports cabled to I/O panel NT8D37DE 16 ports NT8D37EC 24 ports This section describes how to install and test the Lineside T1 card. When installed, the Lineside T1 card occupies two card slots. It can be installed into an NT8D37 Intelligent Peripheral Equipment (IPE) Module.
NT5D11 and NT5D14 Lineside T1 Interface cards If the Lineside T1 card is installed in an NT8D37 IPE Module, the available card slots depend on the vintage level module. Vintage levels cabling 24 ports For modules with vintage levels that cabled 24 ports to the I/O panel, the Lineside T1 card can be installed in any pair of card slots 015. For modules with vintage levels that cabled 24 ports to the I/O panel, the Lineside T1 card can be installed in any pair of card slots 015.
Installation and configuration 193 Also, all Lineside T1 card connections can be made at the main distribution frame instead of connecting the NT5D13 Lineside T1 card external I/O cable at the I/O panel. This eliminates these card slots restrictions.
NT5D11 and NT5D14 Lineside T1 Interface cards Cabling the Lineside T1 card After configuring the dip switches and installing the Lineside T1 card into the selected card slots, the Lineside T1 card is ready to be cabled to the CPE or CSU equipment. Connections can also be made to the MMI terminal or modem (optional), an external alarm (optional), and other Lineside T1 cards for daisy-chain use of the MMI terminal (optional).
Installation and configuration 4 195 a DB9 female connector (P4) that connects to the next Lineside T1 card’s P4 connector for MMI daisy chaining --End-- Usually, the I/O panel is connected to the T1 link and other external devices through the NT5D13AA Lineside T1 I/O cable. See Figure 35 "Lineside T1 card - connecting two or more cards to the MMI" (page 202). This cable consists of a 25-pair amphenol connector (P1) on one end which plugs into the I/O panel.
NT5D11 and NT5D14 Lineside T1 Interface cards Figure 33 Lineside T1 card - connection using the NTSD13AA Lineside T1 cable Nortel Communication Server 1000 Circuit Card Reference NN43001-311 02.06 Standard 27 August 2008 Copyright © 2003-2008 Nortel Networks .
Installation and configuration Figure 34 Lineside T1 card - connection using the NTSD13AA Lineside T1 cable Nortel Communication Server 1000 Circuit Card Reference NN43001-311 02.06 Standard 27 August 2008 Copyright © 2003-2008 Nortel Networks .
NT5D11 and NT5D14 Lineside T1 Interface cards 3 Turn over the T1 transmit and receive pairs, where required for hardwiring the Lineside T1 card to local CPE T1 terminal equipment. --End-- The backplane connector is arranged as an 80-row by 2-column array of pins. Table 83 "Lineside T1 card - backplane pinouts" (page 198) shows the I/O pin designations for the backplane connector and the 25-pair Amphenol connector from the I/O panel.
Installation and configuration 199 Table 84 "Lineside T1 card - NT5D13AA connector pinouts" (page 199) shows the pin assignments when using the NT5D13AA Lineside T1 I/O cable.
NT5D11 and NT5D14 Lineside T1 Interface cards at the Telco demarc, the CSU, or other T1 carrier equipment. The T1 CPE equipment at the far end has transmit and receive wired straight from the RJ48 demarc at the far end of the carrier facility. External alarm connections P3 connector pins 3, 4, and 28 can be plugged into any external alarm hardware. Plug the male DB9 connector labeled "P3" into the external alarm.
Installation and configuration 201 Cards can be located in up to 16 separate IPE shelves. Any card slot in the IPE shelf can be connected to any other card slot; the card slots connected together do not need to be consecutive.
NT5D11 and NT5D14 Lineside T1 Interface cards Figure 35 Lineside T1 card - connecting two or more cards to the MMI To make the connections at the MDF, follow this procedure: Step Action 1 Punch down the first eight pairs of a standard telco 25-pair female-connectorized cross-connect tail starting with the first tip and ring pair of the Lineside T1 motherboard card slot on the cross-connect side of the MDF terminals.
Installation and configuration 203 The backplane connector is arranged as an 80-row by 2-column array of pins. Table 85 "Lineside T1 card - backplane pinouts" (page 203) shows the I/O pin designations for the backplane connector and the 25-pair Amphenol connector from the I/O panel. Although the connections from the I/O panel only use 14 of the available 50-pins, the remaining pins are reserved and cannot be used for other signaling transmissions.
NT5D11 and NT5D14 Lineside T1 Interface cards Table 86 Lineside T1 card - NT5D13AA Connector pinouts I/O Panel Connector Pin Lead Designations NT5D 13AA Lineside T1 I/O Conn ector Pin 1 T1 Tip Receive Data 11 26 T1 Ring Receive Data 3 2 T1 Tip Transmit Data 1 27 T1 Ring Transmit Data 9 3 Alarm out common 1 28 Alarm out (normally open) 2 4 Alarm out (normally closed) 3 7 Towards MMI terminal Receive Data 2 31 Towards MMI terminal Transmit Data 3 33 Ground 5 8 Control
Installation and configuration 205 facilities. If the Lineside T1 card is connected through T1 carrier facilities, the transmit and receive pairs must be wired straight through to the RJ48 at the Telco demarc, the CSU, or other T1 carrier equipment. The T1 CPE equipment at the far end has transmit and receive wired straight from the RJ48 demarc at the far end of the carrier facility.
NT5D11 and NT5D14 Lineside T1 Interface cards One of the ways it can report information is through this external alarm connection. If connected, the Lineside T1 card’s microprocessor activates the external alarm hardware if it detects certain T1 link problems that it has classified as alarm levels 1 or 2. See “Functional description” (page 385) for a detailed description of alarm levels and configuration.
Installation and configuration 207 terminal) from the first card into the DB9 male connector of the second card labeled "P5" (towards MMI terminal). 3 Repeat Step 2 for the remaining cards. 4 When the last card in the daisy chain is reached, make no connection to the DB9 male connector labeled "P4" (away from MMI terminal).
NT5D11 and NT5D14 Lineside T1 Interface cards alarm connections, MMI connections are optional. Up to 128 Lineside T1 cards, located in up to 16 separate IPE shelves, can be linked to one MMI terminal using the daisy chaining approach. If only one Lineside T1 card is being installed, cable from the DB9 female connector labeled "P5" (towards MMI terminal) to one of the COM ports on the back of any TTY, a PC running a terminal emulation program, or a modem.
Installation and configuration 209 Figure 37 Lineside T1 card - connecting two or more cards to the MMI --End-- Terminal configuration For the MMI terminal to be able to communicate to the Lineside T1 card, the interface characteristics must be configured to the following: • Speed – 1200 or 2400 bps, depending on the setting of switch position 1 of Switch 1 • • • • Character width – 8 bits Parity bit – none Stop bits – one Software handshake (XON/XOFF) – off Nortel Communication Server 1000 Circuit
NT5D11 and NT5D14 Lineside T1 Interface cards For the MMI terminal to be able to communicate to the Lineside T1 card, the interface characteristics must be set to the following: • Speed – 1200 or 2400 bps, depending on the setting of switch position 1 of Switch 1 • • • • Character width – 8 bits Parity bit – none Stop bits – one Software handshake (XON/XOFF) – off Software configuration Although much of the architecture and many of the features of the Lineside T1 card differ from the analog line
Installation and configuration 211 Table 87 DX-30 to T1 time slot mapping (cont’d.
NT5D11 and NT5D14 Lineside T1 Interface cards daughterboard circuit card is located in right card slot. For example, if the Lineside T1 card is installed into card slots 0 and 1, the motherboard would reside in card slot 0 and the daughterboard would reside in card slot 1. In order to configure the terminal equipment through the switch software, the T1 channel number must be cross-referenced to the corresponding card unit number.
Installation and configuration 213 Disconnect supervision The Lineside T1 card supports far-end disconnect supervision by opening the tip side toward the terminal equipment upon the system’s detecting a disconnect signal from the far-end on an established call. The Supervised Analog Line feature (SAL) must be configured in LD 10 for each Lineside T1 port.
NT5D11 and NT5D14 Lineside T1 Interface cards equipment. Terminating calls are incoming to the terminal equipment. The Lineside T1 card does not support battery reversal answer and disconnect supervision on originating calls. After the software is configured, power up the card and verify the self test results. The STATUS LED on the faceplate indicates whether or not the Lineside T1 card has passed its self test, and is functional.
Clocking Requirement 215 Pre requisites The pre requisites for connecting an MGC DECT Clock Reference Cable are the following: • MGC DECT Clock Reference Cable --- NTDW67AAE5. Figure 38 "MGC DECT Clock Reference Cable" (page 215) shows the MGC DECT Clock Reference Cable. It is used to provide clock reference between CS1000 Media Gateway Cabinet/chassis.
NT5D11 and NT5D14 Lineside T1 Interface cards Mini chassis or Succession 1.0 MG chassis" (page 216) shows the 10Base-T AUI connection of the Option 11C Mini chassis or Succession 1.0 MG chassis. Figure 40 Option 11C Mini chassis or Succession 1.0 MG chassis 3 Use an MGC Breakout Adapter for Option 11C (NTDW63AAE5) • • Connect the adapter to 25 pairs MDF connector at Slot 0 Connect the MGC DECT Clock Reference Cable (NTDW67AAE5) to 15-pin DSUB connector on the Breakout Adapter.
Man-Machine T1 maintenance interface software 217 Man-Machine T1 maintenance interface software Description The Man-Machine Interface (MMI) supplies a maintenance interface to a terminal that provides T1 link diagnostics and historical information. See “Installation and configuration” (page 179) for instructions on how to install the cabling and configure the terminal for the MMI. This section describes the features of MMI and explains how to configure and use the MMI firmware.
NT5D11 and NT5D14 Lineside T1 Interface cards The alarms are activated in response to pre-set thresholds and error durations. Descriptions of each of these T1 link alarm conditions, instructions on how to configure alarm parameters, and access alarm reporting can be found in “Alarm operation and reporting” (page 235). Two levels of alarm severity exist for bit errors and frame slip errors. For these conditions, two different threshold and duration configurations are established.
Man-Machine T1 maintenance interface software • • 219 loss of signal condition blue alarm condition The alarms are activated in response to pre-set thresholds and error durations. Descriptions of each of these T1 link alarm conditions, instructions on how to set alarm parameters, and access alarm reporting can be found in “Alarm operation and reporting” (page 235). Two levels of alarm severity exist for bit errors and frame slip errors.
NT5D11 and NT5D14 Lineside T1 Interface cards T1 performance counters and reports The MMI maintains performance error counters for the following T1 conditions: • • • • • errored seconds bursty seconds unavailable seconds framer slip seconds loss of frame seconds It retains the T1 performance statistics for the current hour, and for each hour for the previous 24 hours.
Man-Machine T1 maintenance interface software 221 For single card installations, log in by entering: L For multiple card installations connected in a daisy-chain, log in by entering: L where the four-digit address is the two-digit address of the IPE shelf as set by dip switch positions (dip switch #1, positions 3-6) on the card (as opposed to the address set in the CS 1000 software), plus the two-digit address of the card slot that the motherboard occupies.
NT5D11 and NT5D14 Lineside T1 Interface cards where the four-digit address is the two-digit address of the IPE shelf as set by dip switch positions (dip switch #1, positions 3-6) on the card (as opposed to the address set in the Meridian 1 software), plus the two-digit address of the card slot that the motherboard occupies.
Man-Machine T1 maintenance interface software 223 ALARM USAGE: Alarm [Enable | Disable] CLEAR USAGE: Clear [Alarm] | [Error counter] [Log] DISPLAY USAGE: Display [Alarm | Status | Perform | History] [Pause] HELP USAGE: Help | ? SET USAGE: Set [Time | Date | Alarm | Clearing | Name | Memory] TEST USAGE: Test [Carrier All] QUIT USAGE: Quit Notation Used: CAPS - Required Letters [ ] - | - Either/ Optional Or Each of these commands can be executed by typing the first letter of the command or by typing the en
NT5D11 and NT5D14 Lineside T1 Interface cards Table 89 MMI commands and command sets (cont’d.) Command DC Description Display Configuration Displays the configuration settings for the cards including: • the serial number of the card • • • • • • D H [P] DP MMI firmware version date and time alarm enable/disable setting self-clearing enable/disable setting settings entered in Set Configuration dip switch settings Display History [Pause] Displays performance counters for the past 24 hours.
Man-Machine T1 maintenance interface software 225 MMI commands can now be executed. There are seven basic commands that can be combined together to form a total of 19 command sets. They are: • • • • • • • Alarm Clear Display Set Test Help Quit If ? is typed, the MMI lists the above commands along with an explanation of their usage. A screen similar to the following appears. The help screen also appears by typing H, or HELP.
NT5D11 and NT5D14 Lineside T1 Interface cards Table 90 MMI commands and command sets (cont’d.
Man-Machine T1 maintenance interface software 227 Table 90 MMI commands and command sets (cont’d.) Command Description SA Set Alarm parameters Alarm parameters include the allowable bit errors per second threshold and alarm duration SC Set Clearing Sets the alarm self-clearing function to either enable or disable SD Set Date Sets date or verifies current date ST Set time Sets time or verifies current time Tx Test Initiates the T1 carrier test function.
NT5D11 and NT5D14 Lineside T1 Interface cards faceplate lights and an alarm message is created in the alarm log and the MMI terminal. • Alarm Level 2 (AL2) consists of activity with an error threshold above the AL2 setting. This is an unsatisfactory condition. In this situation, the external alarm hardware is activated by closing the normally open contact. The RED ALARM LED on the faceplate lights, an alarm message is created in the alarm log and the MMI terminal.
Man-Machine T1 maintenance interface software 229 If the Set Clearing (S C) "Enable Self Clearing" option is set, the alarm indications (LEDs and external alarm contacts) clear automatically after the duration period expires. Otherwise, the alarm continues until the command set Clear Alarm (C A) is entered.
NT5D11 and NT5D14 Lineside T1 Interface cards When entering the Set Alarm command set, the MMI scrolls through the previously described series of alarm options. These options are displayed along with their current value. Enter a new value or press Enter to retain the current value. Table 92 "Set alarm options" (page 230) outlines the options available in the Set Alarm function.
Man-Machine T1 maintenance interface software 231 LTI S/N 1103 Software Version 1.01 3/03/95 1:50 Alarms Enabled: YES Self Clearing Enabled: YES Alarm Level 1 threshold value: E-7 Threshold duration (in seconds): 10 Alarm Level 2 threshold value: E-5 Threshold duration (in seconds): 1 Frame slips alarm level threshold: 5 Threshold duration (in hours): 2 Current dip switch S1 settings (S1..S8) On Off Off On Off Off Off On Current dip switch S2 settings (S1..
NT5D11 and NT5D14 Lineside T1 Interface cards Lineside T1 card enters line processing mode and a yellow alarm message is sent to the CPE/CSU. Line processing sends the Meridian 1 either all "on-hook" or all "off-hook" signals depending on the dip switch setting of the card. When the Set Alarm command is used, a prompt appears to set the threshold level and duration period for alarm levels 1 and 2.
Man-Machine T1 maintenance interface software 233 When an alarm is cleared, the following activity caused by the alarm is cleared: • the external alarm hardware is deactivated (the contact normally open is reopened) • • the LED light turns off • carrier fail line supervision ceases (for alarm level 2 only) an entry is made in the alarm log of the date and time when the alarm is cleared If self-clearing alarm indications are disabled, carrier fail line supervision terminates when the alarm conditio
NT5D11 and NT5D14 Lineside T1 Interface cards Table 94 Set alarm options Option Description AL1 Threshold Sets the allowable bit errors per second (from 3 to 9) before alarm level 1 is activated. Factory default is 10–6. AL1 Duration Sets the duration in seconds (from 1 to 3,600 seconds) that alarm level 1 is activated. Factory default is 10 seconds. AL2 Threshold Sets the allowable bit errors per second (from 3 to 9) before alarm level 2 is activated. Factory default is 10-5 AL2 Duration .
Man-Machine T1 maintenance interface software 235 Alarm Level 2 threshold value: E-5 Threshold duration (in seconds): 1 Frame slips alarm level threshold: 5 Threshold duration (in hours): 2 Current dip switch S1 settings (S1..S8) On Off Off On Off Off Off On Current dip switch S2 settings (S1..
NT5D11 and NT5D14 Lineside T1 Interface cards Alarm Disable The Alarm Disable (A D) command disables the external alarm contacts. When this command is typed, the MMI displays the message "Alarms Disabled" and the MAINT LED turns on. In this mode, no yellow alarms are sent and the Lineside T1 card does not enter line processing mode. Alarm messages are still sent to the MMI terminal and the LED light continues to indicate alarm conditions.
Man-Machine T1 maintenance interface software 237 Display Status The Display Status (D S) command set displays the current alarm condition of the T1 link as well as the on-hook or off-hook status of each of the 24 ports of the Lineside T1 card. Entering the Display Status (D S) command set causes a screen similar to the following to appear: LTI S/N Software Version 1.
NT5D11 and NT5D14 Lineside T1 Interface cards declared and silence is sent on all receive timeslots. The alarm is cleared if, after two seconds, neither a loss of signal, out of frame condition, nor blue alarm condition occurs. If a repeating device loses signal, it immediately begins sending an unframed all 1’s signal to the far-end to indicate an alarm condition. This condition is called a blue alarm, or an Alarm Indication Signal (AIS).
Man-Machine T1 maintenance interface software 239 Alarm Log 3/03/95 1:48 Yellow alarm on T1 carrier 3/03/95 1:50 Initialized Memory 3/03/95 2:33 T1 carrier level 1 alarm 3/03/95 3:47 T1 carrier level 2 alarm 3/03/95 4:43 T1 carrier performance within thresholds 3/03/95 15:01 Log Cleared The Pause command can be used to display a full screen at a time by entering D A P. Clear Alarm Log Clear all entries in the alarm log by typing in the Clear Alarm Log (C A L) command set.
NT5D11 and NT5D14 Lineside T1 Interface cards errored seconds (excluding the final 10 non-severely errored seconds). Severely errored seconds are defined as more than 320 CRC-6 errors, or one or more out of frames in a second. • Loss of frame seconds – loss of frame or loss of signal for three consecutive seconds. • Framer slip seconds – one ore more frame slips in a second.
Man-Machine T1 maintenance interface software 241 LTI T1 Interface History Performance Log 3/03/95 1:35 Hour Errored Bursty Unavailable Loss Frame Error Frame Slip Ending Seconds Seconds Seconds Seconds Seconds Counter 20:00 139 0 129 139 23 162 19.00 0 0 0 0 0 0 18.00 0 0 0 0 0 0 17.00 0 0 0 0 0 0 16.00 0 0 0 0 0 0 Use the pause command to display a full screen at a time by entering D H P. Clear Error Reset the error counter to zero by entering the Clear Error (C E) command set.
NT5D11 and NT5D14 Lineside T1 Interface cards determine if an alarm condition has been corrected. Simply clear the error counter, wait a few minutes, and display performance to see if any errors occurred since the counter was cleared. Display the reports on these performance counters by entering the Display Performance (D P) or the Display History (D H) command sets into the MMI. Display Performance Enter the Display Performance (D P) command set to display performance counters for the past hour.
Man-Machine T1 maintenance interface software 243 Testing The Test Carrier (T C) command set enables tests to be run on the Lineside T1 card, the T1 link, or the CPE device. These three tests provide the capability to isolate faulty conditions in any one of these three sources. See Table 95 "MMI Tests" (page 243) for additional information on these three test types. After entering the T C command set, select which test to start.
NT5D11 and NT5D14 Lineside T1 Interface cards Test 1, local loopback, loops the T1 link signaling toward itself at the backplane connector, and test data is generated and received on all timeslots. If this test fails, it indicates that the Lineside T1 card is defective. Figure 42 "MMI local loopback test" (page 244) demonstrates how the signaling is looped back toward itself. Figure 42 MMI local loopback test Test 2, external loopback, assumes an external loopback is applied to the T1 link.
Man-Machine T1 maintenance interface software 245 Figure 44 MMI network loopback test The Test Carrier (T C) command set enables tests to be run on the Lineside T1 card, the T1 link, or the CPE device. These three tests provide the capability to isolate faulty conditions in any one of these three sources. See Table 96 "MMI Tests" (page 246) for additional information on these three test types. After entering the T C command set, select which test to start.
NT5D11 and NT5D14 Lineside T1 Interface cards Table 96 MMI Tests Test Number Equipment Tested Test Description 1 Lineside T1 card Local loopback 2 T1 link, Lineside T1 card and T1 network External loopback 3 CPE device and T1 network Network loopback Test 1, local loopback, loops the T1 link signaling toward itself at the backplane connector, and test data is generated and received on all timeslots. If this test fails, it indicates that the Lineside T1 card is defective.
Applications 247 Test 3, network loopback, loops the received T1 data back toward the CPE equipment. No test data is generated or received by the Lineside T1 card. If test 2 passes but test 3 fails, it indicates that the CPE device is defective. If test 2 was not run and test 3 fails, the T1 link or the CPE device could be defective. To isolate the failure to the CPE device, tests 2 and 3 must be run in tandem.
NT5D11 and NT5D14 Lineside T1 Interface cards For example, the Lineside T1 card can be used to connect the system to a T1-compatible VRU. An example of this type of equipment is Nortel Open IVR system. In this way, the system can send a call to the VRU. Because the Lineside T1 card supports analog (500/2500-type) telephones, the VRU is able to send the call back to the system for further handling.
Applications 249 Figure 49 Lineside T1 interface in off-premise application Similarly, the Lineside T1 can be used to provide a connection between the system and a remote Norstar system. See Figure 50 "Lineside T1 interface connection to Norstar system" (page 250). In this case, channel banks would not be required if the Norstar system is equipped with a T1 interface. Nortel Communication Server 1000 Circuit Card Reference NN43001-311 02.
NT5D11 and NT5D14 Lineside T1 Interface cards Figure 50 Lineside T1 interface connection to Norstar system The Lineside T1 card audio levels must be considered when determining the appropriateness of an application.The Lineside T1 interface is an Intelligent Peripheral Equipment (IPE) line card that provides cost-effective connection between T1-compatible peripheral equipment and a Meridian 1 system or off-premise extensions over long distances.
Applications 251 Figure 51 Lineside T1 interface connection to peripheral equipment For example, the Lineside T1 card can be used to connect the Meridian 1 to a T1-compatible VRU. An example of this type of equipment is Nortel Networks Open IVR system. In this way, the Meridian 1 can send a call to the VRU. Because the Lineside T1 card supports analog (500/2500-type) telephones, the VRU is able to send the call back to the Meridian 1 for further handling.
NT5D11 and NT5D14 Lineside T1 Interface cards Figure 52 Lineside T1 interface in off-premise application Similarly, the Lineside T1 can be used to provide a connection between the Meridian 1 system and a remote Norstar system. See Figure 53 "Lineside T1 interface connection to Norstar system" (page 253). In this case, channel banks would not be required if the Norstar system is equipped with a T1 interface. Nortel Communication Server 1000 Circuit Card Reference NN43001-311 02.
Applications Figure 53 Lineside T1 interface connection to Norstar system Note: The Lineside T1 card audio levels must be considered when determining the appropriateness of an application. Nortel Communication Server 1000 Circuit Card Reference NN43001-311 02.06 Standard 27 August 2008 Copyright © 2003-2008 Nortel Networks .
NT5D11 and NT5D14 Lineside T1 Interface cards Nortel Communication Server 1000 Circuit Card Reference NN43001-311 02.06 Standard 27 August 2008 Copyright © 2003-2008 Nortel Networks .
. NT5D33 and NT5D34 Lineside E1 Interface cards Contents This section contains information on the following topics: “Introduction” (page 255) “Physical description” (page 256) “Functional description” (page 260) “Electrical specifications” (page 264) “Installation and Configuration” (page 266) “Installation” (page 272) “Man-Machine E1 maintenance interface software” (page 284) “Applications” (page 307) Introduction Two vintages of NT5D33 and NT5D34 cards are supported: • NT5D33AB/NT5D34AB – standar
NT5D33 and NT5D34 Lineside E1 Interface cards The ELEI card is similar to an LEI card, but has been enhanced to allow the capability of transporting caller information using the proprietary signaling interface Channel Associated Signaling (CAS+). ELEI cards can operate in one of two modes: LEI mode, or enhanced (ELEI) mode. In LEI mode, this card is fully compatible with, and provides the same functionality as, the standard LEI card.
Physical description Figure 54 NT5D33AB LEI card - faceplate Nortel Communication Server 1000 Circuit Card Reference NN43001-311 02.06 Standard 27 August 2008 Copyright © 2003-2008 Nortel Networks .
NT5D33 and NT5D34 Lineside E1 Interface cards Figure 55 NT5D34AB LEI card - faceplate The LEDs give status indications on the operations as described in Table 97 "LEI card LED operation" (page 258). Table 97 LEI card LED operation LED Operation Status Line card Nortel Communication Server 1000 Circuit Card Reference NN43001-311 02.06 Standard 27 August 2008 Copyright © 2003-2008 Nortel Networks .
Physical description 259 Table 97 LEI card LED operation (cont’d.) LED Operation Red alarm E1 near end Yellow alarm E1 far end Maint Maintenance The STATUS LED indicates if the LEI has successfully passed its self test, and therefore, if it is functional. When the card is installed, this LED remains lit for two to five seconds as the self-test runs. If the self-test completes successfully, the LED flashes three times and remains lit.
NT5D33 and NT5D34 Lineside E1 Interface cards red alarm condition such as not receiving a signal, or the signal exceeds bit-error thresholds or frame-slip thresholds, a yellow alarm signal is sent to the LEI, if the terminal equipment supports this feature. If a yellow alarm signal is detected, the LED turns on. The MAINT LED indicates if LEI is fully operational because of certain maintenance commands that are issued through the MMI.
Functional description 261 Overview The LEI card is an IPE line card that provides a cost-effective, all-digital connection between E1-compatible terminal equipment (such as voice mail systems, voice response units, trading turrets, etc.) and the system. In this application, the terminal equipment can be assured access to analog (500/2500-type) telephone line functionality such as hook flash, SPRE codes and ringback tones. The LEI supports line supervision features such as loop and ground start protocols.
NT5D33 and NT5D34 Lineside E1 Interface cards E1 transmit signaling bitstreams onto the E1 link. It also does the opposite, receiving receive signaling bitstreams from the E1 link and transmitting receive signaling bitstreams onto the DS-30X network loop.
Functional description 263 — programming of loop interface control circuits for administration of channel operation — maintenance diagnostics • interface with the line card circuit — converts on/off-hook, and ringer control messages from the DS-30X loop into A/B bit manipulations for each time slot in the E1 data stream, using channel associated signaling. • the front panel LED when the card is enabled or disabled by instructions from the NT8D01 controller card.
NT5D33 and NT5D34 Lineside E1 Interface cards ELEI additional functionality As mentioned earlier, ELEI cards are enhanced to allow CAS+ compliance, as shown in Figure 57 "CAS+ compliance" (page 264). This enhancement provides several additional benefits for systems with ELEI cards installed. Note: MDECTS and ELEI (operating in enhanced mode) cannot be configured on the same system.
Electrical specifications 265 E1 channel specifications Table 98 "LEI card - line interface unit electrical characteristics" (page 265) provides specifications for the 30 E1 channels. Each characteristic is set by a dip switch. “Installation and Configuration” (page 266) for a discussion of the corresponding dip switch settings.
NT5D33 and NT5D34 Lineside E1 Interface cards Table 100 LEI card - environmental specifications Parameter Specifications Operating temperature – normal 15 to +30 C (+59 to 86 F), ambient Operating temperature – short term 10 to +45 C (+50 to 113 F), ambient Operating humidity – normal 20% to 55% RH (non-condensing) Operating humidity – short term 20% to 80% RH (non condensing) Storage temperature –50 to + 70 C (–58 to 158 F), ambient Storage humidity 5% to 95% RH (non-condensin
Installation and Configuration 267 Dip switch settings Begin the installation and configuration of the LEI by selecting the proper dip switch settings for the environment. The LEI contains two dip switches, each containing eight switch positions. They are located in the upper right corner of the motherboard circuit card as shown in Figure 58 "LEI card - E1 protocol dip switch locations" (page 268).
NT5D33 and NT5D34 Lineside E1 Interface cards E1 Coding The LEI is capable of interfacing with LTU equipment using either AMI or HDB3 coding. Make the selection for this dip switch position based on the type of coding the LTU equipment supports. Figure 58 LEI card - E1 protocol dip switch locations Nortel Communication Server 1000 Circuit Card Reference NN43001-311 02.06 Standard 27 August 2008 Copyright © 2003-2008 Nortel Networks .
Installation and Configuration 269 Line supervision on E1 failure This setting determines in what state all 30 LEI ports appear to the CS 1000E, CS 1000M, and Meridian 1in case of E1 failure. Ports can appear as either in the "on-hook" or "off-hook" states on E1 failure. Note: All idle LEI lines go off-hook and seize a Digitone Receiver when the off-hook line processing is invoked on E1 failure. This may prevent DID trunks from receiving incoming calls until the LEI lines time-out and release the DTRs.
NT5D33 and NT5D34 Lineside E1 Interface cards Table 101 LEI card - Switch 1 dip switch settings (cont’d.) Selection Switch Position Switch Setting Factory Default XTI = 19 XMLC = 18 7 7 ON OFF OFF See Table 102 "LEI card signaling-type dip switch settings" (page 270) 8 OFF OFF Characteristic Card type for ringer allocation E1 signaling When dip switch #1, positions 2 and 8 are set to "Table," AB Bits are configured by the user through the Set Mode MMI command (see “Set Mode” (page 294)).
Installation and Configuration 271 Table 103 LEI card - XPEC address dip switch settings (Switch S1, positions 3-6) (cont’d.) XPEC Address S1 Switch Position 3 S1 Switch Position 4 S1 Switch Position 5 S1 Switch Position 6 11 ON ON OFF ON 12 OFF OFF ON ON 13 ON OFF ON ON 14 OFF ON ON ON 15 ON ON ON ON When setting E1 Switch 2 dip switch settings, there are differences between vintages.
NT5D33 and NT5D34 Lineside E1 Interface cards Table 105 ELEI card - E1 Switch 2 (S2) dip switch settings Characteristic Selection E1 framing CRC-4 Disabled Switch Position Switch Setting Factory Default 1 ON ON CRC-4 Enabled E1 coding AMI OFF 2 HDB3 ON OFF OFF NOT USED leave ON 3 ON ON NOT USED leave ON 4 OFF OFF Mode LEI Mode 5 OFF OFF ELEI Mode Line processing on E1 link failure On-hook ON 6 Off-hook Daisy-chaining to MMI YES Master OFF OFF 7 NO MMI master or
Installation 273 If installing the LEI into the NT8D37 IPE module, determine the vintage level model. Certain vintage levels carry dedicated 25-pair I/O connectors only for card slots 0, 4, 8, and 12. These vintage levels are cabled with only 16 pairs of wires from each card slot to the I/O panel. Some of the 25-pair I/O connectors are split between adjacent card slots. Other vintage levels cable each card slot to the I/O panel using a unique, 24-pair connector on the I/O panel.
NT5D33 and NT5D34 Lineside E1 Interface cards Restricted: Motherboard/Daughterboard 2 and 3 3 and 4 6 and 7 10 and 11 11 and 12 14 and 15 If the LEI must be installed into one of the restricted card slot pairs, rewire the IPE module card slot to the I/O panel by installing an additional NT8D81 cable from the LEI motherboard slot to the I/O panel, and re-arranging the three backplane connectors for the affected card slots.
Installation 275 3. a second DB9 male connector (P5), which connects to an MMI terminal or modem 4. a DB9 female connector (P4), which connects to the next LEI’s P4 connector for MMI daisy chaining In a coaxial E1 installation, make the connection from the I/O panel to the E1 link and other external devices through the NT5D36AA lineside E1 I/O cable. This cable consists of a 25-pair amphenol connector (P1) on one end which plugs into the I/O panel. The other end has 4 connectors: 1.
NT5D33 and NT5D34 Lineside E1 Interface cards Table 107 LEI card - LEI backplane and I/O panel pinouts (cont’d.) Backplane connector pin I/O Panel connector pin Signal 18A 7 Toward MMI terminal, receive data 18B 32 Daisy chain control 2 19A 8 Daisy chain control 1 19B 33 Ground Table 108 "LEI card - lineside E1 I/O cable pinouts" (page 276) shows the pin assignments from the I/O panel relating to the pin assignments of the lineside E1 I/O cable.
Installation 277 E1 Connections For twisted-pair installations, E1 signaling for all 30 channels is transmitted over P2 connector pins 1, 3, 9, and 11, as shown in Table 108 "LEI card lineside E1 I/O cable pinouts" (page 276). Plug the DB 15 male connector labeled "P2" into the E1 link. E1 transmit and receive pairs must be turned over between the LEI and the CPE that is hardwired without carrier facilities.
NT5D33 and NT5D34 Lineside E1 Interface cards for future use. As with the external alarm connections, MMI connections are optional. Up to 128 LEIs can be linked, located in up to 16 separate IPE shelves, to one MMI terminal using the daisy chain approach. If only one LEI is installed, cable from the DB9 male connector labeled "P5" (toward MMI terminal) to one of the COM ports on the back of any TTY, a PC running a terminal emulation program, or a modem.
Installation 279 Figure 59 LEI card - connecting two or more cards to the MMI Terminal configuration For the MMI terminal to be able to communicate to the LEI, the interface characteristics must be set to: • • • • • speed – 1200 or 2400 bps character width – 7 bits parity bit – mark stop bits – one software handshake (XON/XOFF) – off Software Configuration Although much of the architecture and many features of the LEI card are different from the analog line card, the LEI has been designed to emulate a
NT5D33 and NT5D34 Lineside E1 Interface cards All 30 E1 channels carried by the LEI are individually configured using the analog (500/2500-type) Telephone Administration program LD 10. Use Table 109 "Card unit number to E1 channel mapping" (page 280) to determine the correct unit number and Software Input/Output Reference — Administration (NN43001-611) for LD 10 service-change instructions.
Installation 281 Table 109 Card unit number to E1 channel mapping (cont’d.
NT5D33 and NT5D34 Lineside E1 Interface cards Clocking Requirement The clocking for NT5D34 Lineside E1 Interface card in CS1000 Rls 5.
Clocking Requirement 283 Figure 60 "MGC DECT Clock Reference Cable" (page 283) shows the MGC DECT Clock Reference Cable. It is used to provide clock reference between CS1000 Media Gateway Cabinet/chassis. Figure 60 MGC DECT Clock Reference Cable Connecting MGC DECT Clock Reference Cable Step Action 1 Connect the MGC DECT Clock Reference Cable to the AUI port of the back of the MG1000 chassis. Figure 61 "MG1000 chassis" (page 283) shows the AUI port of the MG1000 chassis.
NT5D33 and NT5D34 Lineside E1 Interface cards Figure 62 Option 11C Mini chassis or Succession 1.0 MG chassis 3 Use an MGC Breakout Adapter for Option 11C (NTDW63AAE5) • • Connect the adapter to 25 pairs MDF connector at Slot 0 Connect the MGC DECT Clock Reference Cable (NTDW67AAE5) to 15-pin DSUB connector on the Breakout Adapter. Figure 63 "Option 11C Cabinet" (page 284) shows the Option 11C Cabinet.
Man-Machine E1 maintenance interface software 285 The MMI provides the following maintenance features: • • • • • configurable alarm parameters E1-link problem indicator current and historical E1-link performance reports E1 verification and fault isolation testing configuration of A\B bits (North American Standard, Australian P2, or customized settings are available) Alarms The MMI may be used to activate alarms for the following E1-link conditions: • • • • • excessive bit-error rate, frame-slip error
NT5D33 and NT5D34 Lineside E1 Interface cards Meridian 1, depending on how the dip switch for line processing is set (dip switch 2, position 6). See Table 104 "LEI card - E1 Switch 2 (S2) dip switch settings" (page 271). If the MMI detects E1-link failures for any of the other conditions monitored (out-of-frame, excess frame slips, loss-of-signal, and blue alarm condition), the LEI automatically performs all alarm level 2 functions. The MMI also sends a yellow alarm to the far-end LTU.
Man-Machine E1 maintenance interface software 287 For multiple-card installations connected in a daisy chain, it is accessed by entering L
, where the four-digit address is a combination of the two-digit address of the IPE shelf as set by dip switch positions on the card Switch 1, positions 3-6, plus the address of the card slot the motherboard occupies. See Table 106 "LEI card - NT8D37 IPE module vintage level port cabling" (page 273).NT5D33 and NT5D34 Lineside E1 Interface cards Figure 64 HELP (H, ?) screen Each of these commands can be executed by entering the first letter of the command or by entering the entire command. Commands with more than one word are entered by entering the first letter of the first word, a space, and the first letter of the second word or by entering the entire command. Table 110 "MMI commands and command sets" (page 288) shows all possible MMI commands in alphabetical order.
Man-Machine E1 maintenance interface software 289 Table 110 MMI commands and command sets (cont’d.) Command Description DP Display Performance. Displays performance counters for the current hour. D S(P) Display Status. Displays carrier status, including alarm state and, if active, alarm level. (Momentarily stop the scrolling display by typing P. Continue scrolling by typing any other key.) H or ? Help. Displays the Help screen. L Login. Logs into the MMI terminal in a single-LEI system.
NT5D33 and NT5D34 Lineside E1 Interface cards Set Date Verify the current date. Do this by entering the Set Date (S D) command. The MMI then displays the date it has registered. Enter a new date or hit Enter to leave it unchanged. The date is entered in the "mm/dd/yy" format. Set Alarm The Set Alarm (S A) command sets the parameters by which an alarm is activated and the duration of the alarm after it is activated.
Man-Machine E1 maintenance interface software 291 Invalid" message. The digit entered as the threshold value is a number representing a negative power of 10 as shown in Table 111 "E1 bit error rate threshold settings" (page 291). Note: The error-rate threshold for a level 2 alarm must be greater (a smaller power of 10) than for a level 1 alarm. Remember that the numbers being represented are negative numbers. Since 3 represents –3, and 4 represents –4, 4 represents a smaller number than 3 does.
NT5D33 and NT5D34 Lineside E1 Interface cards If self-clearing alarm indications are disabled, carrier-fail line supervision terminates when the alarm condition has ceased, but the external alarm contact and faceplate LED remain active until the alarm is cleared. A heavy bit-error rate can cause 200 bit errors to occur much more quickly than100 seconds. This causes the alarm to be declared sooner.
Man-Machine E1 maintenance interface software 293 Table 112 Set alarm options (cont’d.) Option Description AL2 Threshold Sets the allowable bit errors per second (from 3 to 9) before alarm level 2 is activated. Factory default is 10-5. AL2 Duration Sets the duration in seconds (from 1 to 3,600 seconds) that alarm level 2 is activated. Factory default is 10 seconds. Frame Slip Threshold Sets the allowable frame slips per time period (from 1 to 255) before alarm level 2 is activated.
NT5D33 and NT5D34 Lineside E1 Interface cards Figure 65 Set Simple (S S) no screen Figure 66 Set Simple (S S) yes screen Set Mode At the SET MODE (S M) command, the MMI prompts the user with the current signaling mode, either Default (Australian P2) or Table (of bit values.) Entering a accepts the current value, or the user can type in 1 to revert to the Default, or 2 to edit the table entries. See Figure 67 "Set Mode screen" (page 294).
Man-Machine E1 maintenance interface software • • • • 295 accept the current value enter just the AB bits (which is copied to the CD bits) enter a complete ABCD bit pattern in the case of optional states, a ’N’ or ’n’ can be entered to indicate that the state is not needed Note that in D4 Framing for E1, there are no CD bits, so they are ignored. The user is prompted for ABCD bit values for the following states when the table mode is selected.
NT5D33 and NT5D34 Lineside E1 Interface cards Figure 68 Set Mode (S M): Table screen Idle SEND – This is the value that the LEI sends (acting as the CO or PSTN) when the circuit is in the idle state. This value is required. Idle RECEIVE – This is the value that the LEI expects to see from the CPE when it is in the idle state. This value is required.
Man-Machine E1 maintenance interface software 297 Figure 69 Set Mode (S M): Table screen Incoming call Ringer ON SEND – This is the value that the LEI sends to indicate that a call is incoming to the CPE and that ringing voltage should be applied at the CPE. This value is required. Incoming call Ringer OFF SEND – This is the value that the LEI sends to indicate that a call is incoming to the CPE and that the ring cycle is in the off portion of the cadence. This value is required.
NT5D33 and NT5D34 Lineside E1 Interface cards Incoming call CONNECTED SEND – This is the value that the LEI sends to the CPE to indicate that it has seen and recognized the off hook indication sent by the CPE. The call is considered fully connected at this point. This value is required. Incoming call (Far-end) DISCONNECT SEND – This is the value that the LEI sends to indicate that the far-end has released the call. This value is required.
Man-Machine E1 maintenance interface software 299 Intercall (release guard) Time – This is the number of milliseconds that the LEI maintains the idle signal to the CPE before initiating a new call. The CPE should not initiate a new call during this time. If it does so, the off-hook indication is ignored until the release guard time has expired. This value defaults to 0 which relies on the M-1 to observe the proper guard time.
NT5D33 and NT5D34 Lineside E1 Interface cards A loss of signal condition is declared if a full frame (255 bits) of consecutive zeros has been detected at the receive inputs. If this condition occurs, the E1 link automatically attempts to resynchronize with the far-end. If this condition lasts for more than two seconds, a level 2 alarm is declared, and silence is sent on all receive timeslots.
Man-Machine E1 maintenance interface software 301 Figure 71 Display Alarm (D A) screen The Pause command can be used to display a full screen at a time, by entering D A P. If there is more than one screen in the log, the MMI scrolls the log until the screen is full, then stops. When ready to see the next screen, press any key. The display shows another screen and stops again. This continues until the entire log has been displayed.
NT5D33 and NT5D34 Lineside E1 Interface cards Performance counters and reporting The MMI monitors the performance of the E1 link according to several performance criteria including errored, bursty, unavailable, loss-of-frame and frame-slip seconds. It registers the performance of these criteria by reading their status every second and counting their results. These counts are accumulated for an hour, then reset to 0. Previous hour count results are maintained for each of the previous 24 hours.
Man-Machine E1 maintenance interface software 303 Figure 73 Display Performance (D P) screen Each column, except the error counter, indicates the number of errors in the current hour and is reset to zero every hour on the hour. Just before the performance counters are reset to zero, the values are put into the history log. The error counter indicates the number of errors since the error counter was cleared. The Pause command can be used to display a full screen at a time, by entering D P P.
NT5D33 and NT5D34 Lineside E1 Interface cards Figure 74 Display History (D H) screen As with all Display commands, the Pause command can be used to display a full screen of the history report at a time, by entering D H P. Clear Error Reset the error counter to zero by entering the Clear Error (C E) command. The error counter provides a convenient way to determine if the E1 link is performing without errors since it can be cleared and examined at any time.
Man-Machine E1 maintenance interface software 305 however, the STOP command terminates a test set to any duration from one to 99. After entering the test number, a prompt similar to Figure 76 "Test parameters screen" (page 305) appears. Figure 76 Test parameters screen Before a test is run, be sure to verify that the card is disabled, as the tests interfere with calls currently in process. During a test, if an invalid word is received, this is recorded by a failure peg counter.
NT5D33 and NT5D34 Lineside E1 Interface cards Figure 77 MMI Local loopback test Test 2, external loopback, applies an external loopback to the E1 link. Test data is generated and received by the LEI on all timeslots. If test 1 passes but test 2 fails, it indicates that the E1 link is defective between the LEI and the external loopback location. If test 1 was not run and test 2 fails, the E1 link or the LEI could be defective. To isolate the failure to the E1 link, tests 1 and 2 must be run in tandem.
Applications 307 Figure 79 MMI Network loopback test Applications The LEI is an IPE line card that provides cost-effective connection between E1-compatible IPE and a CS 1000E, CS 1000M, and Meridian 1system or off-premise extensions over long distances.
NT5D33 and NT5D34 Lineside E1 Interface cards Figure 80 LEI connection to IPE For example, the LEI can be used to connect the system to an E1-compatible Voice Response Unit (VRU). An example of this type of equipment is Nortel Open IVR system. In this way, the CS 1000E, CS 1000M, and Meridian 1can send a call to the VRU, and, because the LEI supports analog (500/2500-type) telephone functionality, the VRU is able to send the call back to the system for further handling.
Applications 309 Similarly, use the LEI to provide a connection between the system and a remote Norstar system. See Figure 82 "LEI connection to Norstar system" (page 309). In this case, channel banks are not required if the Norstar system is equipped with an E1 interface. Note: Consider LEI audio levels when determining the appropriateness of an application. Figure 82 LEI connection to Norstar system Nortel Communication Server 1000 Circuit Card Reference NN43001-311 02.
NT5D33 and NT5D34 Lineside E1 Interface cards Nortel Communication Server 1000 Circuit Card Reference NN43001-311 02.06 Standard 27 August 2008 Copyright © 2003-2008 Nortel Networks .
. NT5D60/80/81 CLASS Modem card (XCMC) Contents This section contains information on the following topics: “Introduction” (page 311) “Physical description” (page 312) “Functional description” (page 312) “Electrical specifications” (page 316) “Configuration” (page 317) Introduction The NT5D60/80/81 CLASS Modem card supports the Custom Local Area Signaling Services (CLASS) feature.
NT5D60/80/81 CLASS Modem card (XCMC) For information about the CLASS: Calling Number and Name Delivery feature, please refer to Features and Services (NN43001-106-B). For administration and maintenance commands, see Software Input/Output Reference — Administration (NN43001-611). Physical description CLASS Modem cards are housed in NT8D37 IPE modules. The CLASS modem card circuitry is mounted on a 31.75 cm by 25.40 cm (12.5 in. by 10 in.) double-sided printed circuit board.
Functional description 313 System software then sends the CND information to the CLASS Modem card, one byte at a time, where it is stored in the message buffer. If the CLASS Modem card receives more bytes than were specified in the initiating message, then the additional bytes are discarded and not included in the CND memory buffer. Once all of the CND information has been stored in the memory buffer, the CLASS Modem card begins transmission when requested by the system software.
NT5D60/80/81 CLASS Modem card (XCMC) Table 114 Time slot mapping (cont’d.) XCMC mapping of TNs TNs DS30X timeslot Modem units on the CLASS Modem card 12 13 14 15 12 13 14 15 04 05 06 07 16 17 18 19 16 17 18 19 module 2, 00 01 02 03 20 21 22 23 20 21 22 23 04 05 06 07 24 25 26 27 24 25 26 27 module 3, 00 01 02 03 28 29 30 31 28 29 30 31 04 05 06 07 The CLASS Modem card is designed to plug into any one of the peripheral card slots of the IPE module.
Functional description 315 Once all of the CND information has been stored in the memory buffer, the CLASS Modem card begins transmission when requested by the system software. Data is sent one ASCII character at a time. The CLASS Modem card inserts a start and stop bit to each ASCII character sent.
NT5D60/80/81 CLASS Modem card (XCMC) Table 115 Time slot mapping (cont’d.) XCMC mapping of TNs TNs DS30X timeslot Modem units on the CLASS Modem card 16 17 18 19 16 17 18 19 module 2, 00 01 02 03 20 21 22 23 20 21 22 23 04 05 06 07 24 25 26 27 24 25 26 27 module 3, 00 01 02 03 28 29 30 31 28 29 30 31 04 05 06 07 Electrical specifications This section lists the electrical characteristic of the CLASS modem card. This section lists the electrical characteristic of the CLASS modem card.
Configuration 317 Table 117 CLASS modem card-data transmission electrical characteristics Characteristics Description Units per card 32 transmit only modem resources Transmission rate 1200 ± 12 baud The CLASS modem card has no direct connection to the Public Network. Power requirements The CLASS modem card requires less than 1.0 Amps of +5V dc ± 1% supply supplied by the power converter in the IPE shelf. The CLASS modem card requires less than 1.
NT5D60/80/81 CLASS Modem card (XCMC) The NT5D60AA CLASS Modem card has no user-configurable jumpers or switches. The card derives its address from its position in the backplane and reports that information back to the Meridian 1 CPU through the Cardlan interface.
. NT5D97 Dual-port DTI2 PRI2 card Contents The following are the topics in this section: “Introduction” (page 319) “Physical description” (page 320) “Functional description” (page 335) “Architecture” (page 345) “Operation” (page 350) Introduction This section contains information required to install the NT5D97 Dual-port DTI2/PRI2 (DDP2) card. The NT5D97 is a dual-port 2.
NT5D97 Dual-port DTI2 PRI2 card DANGER DANGER OF ELECTRIC SHOCK The NT5D97 DDP2 card is not designed to be connected directly to the Public Switched Network, or other exposed plant networks.
Physical description 321 connectors. Table 121 "External connectors and LEDs" (page 322) shows the name of each connector, its designation with respect to the faceplate and the name and description of the card it is connected to. Also shown are the names of the LEDs. Figure 83 NT5D97 faceplate Nortel Communication Server 1000 Circuit Card Reference NN43001-311 02.06 Standard 27 August 2008 Copyright © 2003-2008 Nortel Networks .
NT5D97 Dual-port DTI2 PRI2 card Table 121 External connectors and LEDs Function Faceplate Designator Switch Connectors LEDs Type Description ENB/DIS Plastic, ESD protected Card Enable/disable switch Unit 0 Clock 0 RJ11 Connector Connects reference clock 0 to Clock Controller card 0 Unit 0 Clock 1 RJ11 Connector Connects reference clock 0 to Clock Controller card 1 Unit 1 Clock 0 RJ11 Connector Connects reference clock 1 to Clock Controller card 0 Unit 1 Clock 1 RJ11 Connector Conne
Physical description 323 ENET LEDs Two red LEDs indicate if the "ENET0" and "ENET1" portions of the card are disabled. These LEDs are lit in the following cases: • • • When the enable/disable switch is in disabled state (lit by hardware). After power-up, before the card is enabled. When the ENET port on the card is disabled by software. Trunk Disable (DIS) LEDs Two red LEDs indicate if the "trunk port 0" or "trunk port 1" portions of the card are disabled.
NT5D97 Dual-port DTI2 PRI2 card Unit 0 Clk Connectors Two RJ11 connectors for connecting: • Digital trunk unit 0 recovered clock to primary or secondary reference source on clock controller card 0. • Digital trunk unit 0 recovered clock to primary or secondary reference source on clock controller card 1. Unit 1 Clk Connectors Two RJ11 connectors for connecting: • Digital trunk unit 1 recovered clock to primary or secondary reference source on clock controller card 0.
Physical description 325 Table 123 NT5D97AD loops configuration Loop 0 Loop 1 not configured DTI 2 PRI 2 DDCS not configured V V V V DTI2 V V V V PRI2 V V V X DDCS V V X V Note: Each loop DPNSS can be defined in Normal or Extended addressing mode. System capacity and performance Physical capacity Each NT5D97 DDP2 card occupies one slot on the network shelf. Each card supports two digital trunk circuits and two network loops.
NT5D97 Dual-port DTI2 PRI2 card CPU capacity Using a NT5D97 DDP2 card instead of DTI2/PRI2 cards does not increase the load on the CPU. The DDP2 replaces an ENET card and two DTI2/PRI2 cards. Emulating the ENET card and the overall CPU capacity is not impacted by using a DDP2 card instead of a DTI2/PRI2 card. Power requirements Table 124 "NT5D97 DDP2 power requirements" (page 326) lists the power requirements for the NT5D97 DDP2 card.
Physical description • 327 DDP2 to DCH cables — NTCK46AA — NTCK46AB — NTCK46AC — NTCK46AD • DDP2 to MSDL cables — NTCK80AA — NTCK80AB — NTCK80AC — NTCK80AD A description of each type of DDP2 cable follows. E1 carrier cables NTCK45AA (A0407956) The NTCK45AA (8 ft.) is an 120W cable for systems equipped with an I/O filter panel, connecting the TRK port (P1, D-type 9 pin male) on the DDP2 faceplate to the I/O filter (P2, P3 D-type 9 pin males).
NT5D97 Dual-port DTI2 PRI2 card Table 125 NTCK45AA cable pins (cont’d.
Physical description 329 Table 126 NT8D7217 cable pins (cont’d.
NT5D97 Dual-port DTI2 PRI2 card Table 127 NTCK78AA cable pins (cont’d.
Physical description 331 Table 128 NTCK79AA cable pins (cont’d.
NT5D97 Dual-port DTI2 PRI2 card MSDL/DCH cables External DCH cable The NTCK46 cable connects the DDP2 card to the NT6D11AF/NT5K75 AA/NT5K35AA D-Channel Handler card. The cable is available in four different sizes: • • • • NTCK46AA (6 ft.) - DDP2 to DCH cable NTCK46AB (18 ft.) - DDP2 to DCH cable NTCK46AC (35 ft.) - DDP2 to DCH cable NTCK46AD (50 ft.) - DDP2 to DCH cable Figure 89 NTCK46AA/AB/AC/AD External MSDL cable The NTCK80 cable connects the DDP2 card to the NT6D80 MSDL card.
Physical description 333 Cable diagrams Figure 91 "DDP2 cable for systems with an I/O panel" (page 334) and Figure 92 "DDP2 cable for systems without an I/O panel" (page 335) provide examples of typical cabling configurations for the DDP2. Figure 91 "DDP2 cable for systems with an I/O panel" (page 334) shows a typical DDP2 cabling for a system with an I/O panel, with the connection between the I/O panel and a Network Channel Terminating Equipment (NCTE).
NT5D97 Dual-port DTI2 PRI2 card Figure 91 DDP2 cable for systems with an I/O panel Nortel Communication Server 1000 Circuit Card Reference NN43001-311 02.06 Standard 27 August 2008 Copyright © 2003-2008 Nortel Networks .
Functional description Figure 92 DDP2 cable for systems without an I/O panel Functional description NT5D97 circuit card locations Each NT5D97 card requires one slot on a shelf. NT5D97 cards can be placed in any card slot in the network bus. Nortel Communication Server 1000 Circuit Card Reference NN43001-311 02.06 Standard 27 August 2008 Copyright © 2003-2008 Nortel Networks .
NT5D97 Dual-port DTI2 PRI2 card Note in all cases - If an NT8D72BA/NTCK43 card is being replaced by a DDP2 card, the D-channel Handler can be reconnected to the DDP2 card, or removed if an onboard NTBK51DDCH card is used. Also, DIP Switches in the NT5D97 must be set properly before insertion. NT5D97 has a different DIP Switch setting from NTCK43AB. Refer to “NT5D97AA/AB DIP switch settings” (page 336) for DIP switch setting).
Functional description 337 Figure 93 Dip switches for NT5D97AA/AB Trunk interface switches for NT5D97AA/AB Impedance level and unit mode The S9/S15 switch selects the impedance level and loop operation mode on DEI2 OR PRI2. Refer to Table 130 "Impedance level and loop mode switch settings" (page 338). Nortel Communication Server 1000 Circuit Card Reference NN43001-311 02.06 Standard 27 August 2008 Copyright © 2003-2008 Nortel Networks .
NT5D97 Dual-port DTI2 PRI2 card Table 130 Impedance level and loop mode switch settings Description S9/S15 Switch Setting 1 Impedance level OFF - 120 ohm ON - 75 ohm 2 Spare X 3 Spare X 4 Unit mode OFF - Loop operates in the DTI2 mode ON - Loop operates in the PRI2 mode Swit ch Transmission mode A per-trunk switch (S4/S10) provides selection of the digital trunk interface type. Refer to Table 131 "Impedance level and loop mode switch settings" (page 338).
Functional description 339 Table 133 Trunk interface impedance switch settings Description S8/S14 switch setting 75 ohm OFF OFF ON OFF 120 ohm OFF OFF OFF ON Ring ground switches for NT5D97AA/AB A set of four Dip switches (S2) selects which Ring lines are connected to ground. Refer to Table 134 "Ring ground switch settings" (page 339).
NT5D97 Dual-port DTI2 PRI2 card Table 136 "NTBK51AA daughterboard address select switch settings" (page 340) shows the possible selection of the NTBK51AA D-channel.
Functional description 341 Table 137 DIP switch settings for NT5D97AD Card Trunks 0 and 1 Trunk 0 Trunk 1 TX Mode S2 S10 LBO Setting S3 S13 S4 S14 S5 S15 Receiver Interface S6 S11 General Purpose S12 S7 ENB/DSB mounted on the face plate Port 0 Port 1 S8 S9 S1 Ring Ground S16 DPNSS MSDL S9 Refer to DIP switch locations in Figure 94 "Dip switches locations for NT5D97AD" (page 342). The following parameters are set by DIP switches. The boldface font shows the factory set-up.
NT5D97 Dual-port DTI2 PRI2 card Figure 94 Dip switches locations for NT5D97AD Trunk interface switches for NT5D97AD Trunk 0 switches Switch S12 gives the MPU information about its environment. Nortel Communication Server 1000 Circuit Card Reference NN43001-311 02.06 Standard 27 August 2008 Copyright © 2003-2008 Nortel Networks .
Functional description Table 138 General purpose switches for NT5D97AD Switch Description S9/S15 Switch Setting S12_1 Impedance level OFF - 120 ohm ON - 75 ohm S12_2 Spare X S12_3 Spare X S12_4 Unit mode OFF - Unit operates in the DTI2 mode ON - Unit operates in the PRI2 mode Switch S2 selects the Transmission mode. Table 139 TX mode switches for NT5D97AD TX mode S2 E1 OFF Not used ON Switch S3, S4, and S5 select LBO function.
NT5D97 Dual-port DTI2 PRI2 card Table 142 Trunk 1 switches (cont’d.) Switch Function S13, S14 & S15 LBO...See Table 140 "LBO switches for NT5D97AD" (page 343) S11 RX Impedance...See Table 141 "Receiver interface switches for NT5D97AD" (page 343) Ring ground switches for NT5D97AD Switch S16 selects which ring lines connect to ground. When set to ON, the ring line is grounded.
Architecture 345 Use Table 146 "Switch setting for MSDL external card" (page 345) to set the card address.
NT5D97 Dual-port DTI2 PRI2 card Free run (non-tracking) mode The clock synchronization of the can operate in free-run mode if: • • • no loop is defined as the primary or secondary clock reference, the primary and secondary references are disabled, or the primary and secondary references are in local (near end) alarm Figure 95 Clock Controller primary and secondary tracking Reference clock errors CS 1000 software checks at intervals of 1 to 15 minutes to see if a clock controller or reference-clock
Architecture 347 A reference-clock error occurs when there is a problem with the clock driver or with the reference clock at the far end. If the clock controller detects a reference-clock error, the reference clocks are switched. Automatic clock recovery A command for automatic clock recovery can be selected in LD 60 with the command EREF. A DDP2 loop is disabled when it enters a local-alarm condition. If the local alarm is cleared, the loop is enabled automatically.
NT5D97 Dual-port DTI2 PRI2 card etc. PRI2 cards such as the NT8D72BA are capable of supplying two references of the same clock source. These are known as Ref1 (available at J1) and Ref2 (available at J2) on the NT8D72BA. The NT5D97 card is capable of supplying two references from each clock source, for example, four references in total. NT5D97 can supply Clk0 and Clk1 from Unit 0 and Clk0 and Clk1 from Unit 1.
Architecture Table 148 Clock Controller options - description Clock Option Notes Option 1 This option provides a single CPU system with 2 clock sources derived from the 2 ports of the DDP2. Connector Clk0 provides a clock source from Unit 0. Connector Clk0 provides a clock source from Unit 1. Refer to Figure 96 "Clock Controller - Option 1" (page 350). Option 2 This option provides a Dual CPU system with 2 references of a clock source derived from port 0 of the DDP2.
NT5D97 Dual-port DTI2 PRI2 card Figure 96 Clock Controller - Option 1 Operation The following discussion describes possible scenarios when replacing a digital trunk NT8D72BA PRI2 card or QPC536E DTI2 card or NTCK43 Dual PRI card configuration with a NT5D97 DDP2 card configuration. Nortel Communication Server 1000 Circuit Card Reference NN43001-311 02.06 Standard 27 August 2008 Copyright © 2003-2008 Nortel Networks .
Operation Figure 97 Clock Controller - Option 2 Nortel Communication Server 1000 Circuit Card Reference NN43001-311 02.06 Standard 27 August 2008 Copyright © 2003-2008 Nortel Networks .
NT5D97 Dual-port DTI2 PRI2 card Figure 98 Clock Controller - Option 3 Nortel Communication Server 1000 Circuit Card Reference NN43001-311 02.06 Standard 27 August 2008 Copyright © 2003-2008 Nortel Networks .
Operation 353 Figure 99 Clock Controller - Option 4 Case 1 - The two ports of a QPC414 network card are connected to two digital trunks. In this case, the QPC414 and the two digital trunks are replaced by a single DDP2 card, which is plugged into the network shelf in the QPC414 slot. Case 2 - One port of the QPC414 card is connected to a digital trunk, and the second is connected to a peripheral buffer. Both cards are in network loop location. In this case, the QPC414 should not be removed.
NT5D97 Dual-port DTI2 PRI2 card In this case, the peripheral buffers must be re-assigned, so that each pair of buffers uses both ports of the same QPC414 card. The other QPC414 card can then be replaced by the NT5D97 DDP2. CAUTION The static discharge bracelet located inside the cabinet must be worn before handling circuit cards. Failure to wear the bracelet can result in damage to the circuit cards.
Operation 11 If required, install a Network Channel Terminating Equipment (NCTE). or Line Terminating Unit (LTU). 12 Add related office data into switch memory. 13 Enable faceplate switch S1. This is the "Loop Enable" switch. 355 The faceplate LEDs should go on for 4 seconds then go off and the OOS, DIS and ACT LEDs should go on again and stay on. IF DDCH is installed, the DCH LED should flash 3 times. 14 Run the PRI/DTI Verification Test. 15 Run the PRI status check.
NT5D97 Dual-port DTI2 PRI2 card 8 Pack and store the NT5D97 card and circuit card. --End-- Configuring the NT5D97 After the NT5D97 DDP2 is installed, configure the system using the same procedures as the standard NT8D72BA PRI2. Consider the following when configuring the NT5D97 DDP2 card: • The CS 1000 software allows four ports to be defined for the NT6D80 MSDL. The DDCH (NTBK51AA) card has only two ports, 0 and 1; therefore, ports 2 and 3 must not be defined when using the NTBK51AA.
. NT5K02 Flexible Analog Line card Contents This section contains information on the following topics: “Introduction” (page 357) “Applications” (page 358) Introduction The NT5K02 Flexible Analog Line card provides an interface for up to 16 analog (500/2500-type) telephones equipped with either ground button recall switches, high-voltage Message Waiting lamps, or low-voltage Message Waiting LEDs. You can install this card in any IPE slot.
NT5K02 Flexible Analog Line card Applications The NT5K02 Flexible Analog Line card can be used for the following applications: • NT5K02AA high-voltage Message Waiting analog line card typically used in Australia • NT5K02DA ground button, low-voltage Message Waiting, analog line card typically used in France • NT5K02EA ground button, low-voltage Message Waiting, analog line card typically used in Germany • NT5K02FA ground button, low-voltage Message Waiting, analog line card with 6001/2 termina
. NT5K21 XMFC/MFE card Contents This section contains information on the following topics: “Introduction” (page 359) “MFC signaling” (page 359) “MFE signaling” (page 361) “Sender and receiver mode” (page 362) “Physical specifications” (page 364) Introduction The XMFC/MFE (Extended Multi-frequency Compelled/Multi-frequency sender-receiver) card is used to set up calls between two trunks. Connections may be between a PBX and a Central Office or between two PBXs.
NT5K21 XMFC/MFE card Signaling levels MFC signaling uses pairs of frequencies to represent digits, and is divided into two levels: • Level 1: used when a call is first established and may be used to send the dialed digits. • Level 2: used after Level 1 signaling is completed and may contain such information as the status, capabilities, or classifications of both calling parties.
MFE signaling 361 Table 149 MFC Frequency values Digit Forward direction DOD-Tx, DID-Rx backward direction DOD-Rx, DID-Tx 1 1380 Hz + 1500 Hz 1140 Hz + 1020 Hz 2 1380 Hz + 1620 Hz 1140 Hz + 900 Hz 3 1500 Hz + 1620 Hz 1020 Hz + 900 Hz 4 1380 Hz + 1740 Hz 1140 Hz + 780 Hz 5 1500 Hz + 1740 Hz 1020 Hz + 780 Hz 6 1620 Hz + 1740 Hz 900 Hz + 780 Hz 7 1380 Hz + 1860 Hz 1140 Hz + 660 Hz 8 1500 Hz + 1860 Hz 1020 Hz + 660 Hz 9 1620 Hz + 1860 Hz 900 Hz + 660 Hz 10 1740 Hz + 1860 Hz 780
NT5K21 XMFC/MFE card Table 150 MFE Frequency values Digit Forward direction OG-Tx, IC-Rx 1 700 Hz + 900 Hz 1900 Hz (Control Frequency) 2 700 Hz + 1100 Hz — 3 900 Hz + 1100 Hz — 4 700 Hz + 1300 Hz — 5 900 Hz + 1300 Hz — 6 1100 Hz + 1300 Hz — 7 700 Hz + 1500 Hz — 8 900 Hz + 1500 Hz — 9 1100 Hz + 1500 Hz — 10 1300 Hz + 1500 Hz — Backward direction Sender and receiver mode The XMFC/MFE circuit card provides the interface between the system’s CPU and the trunk circuit which
Sender and receiver mode 363 XMFC sender and receiver specifications Table 151 "XMFC sender specifications" (page 363) and Table 152 "XMFC receiver specifications" (page 363) provide the operating requirements for the NT5K21 XMFC/MFE card. These specifications conform to CCITT R2 recommendations: Q.441, Q.442, Q.451, Q.454, and Q.455.
NT5K21 XMFC/MFE card XMFE sender and receiver specifications Table 153 "XMFE sender specifications" (page 364) and Table 154 "XMFE receiver specifications" (page 364) provide the operating requirements for the XMFC/MFE card when it is configured as an XMFE card. These requirements conform to French Socotel specifications ST/PAA/CLC/CER/692.
Physical specifications Table 155 Physical specifications Dimensions Height:12.5 in. (320 mm) Depth:10.0 in. (255 mm) Thickness:7/8 in. (22.25 mm) Faceplate LED Lit when the circuit card is disabled Cabinet Location Must be placed in the main cabinet (Slots 1-10) Power requirements 1.1 Amps typical Environmental considerations Meets the environment of the system Nortel Communication Server 1000 Circuit Card Reference NN43001-311 02.
NT5K21 XMFC/MFE card Nortel Communication Server 1000 Circuit Card Reference NN43001-311 02.06 Standard 27 August 2008 Copyright © 2003-2008 Nortel Networks .
. NT6D70 SILC Line card Contents This section contains information on the following topics: “Introduction” (page 367) “Physical description” (page 368) “Functional description” (page 369) Introduction The S/T Interface Line card (SILC) (NT6D70AA –48V North America, NT6D70 BA –40 V International) provides eight S/T four-wire full-duplex interfaces to connect ISDN BRI-compatible terminals over Digital Subscriber Loops (DSLs) to the System.
NT6D70 SILC Line card An NT6D70 SILC card can reside in a Media Gateway or Media Gateway Expansion. A maximum of four NT6D70 SILC cards are supported in a Media Gateway and Media Gateway Expansion. ISDN BRI ISDN BRI consists of two 64Kb/s Bearer (B) channels and one 16Kb/s Data (D) channel. The BRI interface is referred to as a 2B+D connection as well as a Digital Subscriber Loop (DSL).
Functional description 369 The NT6D70 SILC is a standard size circuit card designed to be inserted in peripheral equipment slots in the Meridian 1. Its faceplate is equipped with an LED to indicate its status. The NT6D70 SILC Card is a standard-size circuit card designed to be inserted in slots in the Media Gateway and Media Gateway Expansion. Its faceplate is equipped with an LED to indicate its status. Power consumption Power consumption is +5 V at 800 mA and –48 V at 480 mA.
NT6D70 SILC Line card The length of a DSL depends on the specific terminal configuration and the DSL wire gauge; however, it should not exceed 1 km (3,280 ft). The SILC interface uses a four-conductor cable that provides a differential Transmit and Receive pair for each DSL. The SILC has options to provide a total of two watts of power on the Transmit or Receive leads, or no power at all.
Functional description • • support point-to-point and multi-point DSL terminal connections • provide channel mapping between ISDN BRI format (2B+D) and Meridian 1 system bus format • • • • multiplexes 4 D-channels onto one timeslot 371 execute instructions received from the MISP to configure and control the S/T interfaces perform activation and deactivation of DSLs provide loopback control of DSLs provide a reference clock to the clock controller The NT6D70 SILC Card provides eight S/T four-wire f
NT6D70 SILC Line card Micro Controller Unit (MCU) The Micro Controller Unit (MCU) coordinates and controls the operation of the SILC. It has internal memory, a reset and sanity timer, and a serial control interface. The memory consists of 32 K of EPROM which contains the SILC operating program and 8 K of RAM used to store interface selection and other functions connected with call activities. The reset and sanity timer logic resets the MCU.
Functional description 373 The Card-LAN interface is used for routine card maintenance, which includes polling the line cards to find the card slot where the SILC is installed. It also queries the status and identification of the card and reports the configuration data and firmware version of the card. The IPE bus interface connects an IPE bus loop that has 32 channels operating at 64 kbps and one additional validation and signaling bit.
NT6D70 SILC Line card The clock converter converts the 5.12 MHz clock from the IPE backplane into a 2.56 MHz clock to time the IPE bus channels and an 8 kHz clock to provide PCM framing bits. The PE interface logic consists of a Card-LAN interface, a PE bus interface, a maintenance signaling channel interface, a digital pad, and a clock controller and converter.
Functional description 375 BRI terminals and –40 V for CCITT (such as ETSI NET-3, INS NET-64) compliant terminals. The total power used by the terminals on each DSL must not exceed two watts.The S/T interface logic consists of a transceiver circuit and the DSL power source. This interface supports DSLs of different distances and different number and types of terminals. The transceiver circuits provide four-wire full duplex S/T bus interface.
NT6D70 SILC Line card Nortel Communication Server 1000 Circuit Card Reference NN43001-311 02.06 Standard 27 August 2008 Copyright © 2003-2008 Nortel Networks .
. NT6D71 UILC line card Contents This section contains information on the following topics: “Introduction” (page 377) “Physical description” (page 378) “Functional description” (page 378) Introduction The NT6D71 U Interface Line card (UILC) supports the OSI physical layer (Layer 1) protocol. The UILC is an ANSI-defined standard interface.
NT6D71 UILC line card U interfaces to connect ISDN BRI-compatible terminals over Digital Subscriber Loops (DSL) to the CS 1000. For more information on ISDN BRI, see “ISDN BRI” (page 368). A UILC can reside in a Media Gateway or Media Gateway Expansion. A maximum of four UILCs are supported in a Media Gateway and Media Gateway Expansion. Physical description The NT6D71 UILC is a standard-size circuit card. Its faceplate is equipped with an LED to indicate its status.
Functional description • • • 379 multiplex four D-channels onto one timeslot perform activation and deactivation of DSLs provide loopback control of DSLs Each U interface provides two B-channels and one D-Channel and supports one physical termination. This termination may be to a Network Termination (NT1) or directly to a single U interface terminal. Normally this physical termination is to an NT1, which provides an S/T interface that allows up to 8 physical terminals to be connected.
NT6D71 UILC line card Micro Controller Unit (MCU) The Micro Controller Unit (MCU) coordinates and controls the operation of the UILC. It has internal memory, a reset and sanity timer, a serial control interface, a maintenance signaling channel, and a digital pad. The memory consists of 32 K of EPROM that contains the UILC operating program and 8 K of RAM that stores interface selection and other functions connected with call activities. The reset and sanity timer logic resets the MCU.
Functional description 381 The Card-LAN interface is used for routine card maintenance, which includes polling the line cards to find in which card slot the UILC is installed. It also queries the status and identification of the card and reports the configuration data and firmware version of the card. The IPE bus interface connects one IPE bus loop that has 32 channels operating at 64 kbps and one additional validation and signaling bit.
NT6D71 UILC line card The PE interface logic consists of a Card-LAN interface, a PE bus interface, a maintenance signaling channel interface, a digital pad, and a clock converter. The Card-LAN interface is used for routine card maintenance, which includes polling the line cards to find in which card slot the UILC is installed. It also queries the status and identification of the card and reports the configuration data and firmware version of the card.
. NT6D80 MSDL card Contents This section contains information on the following topics: “Introduction” (page 383) “Physical description” (page 384) “Functional description” (page 385) “Engineering guidelines” (page 390) “Installation” (page 395) “Maintenance” (page 402) “Replacing MSDL cards” (page 408) “Symptoms and actions” (page 409) “System disabled actions” (page 409) Introduction This document describes the Multi-purpose Serial Data Link (MSDL) card.
NT6D80 MSDL card Though the MSDL is designed to coexist with other cards, the number of ports supported by a system equipped with MSDL cards is potentially four times greater than when using other cards. Since each MSDL has four ports, representing a single device, a system can support as many as 16 MSDL cards with a maximum of 64 ports.
Functional description 385 Functional description Figure 101 "MSDL block diagram" (page 386) illustrates the MSDL functional block diagram. The MSDL card is divided into four major functional blocks: • • • • CPU bus interface Micro Processing Unit (MPU) Memory Serial interface Two processing units serve as the foundation for the MSDL operation: the Central Processing Unit (CPU) and the MSDL Micro Processing Unit (MPU). CS 1000 software, MSDL firmware, and peripheral software control MSDL parameters.
NT6D80 MSDL card Figure 101 MSDL block diagram Nortel Communication Server 1000 Circuit Card Reference NN43001-311 02.06 Standard 27 August 2008 Copyright © 2003-2008 Nortel Networks .
Functional description 387 Micro Processing Unit (MPU) The MPU, which is based on a Motorola 68020 processor, coordinates and controls data transfer and port addressing, communicating via the CPU bus with the system.Prioritized interrupts tell the MPU which tasks to perform. Memory The MSDL card contains two megabytes of Random Access Memory (RAM) for storing downloaded peripheral software that controls MSDL port operations.
NT6D80 MSDL card Figure 102 "MSDL functional block diagram" (page 389) shows the system architecture using the MSDL as an operational platform. It illustrates operation routing from the CPU, through the MSDL, to the I/O equipment. It also shows an example in which DCH operation peripheral software in the MSDL controls functions on ports 2 and 3. MSDL operations The system automatically performs self-test and data flow activities.
Functional description 389 Figure 102 MSDL functional block diagram Data flow The MSDL transmit interface, managed by the MSDL handler, sends data from the system to the MSDL. This interface receives packetized data from the system and stores it in the transmit buffer on the MSDL. The transmit buffer transports these messages to the appropriate buffers, from which the messages travel over the MSDL port to the I/O equipment. Nortel Communication Server 1000 Circuit Card Reference NN43001-311 02.
NT6D80 MSDL card The MSDL uses the MSDL receive interface to communicate with the system. The MSDL card receives packetized data from the I/O equipment over the MSDL ports. This data is processed by the MSDL handler and sent to the appropriate function. The flow control mechanism provides an orderly exchange of transmit and receive messages for each operation. Each operation has a number of outstanding messages stored in buffers waiting to be sent to their destinations.
Engineering guidelines 391 An address conflict may occur between the MSDL and other cards because of truncated address decoding by the other cards. For example, if a DCHI port is set to address 5, it’s companion port is set to address 4, which means that none of the MSDL cards can have hexadecimal address numbers 05H, 15H, É75H, nor addresses 04H, 14H, É74H. To avoid this conflicts system software limits the MSDL card addresses from 0 to 15.
NT6D80 MSDL card Table 157 Asynchronous interface specifications (cont’d.) Parameter Specification Configured Data rate 0.3, 0.6, (1.2), 2.4, 4.8, 9.6, 19.2, and 38.4 kbps Software Stop bits 1 (default), 1.5, 2 Software Transmission Full Duplex N/A Interface RS-232 Software RS-422 Switches DTE or DCE Switches Mode Emulation mode Each port can be configured to emulate a DCE port or a DTE port by setting the appropriate switches on the MSDL.
Engineering guidelines 393 Table 158 RS-232 interface pin assignments (cont’d.) Pin Signal name EIA circuit CCITT circuit DTE DCE 5 Clear to Send (CTS) CB 106 X 6 Data Set Ready (DSR) CC 107 X 7 Signal Ground (SG) AB 102 8 Carrier Detect (CD) CF 109 X 15 Serial Clock Transmit (SCT) DB 114 X 17 Serial Clock Receive (SCR) DD 115 X 18 Local Loopback (LL) LL 141 X 20 Data Terminal Ready (DTR) CD 108.
NT6D80 MSDL card Table 159 RS-422 interface pin assignments (cont’d.) EIA Circuit Pin Signal Name DTE 17 Receive Signal Timing (RSTa) DDa 20 Data Terminal Ready (DTR) CD X 23 Terminal Timing (TTa) DAb X 24 Terminal Timing (TTb) DAa X DCE X Implementation guidelines The following are guidelines for engineering and managing MSDL cards: • • An MSDL can be installed in any empty network card slot.
Installation 395 A stable ambient operating temperature of approximately 22 C (72 F) is recommended. The temperature differential in the room should not exceed ±3 C (±5 F). The internal power supply in each module provides DC power for the MSDL and other cards. Power consumption and heat dissipation for the MSDL is listed in Table 161 "MSDL power consumption" (page 395). Table 161 MSDL power consumption Voltage (VAC) Current (Amps) Power (Watts) Heat (BTUs) +5 3.20 16.00 55.36 +12 0.10 1.20 4.
NT6D80 MSDL card Table 162 MSDL interface switch settings (cont’d.) DCE switch DTE switch Interface Comment ON OFF RS-422 DCE All switches configured ON ON N/A Not allowed Figure 103 MSDL switch setting example Nortel Communication Server 1000 Circuit Card Reference NN43001-311 02.06 Standard 27 August 2008 Copyright © 2003-2008 Nortel Networks .
Installation 397 Installing the MSDL card Procedure 17 Installing the MSDL card Step Action To install an MSDL card follow these steps: 1 Set Device Number S10 and S9. 2 Hold the MSDL by its card-locking devices. Squeeze the tabs to unlatch the card locking devices and lift the locking device out and away from the card. Be careful not to touch connector pins, conductor traces, or integrated circuits. Static discharge may damage integrated circuits.
NT6D80 MSDL card A D-Channel on the MSDL requires a connection from the appropriate MSDL port connector to the DCH connector located on the ISDN PRI trunk faceplate. Other operations on the MSDL are connected to external devices such as terminals and modems. To complete one of these connections, connect the appropriate I/O connector on the MSDL to a connector on the I/O panel at the back of the module where the MSDL is installed.
Installation 399 Figure 104 MSDL cabling Note: The choices of cable to use with an MSDL card depend on what type of modem is connected. For example, the NTND27 cable is used when the modem has a DB25 connection. If the modem is v.35, a customized or external vendor cable is required.
NT6D80 MSDL card Cable installation When the MSDL card is installed, connect the cables to the equipment required for the selected operation. PRI trunk connections D-channel operations require connections between the MSDL and a PRI trunk card. Refer to ISDN Primary Rate Interface: Features (NN43001-569) for a complete discussion of PRI and D-channels.
Installation 5 Secure cable connectors in place with their fasteners. 6 Repeat steps 1 through 5 for each connection. 401 --End-- MSDL planning form Use the following planning form to help sort and store information concerning the MSDL cards in your system as shown in the sample. Record switch settings for unequipped ports as well as for equipped ports. MSDL data form Ports Device no. Shelf Date install ed Last updat e Operation Logical no. Slot Card ID Switch setting Cable no.
NT6D80 MSDL card Maintenance Routine maintenance consists of enabling and disabling MSDL cards and downloading new versions of peripheral software. These activities are performed by an authorized person such as a system administrator. Troubleshooting the MSDL consists of determining problem types, isolating problem sources, and solving the problem. A craftsperson normally performs these activities.
Maintenance 403 Figure 105 MSDL states A newly configured MSDL automatically enters the manually disabled state. An operating MSDL can be manually disabled by issuing the DIS MSDL x command in LD 37 (step 1 in Figure 105 "MSDL states" (page 403)). Entering the DIS MSDL x command in LD 37 moves the card to manually disabled status and stops all system communication with the card (step 5 in Figure 105 "MSDL states" (page 403)).
NT6D80 MSDL card (page 403)). Otherwise, the system periodically tries to enable the card, attempting recovery during the midnight routines (step 3 in Figure 105 "MSDL states" (page 403)). The system disables the MSDL if the card: • • • • • • exhibits an overload condition does not respond to system messages is removed resets itself encounters a fatal error is frequently system disabled and recovered When an MSDL is system disabled, a substate indicates why the MSDL is disabled.
Maintenance 405 Maintaining the MSDL The system controls automatic MSDL maintenance functions. A craftsperson or system administrator performs manual maintenance by changing the card status, downloading new versions of peripheral software, or invoking self-tests.
NT6D80 MSDL card Enabling the MSDL Enter ENL MSDL x to enable the MSDL manually. If the MSDL base code has not been previously downloaded or if the card version is different from the one on the system disk, the software is downloaded and the card is enabled. To force software download and enable the card, enter ENL MSDL x FDL. This command forces the download of the MSDL base code and the configured peripheral software even if it is already resident on the card. The card is then enabled.
Maintenance 407 Isolate MSDL faults using the diagnostic tools described below: Step Action 1 Observe and list the problem symptoms; for example, a typical symptom is a permanently lit LED. 2 If the LED flashes three times but the card does not enable, verify that the card is installed in a proper slot. 3 Check that the address is unique; no other card in the system can be physically set to the same device number as the MSDL.
NT6D80 MSDL card card does not enable, note the message output to the TTY and follow the recommended action. --End-- Replacing MSDL cards After completing MSDL troubleshooting you may determine that one or more MSDL cards are defective. Remove the defective cards and replace them with new ones. Procedure 20 Replacing an MSDL card Step Action An MSDL card can be removed from and inserted into a system module without turning off the power to the module.
System disabled actions 409 12 Tag the defective card(s) with a description of the problem and return them to your Nortel representative. --End-- Symptoms and actions Explained here are some of the symptoms, diagnoses, and actions required to resolve MSDL card problems. Contact your Nortel representative for further assistance. These explain the causes of problems and the actions needed to return the card to an enabled state following installation or operational problems.
NT6D80 MSDL card Table 164 Cause: The MSDL card is not installed or is unable to respond to the messages from the system. Action: Check the MSDL messages on the console and take the action recommended. Refer to Software Input/Output Reference — Administration (NN43001-611). Verify that the address switches on the MSDL are set correctly. Verify that the card is properly installed in the shelf for at least 5 minutes. If the problem persists, manually disable the card by entering the DIS MSDL x.
System disabled actions 411 Table 165 (cont’d.) MSDL 10: SYS DSBL—SELFTEST PASSED NO RECOVERY UNTIL MIDNIGHT: FAILED BASE DNLD 5 TIMES SDI 10 DIS PORT 0 AML 11 DIS PORT 1 DCH 12 DIS PORT 2 AML 13 DIS PORT 3 Error messages usually indicate the problem in this case. See “Maintaining the MSDL” (page 405). SYSTEM DISABLED—SELF-TESTS FAILED Cause: The card did not pass self-tests. These tests repeat five times. If unsuccessful, autorecovery stops until midnight unless you take action.
NT6D80 MSDL card Table 167 (cont’d.) Check the traffic report, which may indicate that one or more MSDL ports are handling excessive traffic. By disabling each port, identify the port with too much traffic and allow the remaining ports to operate normally. Refer to “Maintaining the MSDL” (page 405). If the problem persists, place the card in the manually disabled state by the DIS MSDL x command and follow the steps in “Previously operating MSDL cards” (page 407).
. NT8D02 and NTDK16 Digital Line cards Contents This section contains information on the following topics: “Introduction” (page 413) “Physical description” (page 415) “Functional description” (page 419) “Electrical specifications” (page 433) “Connector pin assignments” (page 439) “Configuration” (page 442) Introduction ATTENTION IMPORTANT! The NT8D02 Digital Line card is supported in CS 1000E, CS 1000M, and Meridian 1. The NTDK16 digital line card is supported ONLY in the Chassis system.
NT8D02 and NTDK16 Digital Line cards NT8D02 Digital Line card The 32 port NT8D02 Digital Line card is supported in the Media Gateway and Media Gateway Expansion. You can install this card in any IPE slot. NTDK16 Digital Line card The NTDK16 is a 48 port card supported only in the Chassis system. It is based on the NT8D02 Digital Line card and is functionally equivalent to three NT8D02s, and configured as cards 4, 5, and 6 in the main chassis.
Physical description 415 The digital line card supports voice only or simultaneous voice and data service over a single twisted pair of standard telephone wiring. When a digital telephone is equipped with the data option, an asynchronous ASCII terminal, or a PC acting as an asynchronous ASCII terminal, can be connected to the system through the digital telephone. The NT8D02 Digital Line Card provides 16 voice and 16 data communication links.
NT8D02 and NTDK16 Digital Line cards The faceplate of the NTDK16BA digital line card is equipped with three light emitting diodes (LEDs). A red LED lights when the card is disabled. At power-up, this LED flashes as the digital line card runs a self-test. If the test completes successfully, the card is automatically enabled (if it is configured in software) and the LED goes out. This LED only shows the status of the NTDK16 in slot 4. Note: The NTDK16AA has one LED. This LED shows the status of Card 4.
Physical description Figure 106 Digital line card - faceplate Nortel Communication Server 1000 Circuit Card Reference NN43001-311 02.06 Standard 27 August 2008 Copyright © 2003-2008 Nortel Networks .
NT8D02 and NTDK16 Digital Line cards Figure 107 Digital line card - faceplate The NT8D02 Digital Line Card circuitry is mounted on a 31.75 cm by 25.40 cm (12.5 in. by 10 in.) double-sided printed circuit board. The card connects to the backplane through a 160-pin edge connector. The faceplate of the NT8D02 Digital Line Card is equipped with a red LED that lights when the card is disabled. See Figure 108 "Digital line card - faceplate" (page 419).
Functional description 419 successfully, the LED flashes three times and remains lit until the card is configured and enabled in software, then the LED goes out. If the LED continually flashes or remains weakly lit, replace the card. Figure 108 Digital line card - faceplate Functional description NT8D02 Digital Line card The NT8D02 Digital Line card is equipped with 16 identical units.
NT8D02 and NTDK16 Digital Line cards multiplexed (TCM) digital link. Each digital telephone and associated data terminal is assigned a separate terminal number (TN) in the system database, for a total of 32 addressable ports per card. The NT8D02 Digital Line card is equipped with 16 identical digital line interfaces.
Functional description 421 Figure 109 Digital line card - block diagram NTDK16 Digital Line card The NTDK16 digital line card is equipped with 48 identical units. Each unit provides a multiplexed voice, data, and signaling path to and from digital apparatus over a 2-wire full duplex 512 kHz time compression multiplexed (TCM) digital link. Each digital telephone and associated data terminal is assigned a separate terminal number (TN) in the system database, for a total of 96 addressable ports per card.
NT8D02 and NTDK16 Digital Line cards The NTDK16 digital line card contains a microprocessor that provides the following functions: • • • • • self-identification self-test control of card operation status report to the controller maintenance diagnostics The card also provides: • • • Ability to support Digital sets and the Digital Console M2250 Provides a serial link (Card LAN) for status report and maintenance. Supports loop lengths up to 3500 ft. (1.0 km) using 24 AWG wire.
Functional description Figure 110 NTDK16 DLC Nortel Communication Server 1000 Circuit Card Reference NN43001-311 02.06 Standard 27 August 2008 Copyright © 2003-2008 Nortel Networks .
NT8D02 and NTDK16 Digital Line cards Figure 111 Digital line card - block diagram The NT8D02 Digital Line Card is equipped with 16 identical digital line interfaces. Each interface provides a multiplexed voice, data, and signaling path to and from a digital terminal (telephone) over a 2-wire full duplex 512 kHz Time Compression Multiplexed (TCM) digital link.
Functional description 425 Number (TN) in the system database, giving a total of 32 addressable units per card. The digital line card supports Nortel Networks’ Meridian Digital Telephone. Figure 112 "NT8D02 Digital Line Card - block diagram" (page 425) shows a block diagram of the major functions contained on the NT8D02 Digital Line Card. Each of these functions is described on the following pages.
NT8D02 and NTDK16 Digital Line cards Functional description of the NT8D02 The digital line card is equipped with 16 identical units. Each unit provides a multiplexed voice, data, and signaling path to and from digital apparatus over a 2-wire full duplex 512 kHz time compression multiplexed (TCM) digital link. Each digital telephone and associated data terminal is assigned a separate terminal number (TN) in the system database, for a total of 32 addressable ports per card.
Functional description 427 Card interfaces The digital line card passes voice, data, and signaling over DS-30X loops and maintenance data over the card LAN link. These interfaces are discussed in detail in the section “Intelligent Peripheral Equipment” (page 21). The digital line card passes voice, data, and signaling over DS-30X loops and maintenance data over the card LAN link. These interfaces are discussed in detail in the section “Intelligent Peripheral Equipment” (page 21).
NT8D02 and NTDK16 Digital Line cards Figure 113 NTDK16 DLC The digital line interface circuits also contain signaling and control circuits that establish, supervise, and take down call connections. These circuits work with the on-card microcontroller to operate the digital line interface circuits during calls. The circuits receive outgoing call signaling messages from the Call Server and return incoming call status information to the Call Server over the DS-30X network loop.
Functional description 429 The digital line interface circuits also contain signaling and control circuits that establish, supervise, and take down call connections. These circuits work with the on-card microcontroller to operate the digital line interface circuits during calls. The circuits receive outgoing call signaling messages from the CP and return incoming call status information to the CP over the DS-30X network loop. The digital line interface contains two Digital Line Interface Circuits (DLIC).
NT8D02 and NTDK16 Digital Line cards Each digital telephone line terminates on the digital line card at a TCM loop interface circuit. The circuit provides transformer coupling and foreign voltage protection between the TCM loop and the digital line interface circuit. It also provides battery voltage for the digital telephone.
Functional description 431 Control functions are provided by a microcontroller and a Card LAN link on the digital line card. A sanity timer is provided to automatically reset the card if the microcontroller stops functioning for any reason. Microcontroller The NT8D02 Digital Line card contains a microcontroller that controls the internal operation of the card and the serial card LAN link to the controller card.
NT8D02 and NTDK16 Digital Line cards The microcontroller also controls the front panel LED when the card is enabled or disabled by instructions from the NT8D01 controller card. Microcontroller The NT8D02 Digital Line Card contains a microcontroller that controls the internal operation of the card and the serial card LAN link to the controller card.
Digital line interface specifications 433 The digital line card also contains a sanity timer that resets the microcontroller if program control is lost. The microcontroller must service the sanity timer every 1.2 seconds. If the timer is not properly serviced, it times out and causes the microcontroller to be hardware reset. The NT8D02 Digital Line Card also contains a sanity timer that resets the microcontroller if program control is lost. The microcontroller must service the sanity timer every 1.
NT8D02 and NTDK16 Digital Line cards Table 169 NT8D02/NTDK16 Digital Line card technical summary (cont’d.
Technical summary 435 Table 170 NT8D02/NTDK16 Digital Line Card technical summary (cont’d.) Characteristics NT8D02 DLC description NTDK16BA DLC description NTDK16AA DLC description + 5 V DC ±15 V DC Power supply + 5 V DC ±15 V DC +10 V DC + 5 V DC ±15 V DC +8 V DC Not applicable Power Failure Transfer Control Ring Sync. Transmitter output voltage: • successive "1" bits +1.5 ± 0.15 V and -1.5 ± 0.
NT8D02 and NTDK16 Digital Line cards Table 172 NT8D02 Digital Line Card - line interface unit electrical characteristics Characteristics Description Units per card 16 voice, 16 data Line rate 512 kbps ± 100 ppm Impedance 100 ohms Loop limits 0 to 1067 m (3500 ft.) with 24 AWG PVC cable (±15 V dc at 80 mA) Maximum ac Signal loss 15.5 dB at 256 KHz Maximum dc Loop resistance 210 ohms Transmitter output voltage: successive "1" bits +1.5 ± 0.15 V and –1.5 ± 0.
Technical summary 437 Table 174 Digital line card-power required Voltage Current (max.) ±5.0 V dc 150 mA +15.0 V dc 1.6 Amp –15.0 V dc 1.3 Amp The NT8D02 Digital Line Card provides +15 V dc over each loop at a maximum current of 80 mA. It requires +15 V, -15 V, and +5 V from the backplane. One NT8D06 Peripheral Equipment Power Supply ac or NT6D40 Peripheral Equipment Power Supply dc can supply power to a maximum of 16 digital line cards.
NT8D02 and NTDK16 Digital Line cards Off-premise telephones served by cable pairs routed through the central office, or crossing a public right-of-way, can be subject to a requirement for on-card protection, and MDF protectors may not be acceptable. Check local regulations before providing such service. In-circuit protection against power line crosses or lightning is not provided on the NT8D02 Digital Line Card.
Connector pin assignments 439 Table 178 NT8D02 Digital Line Card - environmental specifications Parameter Specifications Operating temperature 0 to +60 C (+32 to +140 F), ambient Operating humidity 5 to 95% RH (non-condensing) Storage temperature –40 to +70 C (–40 to +158 F) Connector pin assignments Table 179 "NT8D02 Digital Line card - backplane pinouts" (page 439) shows the I/O pin designations at the backplane connector, which is arranged as an 80-row by 2-column array of pins.
NT8D02 and NTDK16 Digital Line cards Table 179 NT8D02 Digital Line card - backplane pinouts (cont’d.
Connector pin assignments 441 Table 180 Digital line card - backplane pinouts (cont’d.) Backplane Pinout* Lead Designations Backplane Pinout* Lead Designations 68A Line 14, Ring 68B Line 14, Tip 69A Line 15, Ring 69B Line 15, Tip *These pinouts apply to both the NT8D37 and NT8D11 backplanes Table 180 "Digital line card - backplane pinouts" (page 440) shows the I/O pin designations at the backplane connector, which is arranged as an 80-row by 2-column array of pins.
NT8D02 and NTDK16 Digital Line cards Table 181 NT8D02 Digital Line Card - backplane pinouts (cont’d.
Configuration 443 The NT8D02GA, NT8D02HA, and NT8D02HAE5 Cards are based on a different architecture and hence need a jumper (J1) to activate/deactivate the unterminated line detection feature. When connected to digital sets, the jumper J1 should be removed. This enables the unterminated line detection feature. This jumper settings is applicable only to NT8D02GA , NT8D02HA, and NT8D02HAE5 packs. Software service changes Voice and data ports are configured using LD 11.
NT8D02 and NTDK16 Digital Line cards Figure 114 Digital line card - jumper block and switch locations Voice and data ports are configured using LD 11. See Software Input/Output Reference — Administration (NN43001-611) for LD 11 service change instructions. Nortel Communication Server 1000 Circuit Card Reference NN43001-311 02.06 Standard 27 August 2008 Copyright © 2003-2008 Nortel Networks .
Configuration Figure 115 Digital line card - jumper block and switch locations Nortel Communication Server 1000 Circuit Card Reference NN43001-311 02.06 Standard 27 August 2008 Copyright © 2003-2008 Nortel Networks .
NT8D02 and NTDK16 Digital Line cards Figure 116 NT8D02 Digital Line Card - jumper block and switch locations Nortel Communication Server 1000 Circuit Card Reference NN43001-311 02.06 Standard 27 August 2008 Copyright © 2003-2008 Nortel Networks .
Configuration Figure 117 Digital line card - jumper block and switch locations Nortel Communication Server 1000 Circuit Card Reference NN43001-311 02.06 Standard 27 August 2008 Copyright © 2003-2008 Nortel Networks .
NT8D02 and NTDK16 Digital Line cards Nortel Communication Server 1000 Circuit Card Reference NN43001-311 02.06 Standard 27 August 2008 Copyright © 2003-2008 Nortel Networks .
. NT8D09 Analog Message Waiting Line card Contents This section contains information on the following topics: “Introduction” (page 449) “Physical description” (page 452) “Functional description” (page 455) “Connector pin assignments” (page 473) “Configuration” (page 474) Introduction The NT8D09 Analog Message Waiting Line card is an IPE line card that can be installed in the NT8D37 IPE module.
NT8D09 Analog Message Waiting Line card Cards later than vintage NT8D09AK support µ-Law and A-Law companding, and provide a 2 dB transmission profile change. The transmission change improves performance on long lines, particularly for lines used outside of a single-building environment. The NT8D09 Analog Message Waiting Line card supports 56K modem operation.
Introduction 451 Cards later than vintage NT8D09AK support µ-Law and A-Law companding, and provide a 2 dB transmission profile change. The transmission change improves performance on long lines, particularly for lines used outside of a single-building environment. CAUTION Damage to Equipment If a modem is connected to a port on the message waiting line card, do not define that port in software (LD 10) as having message waiting capabilities. Otherwise, the modem gets damaged.
NT8D09 Analog Message Waiting Line card The NT8D09 Analog Message Waiting Line Card is functionally identical to the NT8D03 Analog Line Card, except it can also connect a high-voltage, low-current feed to each line to light the message waiting lamp on telephones equipped with the Message Waiting feature. The NT8D09 Analog Message Waiting Line Card supports 56K modem operation.
Physical description 453 Figure 118 Analog message waiting line card - faceplate The analog message waiting line card mounts in any IPE slot. The circuitry is mounted on a 31.75 cm. by 25.40 cm (12.5 in. by 10 in.) printed circuit board. The analog message waiting line card connects to the backplane through a 160-pin edge connector. The backplane is cabled to the Input/Output (I/O) panel that then connects to the Main Distribution Frame (MDF), also called a cross-connect terminal through 25-pair cables.
NT8D09 Analog Message Waiting Line card to the card through the MDF. SeeCommunication Server 1000M and Meridian 1 Large System Installation and Configuration (NN43021-310) for termination and cross-connect information. The faceplate of the analog message waiting line card is equipped with a red LED that lights when the card is disabled. See Figure 118 "Analog message waiting line card - faceplate" (page 453). When the card is installed, the LED remains lit for two to five seconds as a self-test runs.
Functional description 455 The faceplate of the NT8D09 Analog Message Waiting Line Card is equipped with a red LED which lights when the card is disabled. At power-up, the LED flashes as the analog line card runs a self-test. If the test completes successfully, the card is automatically enabled (if it is configured in software) and the LED goes out.
NT8D09 Analog Message Waiting Line card Figure 119 "Analog message waiting line card - block diagram" (page 457) shows a block diagram of the major functions contained on the analog message waiting line card. Each of these functions are described in the following sections. Figure 120 "Analog message waiting line card - block diagram" (page 458) shows a block diagram of the major functions contained on the analog message waiting line card.
Functional description Figure 119 Analog message waiting line card - block diagram Nortel Communication Server 1000 Circuit Card Reference NN43001-311 02.06 Standard 27 August 2008 Copyright © 2003-2008 Nortel Networks .
NT8D09 Analog Message Waiting Line card Figure 120 Analog message waiting line card - block diagram • transmission and reception of scan and signaling device (SSD) signaling messages over a DS30X signaling channel in A10 format • on-hook/off-hook status and switchhook flash detection Nortel Communication Server 1000 Circuit Card Reference NN43001-311 02.06 Standard 27 August 2008 Copyright © 2003-2008 Nortel Networks .
Functional description 459 • 20-Hz ringing signal connection and automatic disconnection when the station goes off-hook • synchronization for connecting and disconnecting the ringing signal to zero crossing of ringing voltage • loopback of SSD messages and pulse code modulation (PCM) signals for diagnostic purposes • • correct initialization of all features at power-up • • • connection of -150 V DC at 1 Hz to activate message waiting lamps direct reporting of digit dialed (500-type telephones) b
NT8D09 Analog Message Waiting Line card • direct reporting of digit dialed (500-type telephones) by collecting dial pulses • • • connection of –150 V dc at 1 Hz to activate message waiting lamps lamp status detection disabling and enabling of selected units for maintenance Card interfaces The analog message waiting line card passes voice and signaling data over DS-30X loops and maintenance data over the card LAN link. These interfaces are discussed in “Intelligent Peripheral Equipment” (page 21).
Functional description 461 Card control functions Control functions are provided by the following: • • • a microcontroller a card LAN interface signaling and control circuits on the analog message waiting line card Microcontroller The analog message waiting line card contains a microcontroller that controls the internal operation of the card and the serial card LAN link to the controller card.
NT8D09 Analog Message Waiting Line card Line interface units The analog message waiting line card contains 16 identical and independently configurable line interface units (also referred to as circuits). Each unit provides 600-ohm impedance matching and a balance network in a signal transformer/analog hybrid circuit. Circuits are also provided in each unit to apply the ringing voltage onto the line synchronized to the ringing current zero crossing.
Functional description 463 — card identification (card type, vintage, and serial number) — firmware version — self-test status — programmed configuration status • receipt and implementation of card configuration: — programming of the CODECs — enabling/disabling of individual units or entire card — programming of input/output interface control circuits for administration of line interface unit operation — enabling/disabling of an interrupted dial tone to indicate call waiting — maintenance diagnostics
NT8D09 Analog Message Waiting Line card Technical summary or Electrical specifications Analog line interface The NT8D09 Analog Message Waiting Line Card meets the EIA/TA464 standard for ONS Type II line cards. Table 185 "Analog message waiting line card - line interface unit electrical characteristics" (page 464) shows a summary of the analog line interface unit electrical characteristics.
Electrical specifications 465 Input impedance The impedance at tip and ring is 600 ohms with a return loss of: • • 20 dB for 200-500 Hz 26 dB for 500-3400 Hz Input impedance The impedance at tip and ring is 600 ohms with a return loss of: • • 20 dB for 200 – 500 Hz 26 dB for 500 – 3400 Hz Insertion loss On a station line-to-line connection, the total insertion loss at 1 kHz is 6 dB + 1 dB. This is arranged as 3.5 dB loss for analog to PCM, and 2.5 dB loss for PCM to analog.
NT8D09 Analog Message Waiting Line card Frequency response The loss values in Table 188 "NT8D09 Analog Message Waiting Line Card frequency response" (page 466) are measured relative to the loss at 1 kHz. Table 187 NT8D09 Analog Message Waiting Line Card frequency response Frequency Minimum Maximum 60 Hz 20.0 dB — 200 Hz 0.0 dB 5.0 dB 300 Hz –0.5 dB 1.0 dB 3000 Hz –0.5 dB 1.0 dB 3200 Hz –0.5 dB 1.5 dB 3400 Hz 0.0 dB 3.
Electrical specifications 467 Table 189 NT8D09 Analog Message Waiting Line card technical summary Impedance 600 ohms Loop limit (excluding set) 1000 ohms at nominal -48 V (excluding set) Leakage resistance 30,000 ohms Ring trip During silent or ringing intervals Ringing voltage 86 V AC Signaling Loop start Supervision Normal battery conditions are continuously applied (approximately -44.5 V on ring and -2.
NT8D09 Analog Message Waiting Line card Table 190 NT8D09 Analog Message Waiting Line Card technical summary (cont’d.) Power input from backplane –48 (can be as low as –42 for dc-powered systems), +15, –15, +8.5 V and ringing voltage; also –150 V on analog message waiting line card Insertion loss 6 dB + 1 dB at 1020 Hz 3.5 dB loss for analog to PCM, 2.
Electrical specifications 469 Table 191 NT8D09 Analog Message Waiting Line Card technical summary (cont’d.) Power input from backplane -48 (can be as low as -42 for DC-powered systems), +15, -15, +8.5 V and ringing voltage; also -150 V on analog message waiting line card. Insertion loss 6 dB + 1 dB at 1020 Hz 3.5 dB loss for analog to PCM, 2.
NT8D09 Analog Message Waiting Line card Table 193 Power requirements (cont’d.) Voltage (+/-) Tolerance Idle current Active current Max –48.0 V dc 5.00 V dc 0 mA 10 mA (Note 1) 320 mA 86.0 V ac 5.00 V ac 0 mA 10 mA (Note 2) 160 mA –150.0 V dc 3.00 V dc 0 mA 2 mA 32 mA Note 1: Each active ringing relay requires 10 mA of battery voltage. Note 2: Reflects the current for ringing a single station set (or DN telephone). There may be as many as five ringers on each line.
Electrical specifications 471 Table 195 Power requirements Voltage (+/-) Tolerance Idle current Active current Max + 12.0 V DC 0.36 V DC 48 mA 0 mA 48 mA + 8.0 V DC 0.40 V DC 150 mA 8 mA 280 mA - 48.0 V DC 2.00 V DC 48 mA 40 mA 688 mA - 48.0 V DC 5.00 V DC 0 mA 10 mA (Note 1) 320 mA 86.0 V AC 5.00 V AC 0 mA 10 mA (Note 2) 160 mA -150.0 V DC 3.00 V DC 0 mA 2 mA 32 mA Note: Each active ringing relay requires 10 mA of battery voltage.
NT8D09 Analog Message Waiting Line card must be installed. Details on installing protection devices are given in “Environmental specifications” (page 317). Off-premise telephones served by cable pairs routed through the central office, or crossing a public right-of-way, can be subject to a requirement for on-card protection, and MDF protectors may not be acceptable. Check local regulations before providing such service.
Connector pin assignments 473 Table 198 "Analog message waiting line card - environmental specifications" (page 473) lists the environmental specifications for the analog message waiting line card.
NT8D09 Analog Message Waiting Line card Table 199 Analog message waiting line card - backplane pinouts Backplane pinout* Lead designations Backplane pinout* Lead designations 12A Line 0, Ring 12B Line 0, Tip 13A Line 1, Ring 13B Line 1, Tip 14A Line 2, Ring 14B Line 2, Tip 15A Line 3, Ring 15B Line 3, Tip 16A Line 4, Ring 16B Line 4, Tip 17A Line 5, Ring 17B Line 5, Tip 18A Line 6, Ring 18B Line 6, Tip 19A Line 7, Ring 18B Line 7, Tip 62A Line 8, Ring 62B Line 8,
Configuration 475 The message waiting feature is enabled by entering data into the customer data block using LD 15. See Software Input/Output Reference — Administration (NN43001-611) for LD 10 and LD 15 service change instructions. Analog message waiting line cards with a vintage later than NT8D09AK provide a fixed +2 dB transmission profile change in the gain of the D/A convertor. See Table 200 "Transmission Profile Changes" (page 476).
NT8D09 Analog Message Waiting Line card other IPE ports. LD 97 is used to configure the system for port-to-port loss. See Software Input/Output Reference — Administration (NN43001-611) for LD 97 service change instructions. Table 200 Transmission Profile Changes Vintage A/D convertor gain D/A convertor gain Previous to AK –3.5 dB –2.5 dB AK and later –3.5 dB –0.5 dB The analog message waiting line card brings the 16 phone lines to the IPE backplane through a 160-pin connector shroud.
Configuration 477 Figure 122 Analog message waiting line card - jumper block and switch locations Table 201 Analog message waiting line card - backplane pinouts Backplane pinout* Lead designations Backplane pinout* Lead designations 12A Line 0, Ring 12B Line 0, Tip 13A Line 1, Ring 13B Line 1, Tip 14A Line 2, Ring 14B Line 2, Tip * These pinouts apply to both NT8D37 and NT8D11 backplanes. Nortel Communication Server 1000 Circuit Card Reference NN43001-311 02.
NT8D09 Analog Message Waiting Line card Table 201 Analog message waiting line card - backplane pinouts (cont’d.
Configuration 479 Figure 123 Analog message waiting line card - typical cross connection example Configuration This section outlines the procedures for configuring the switches and jumpers on the NT8D09 Analog Message Waiting Line Card and configuring the system software to properly recognize the card. Figure 124 "Analog message waiting line card - jumper block and switch locations" (page 481) shows where the switches and jumper blocks are located on this board.
NT8D09 Analog Message Waiting Line card Jumper and switch settings The NT8D09 Analog Message Waiting Line Card has no user-configurable jumpers or switches. The card derives its address from its position in the backplane and reports that information back to the Meridian 1 CPU through the LAN Link interface. Software service changes Individual line interface units on the NT8D09 Analog Message Waiting Line Card are configured using the Analog (500/2500-type) Telephone Administration program LD 10.
Configuration Figure 124 Analog message waiting line card - jumper block and switch locations Nortel Communication Server 1000 Circuit Card Reference NN43001-311 02.06 Standard 27 August 2008 Copyright © 2003-2008 Nortel Networks .
NT8D09 Analog Message Waiting Line card Nortel Communication Server 1000 Circuit Card Reference NN43001-311 02.06 Standard 27 August 2008 Copyright © 2003-2008 Nortel Networks .
. NT8D14 Universal Trunk card Contents This section contains information on the following topics: “Introduction” (page 483) “Physical description” (page 488) “Functional description” (page 493) “Operation” (page 501) “Electrical specifications” (page 592) “Connector pin assignments” (page 602) “Configuration” (page 606) “Applications” (page 627) Introduction Nortel is pleased to introduce the NT8D14CA Universal Trunk (XUT) card as a replacement for the NT8D14BB card.
NT8D14 Universal Trunk card You can install this card in any IPE slot.In Meridian 1 Option 11C systems the NT8D14 Universal Trunk Card is installed in slots 1 through 10 of the Main cabinet, or in slots 11 through 50 in the Expansion cabinets. Note: Each Media Gateway and Media Gateway Expansion can contain up to four analog trunk cards.
Introduction 485 Table 203 Trunk and signaling matrix (cont’d.) Trunk types CO/FX/ WATS DID Tie RAN Paging CAMA Continuous operation mode No No No Yes N/A No Start modes (pulse and level) No No No Yes N/A No Signaling type Note: For incoming and outgoing service, DID trunks must be programmed as loop dial repeating. The NT8D14 Universal trunk Card is an Intelligent Peripheral Equipment (IPE) device that can be installed in either the NT8D37 IPE Module or the NT8D11 CE/PE Module.
NT8D14 Universal Trunk card Table 204 Trunk and signaling matrix (cont’d.) Trunk types CO/FX/ WATS DID Tie RAN Paging CAMA Loop DR No Yes Yes N/A N/A No Loop OAID No No Yes N/A N/A No Continuous operation mode No No No Yes N/A No Start modes (pulse and level) No No No Yes N/A No Signaling type Note: For incoming and outgoing service, DID trunks must be programmed as loop dial repeating.
Introduction 487 Table 205 Trunk and signaling matrix Trunk types CO/FX/ WATS Signaling type DID Tie RAN Paging CAMA Loop start Yes No (see no te) No N/A N/A Yes Ground start Yes No No N/A N/A No Loop DR No Yes Yes N/A N/A No Loop OAID No No Yes N/A N/A No Continuous operation mode No No No Yes N/A No Start modes (pulse and level) No No No Yes N/A No Note: For incoming and outgoing service, DID trunks must be programmed as loop dial repeating.
NT8D14 Universal Trunk card Table 206 Supported trunk type and signaling matrix CO/FX WATS DID/ DOD Tie PAG RAN Loop start yes no no no no Ground start yes no no no no Loop dial repeating no yes yes no no Loop OAID no no yes no no Physical description The trunk and common multiplexing circuitry is mounted on a 31.75 cm by 25.40 cm (12.5 in. by 10 in.) printed circuit board. The NT8D14 Universal Trunk card connects to the backplane through a 160-pin connector shroud.
Physical description 489 The universal trunk card connects to the backplane through a 160-pin connector shroud. The backplane is cabled to the I/O panel, which is cabled to the Main Distribution Frame (MDF) by 25-pair cables. External equipment, such as recorded announcement machines, paging equipment, and central office facilities, connect to the card at the MDF.
NT8D14 Universal Trunk card Figure 125 Universal trunk card - faceplate Nortel Communication Server 1000 Circuit Card Reference NN43001-311 02.06 Standard 27 August 2008 Copyright © 2003-2008 Nortel Networks .
Physical description 491 Figure 126 Universal trunk card - faceplate The faceplate of the card is equipped with a red Light Emitting Diode (LED). See Figure 126 "Universal trunk card - faceplate" (page 491). When an NT8D14 Universal Trunk Card is installed, the LED remains lit for two to five seconds while the self-test runs. If the self-test is successful, the LED flashes three times and remains lit. When the card is configured and enabled in software, then the LED goes out.
NT8D14 Universal Trunk card In Meridian 1 Option 11C systems the NT8D14 Universal Trunk Card is installed in slots 1 through 10 of the Main cabinet, or in slots 11 through 50 in the Expansion cabinets. When the card is installed, the red Light Emitting Diode (LED) on the faceplate flashes as the self-test runs. If the self-test completes successfully, the card is automatically enabled (if it is configured in software) and the LED goes out.
Functional description Figure 127 Universal trunk card - faceplate Functional description Figure 128 "NT8D14 Universal trunk card - block diagram" (page 494) shows a block diagram of the major functions contained on the NT8D14 Universal Trunk card. Each of these functions is described on the following pages. Nortel Communication Server 1000 Circuit Card Reference NN43001-311 02.06 Standard 27 August 2008 Copyright © 2003-2008 Nortel Networks .
NT8D14 Universal Trunk card Figure 128 NT8D14 Universal trunk card - block diagram The Universal Trunk Card: • • • allows trunk type to be configured on a per unit basis • • • converts transmission signals from analog-to-digital/digital-to-analog • provides software selected balance impedance (600 ohm or complex impedance network) on a per unit basis indicates status during an automatic or manual self-test provides card-identification for auto configuration, and to determine the serial number
Functional description • • interfaces eight PCM signals to one DS-30X timeslot in A10 format • supports PCM signal loopback to DS-30X for diagnostic purposes. 495 transmits and receives SSD signaling messages over a DS-30X signaling channel in A10 format Figure 129 "Universal trunk card - block diagram" (page 495) shows a block diagram of the major functions contained on the universal trunk card. Each of these functions are described on the following pages.
NT8D14 Universal Trunk card Figure 130 NT8D14 Universal trunk card - block diagram Card interfaces The NT8D14 Universal Trunk card passes voice and signaling data over DS-30X loops, and maintenance data over the card LAN link. These interfaces are described in “Intelligent Peripheral Equipment” (page 21). Trunk interface units The NT8D14 Universal Trunk card contains eight identical and independently configurable trunk interface units (also referred to as circuits).
Functional description 497 Also provided are relays for placing outgoing call signaling onto the trunk. Signal detection circuits monitor incoming call signaling. Two codecs are provided for performing A/D and D/A conversion of trunk analog voiceband signals to digital PCM signals. Each codec supports four trunk interface units.
NT8D14 Universal Trunk card in a signal transformer/analog hybrid circuit. Also provided are relays for placing outgoing call signaling onto the trunk. Signal detection circuits monitor incoming call signaling. Two CODECs are provided for performing A/D and D/A conversion of trunk analog voiceband signals to digital PCM signals. Each Codec supports four trunk interface units.
Functional description 499 — programming of input/output interface control circuits for administration of trunk interface unit operation — maintenance diagnostics — transmission pad settings The universal trunk card contains a microcontroller that controls the internal operation of the card and the serial card LAN link to the controller card.
NT8D14 Universal Trunk card The Universal Trunk Card is equipped with a microprocessor which controls card operation. The microprocessor also provides the communication function for the card. The Universal Trunk Card communicates with the Controller Card through a serial communication link.
Operation 501 The signaling and control portion of the Universal Trunk Card works with the CPU to operate the card hardware. The card receives messages from the CPU over a signaling channel in the DS-30X loop and returns status information to the CPU over the same channel. The signaling and control portion of the card provides the means for analog loop terminations to establish, supervise, and take down call connections. Signaling interface All trunk signaling messages are three bytes long.
NT8D14 Universal Trunk card Loop start operation Loop start operation is configured in software and implemented in the card through software download messages. When the card is idle, it provides a high impedance toward the CO for isolation and ac (ringing) detection. Loop start operation is configured in software and is implemented in the card through software download messages. When the universal trunk card is idle, it provides a high impedance toward the CO for isolation and AC (ringing) detection.
Operation 503 Figure 131 Loop start call states - incoming call from CO/FX/WATS The alerting signal into the Meridian 1 is 20 Hz (nominal) ringing sent by the CO. When an incoming call is answered, ringing is tripped when the Meridian 1 places a low-resistance dc loop across the tip and ring leads toward the CO. See Figure 137 "Loop start call states - incoming call from CO/FX/WATS" (page 510) and Figure 138 "Loop start call connection sequence - incoming call from CO/FX/WATS" (page 511).
NT8D14 Universal Trunk card Figure 132 Loop start call connection sequence - incoming call from CO/FX/WATS The alerting signal is 20 Hz ringing sent by North American CO. When an incoming call is answered, ringing is tripped when the trunk places a low resistance DC loop towards the CO. Nortel Communication Server 1000 Circuit Card Reference NN43001-311 02.06 Standard 27 August 2008 Copyright © 2003-2008 Nortel Networks .
Operation Figure 133 Loop start call states - incoming call Nortel Communication Server 1000 Circuit Card Reference NN43001-311 02.06 Standard 27 August 2008 Copyright © 2003-2008 Nortel Networks .
NT8D14 Universal Trunk card Figure 134 Loop start call connection sequence - incoming call Outgoing calls For outgoing calls, the software sends an outgoing seizure message to place a low-resistance loop across the tip and ring leads toward the CO. See Figure 135 "Ground start call states - incoming call from CO/FX/WATS" (page 507) and Figure 136 "Ground start call connection sequence - incoming call from CO/FX/WATS" (page 508).
Operation 507 detects the low-resistance loop, it prepares to receive digits.When the CO is ready to receive digits, it returns a dial tone. Outward address signaling is then applied from the system in the form of loop (interrupting) dial pulses or DTMF tones. Figure 135 Ground start call states - incoming call from CO/FX/WATS Nortel Communication Server 1000 Circuit Card Reference NN43001-311 02.06 Standard 27 August 2008 Copyright © 2003-2008 Nortel Networks .
NT8D14 Universal Trunk card Figure 136 Ground start call connection sequence - incoming call from CO/FX/WATS For outgoing calls from the Meridian 1, software sends an outgoing seizure message to place a low-resistance loop across the tip and ring leads toward the CO (see Figure 139 "Loop start call states - outgoing call to CO/FX/WATS" (page 512) and Figure 140 "Loop start call connection sequence - outgoing call to CO/FX/WATS" (page 513)).
Operation 509 is ready to receive digits, it returns dial tone. Outward address signaling is then applied from the Meridian 1 in the form of loop (interrupting) dial pulses or DTMF tones. For outgoing calls, the software sends an outgoing seizure message to place a low-resistance loop across the tip and ring leads toward the CO. See Figure 143 "Ground start call states - incoming call" (page 517) and Figure 144 "Ground start call connection sequence - incoming call" (page 518).
NT8D14 Universal Trunk card Figure 137 Loop start call states - incoming call from CO/FX/WATS The CS 1000 software provides the polarity-sensitive/polarity-insensitive (PSP and PIP) packs feature for the accurate recording of outgoing call duration for loop start and ground start operation.
Operation Figure 138 Loop start call connection sequence - incoming call from CO/FX/WATS Nortel Communication Server 1000 Circuit Card Reference NN43001-311 02.06 Standard 27 August 2008 Copyright © 2003-2008 Nortel Networks .
NT8D14 Universal Trunk card Figure 139 Loop start call states - outgoing call to CO/FX/WATS Nortel Communication Server 1000 Circuit Card Reference NN43001-311 02.06 Standard 27 August 2008 Copyright © 2003-2008 Nortel Networks .
Operation 513 Figure 140 Loop start call connection sequence - outgoing call to CO/FX/WATS Ground start operation Ground start operation is configured in software and implemented through software download messages. In the idle state, the tip conductor from the CO is open and a high-resistance negative battery is present on the ring lead. Nortel Communication Server 1000 Circuit Card Reference NN43001-311 02.06 Standard 27 August 2008 Copyright © 2003-2008 Nortel Networks .
NT8D14 Universal Trunk card Ground start operation is configured in software and implemented through software download messages. In the idle state, the tip conductor from the CO is open and a high-resistance negative battery is present on the ring lead. Ground start operation is configured in software and implemented through software download messages. In the idle state, the tip conductor from the CO is open and a high-resistance negative battery is present on the ring lead.
Operation Figure 141 Ground start call states - incoming call from CO/FX/WATS Nortel Communication Server 1000 Circuit Card Reference NN43001-311 02.06 Standard 27 August 2008 Copyright © 2003-2008 Nortel Networks .
NT8D14 Universal Trunk card Figure 142 Ground start call connection sequence - incoming call from CO/FX/WATS Nortel Communication Server 1000 Circuit Card Reference NN43001-311 02.06 Standard 27 August 2008 Copyright © 2003-2008 Nortel Networks .
Operation Figure 143 Ground start call states - incoming call Nortel Communication Server 1000 Circuit Card Reference NN43001-311 02.06 Standard 27 August 2008 Copyright © 2003-2008 Nortel Networks .
NT8D14 Universal Trunk card Figure 144 Ground start call connection sequence - incoming call Reverse-wiring compensation The CS 1000 software includes a feature for detecting reverse wiring (connection of the near-end tip and ring leads to the far-end ring and tip leads) on ground start trunks with far-end answer supervision. Nortel Communication Server 1000 Circuit Card Reference NN43001-311 02.06 Standard 27 August 2008 Copyright © 2003-2008 Nortel Networks .
Operation 519 Ordinarily, an incoming call on a reverse-wired trunk without reverse-wiring compensation presents ringing on the tip lead rather than on the ring lead. Since the software expects to see a ground on the tip lead, it interprets the end of the first ringing signal as a switchhook flash. But since the interval between ringing signals exceeds the switchhook flash time of 512 milliseconds, the software assumes a far-end disconnect.
NT8D14 Universal Trunk card interval between ringing signals exceeds the switchhook flash time of 512 milliseconds, software assumes far-end disconnect. This causes the call to be presented to a console loop key and then immediately removed. The reverse-wiring compensation feature operates as follows. If an apparent disconnect takes place immediately after the first ringing signal, the software time stamps the event and temporarily removes the call from the console loop key.
Operation 521 Trunks identified as possibly reverse wired are switched by software to loop start processing after the second ring. This switching takes place on a call-by-call basis. So if a previously correctly wired trunk becomes reverse wired, the next incoming call is marked as possibly reverse wired and the threshold count begins. If the threshold count exceeds its limit, an error message is printed and the trunk is registered as "positively reverse wired.
NT8D14 Universal Trunk card Figure 146 Ground start call connection sequence - incoming call from CO/FX/WATS If the threshold count exceeds its limit, an error message is printed and the trunk is registered as "positively reverse wired." Once identified as positively reverse wired, the call is presented continuously from the first ring. When a reverse-wired trunk becomes correctly wired, the first subsequent call clears the threshold counter and normal ground start processing is implemented.
Operation 523 Note 1: The far-end can reverse battery and ground upon receipt of attendant answer. Note 2: The near-end provides a high-impedance (>150k ohms) disconnect signal of at least 50 ms before reconnecting the ground detector. Outgoing calls For outgoing calls, the trunk provides a ground to the ring lead. The CO responds by grounding the tip and returning dial tone.
NT8D14 Universal Trunk card Figure 147 Ground start call states - outgoing call to CO/FX/WATS Nortel Communication Server 1000 Circuit Card Reference NN43001-311 02.06 Standard 27 August 2008 Copyright © 2003-2008 Nortel Networks .
Operation 525 Figure 148 Ground start call connection sequence - outgoing call to CO/FX/WATS The Polarity-Sensitive/Polarity-Insensitive Packs (PSP and PIP) feature must be set to provide for proper outgoing call-duration recording with ground start operation. Refer to the description of loop start operation for a more complete discussion of PSP and PIP. Nortel Communication Server 1000 Circuit Card Reference NN43001-311 02.06 Standard 27 August 2008 Copyright © 2003-2008 Nortel Networks .
NT8D14 Universal Trunk card Figure 149 Ground start call states - outgoing call to CO/FX/WATS Nortel Communication Server 1000 Circuit Card Reference NN43001-311 02.06 Standard 27 August 2008 Copyright © 2003-2008 Nortel Networks .
Operation 527 Figure 150 Ground start call connection sequence - outgoing call to CO/FX/WATS For outgoing calls, the trunk provides a ground to the ring lead. The CO responds by grounding the tip and returning dial tone. After the tip ground is detected by the card, a low-resistance path is placed between the tip and ring leads and the ground is removed from the ring.
NT8D14 Universal Trunk card or DTMF tones. See Figure 151 "Ground start call states - outgoing call" (page 528) and Figure 152 "Ground start call connection sequence outgoing call" (page 529). The Polarity-Sensitive/Polarity-Insensitive Packs (PSP and PIP) feature must be set to provide for proper outgoing call-duration recording with ground start operation. Refer to the description of loop start operation in this section for a more complete discussion of PSP and PIP.
Operation Figure 152 Ground start call connection sequence - outgoing call Nortel Communication Server 1000 Circuit Card Reference NN43001-311 02.06 Standard 27 August 2008 Copyright © 2003-2008 Nortel Networks .
NT8D14 Universal Trunk card Figure 153 Loop start call states - outgoing call Nortel Communication Server 1000 Circuit Card Reference NN43001-311 02.06 Standard 27 August 2008 Copyright © 2003-2008 Nortel Networks .
Operation 531 Figure 154 Loop start call connection sequence Direct inward dial operation Incoming calls An incoming call from the CO places a low-resistance loop across the tip and ring leads. See Figure 155 "DID trunk, loop DR call states incoming call from CO" (page 533) and Figure 156 "DID trunk, loop DR call connection sequence - incoming call from CO" (page 534). Nortel Communication Server 1000 Circuit Card Reference NN43001-311 02.
NT8D14 Universal Trunk card Dial pulses or DTMF tones are then presented from the CO. When the called party answers, the universal trunk card reverses battery and ground on the tip and ring leads to the CO. The trunk is arranged for first party release. The CO releases the trunk by removing the low-resistance loop, at which time normal battery and ground are restored at the near-end. This also applies to incoming tie trunk calls from a far-end PBX.
Operation 533 Figure 155 DID trunk, loop DR call states - incoming call from CO Note: The near-end can be configured for immediate start, delay dial, or wink start. Nortel Communication Server 1000 Circuit Card Reference NN43001-311 02.06 Standard 27 August 2008 Copyright © 2003-2008 Nortel Networks .
NT8D14 Universal Trunk card Figure 156 DID trunk, loop DR call connection sequence - incoming call from CO Nortel Communication Server 1000 Circuit Card Reference NN43001-311 02.06 Standard 27 August 2008 Copyright © 2003-2008 Nortel Networks .
Operation 535 Figure 157 DID trunk, loop DR call states - incoming call from CO An incoming call from the CO places a low resistance loop across the tip and ring leads. Dial pulses or DTMF signals are then presented from the CO. When the call is presented and the terminating party answers, the Universal Trunk Card reverses battery and ground on the tip and ring leads to the CO. Nortel Communication Server 1000 Circuit Card Reference NN43001-311 02.
NT8D14 Universal Trunk card Figure 158 DID trunk, loop DR call connection sequence - incoming call from CO The trunk is arranged for first party release. The CO releases the trunk by removing the low resistance loop and normal battery and ground are restored at the system. Nortel Communication Server 1000 Circuit Card Reference NN43001-311 02.06 Standard 27 August 2008 Copyright © 2003-2008 Nortel Networks .
Operation 537 Two-way, loop dial repeating, TIE trunk operation Incoming calls In an incoming call configuration, the far-end initiates a call by placing a low-resistance loop across the tip and ring leads. See Figure 159 "Two-way, loop DR, TIE trunk call states - incoming call from far-end PBX" (page 538) and Figure 160 "Two-way, loop DR, TIE trunk call connection sequence - incoming call from far-end PBX" (page 539). This causes a current to flow through the battery feed resistors in the trunk circuit.
NT8D14 Universal Trunk card Figure 159 Two-way, loop DR, TIE trunk call states - incoming call from far-end PBX Nortel Communication Server 1000 Circuit Card Reference NN43001-311 02.06 Standard 27 August 2008 Copyright © 2003-2008 Nortel Networks .
Operation Figure 160 Two-way, loop DR, TIE trunk call connection sequence - incoming call from far-end PBX Nortel Communication Server 1000 Circuit Card Reference NN43001-311 02.06 Standard 27 August 2008 Copyright © 2003-2008 Nortel Networks .
NT8D14 Universal Trunk card Figure 161 Two-way, loop DR, TIE trunk call states - incoming call from far-end PBX Nortel Communication Server 1000 Circuit Card Reference NN43001-311 02.06 Standard 27 August 2008 Copyright © 2003-2008 Nortel Networks .
Operation 541 Figure 162 Two-way, loop DR, TIE trunk call connection sequence - incoming call from far-end PBX In an incoming call configuration, the far-end initiates a call by placing a low-resistance loop across the tip and ring leads. See Figure 171 "Two-way, loop DR, tie trunk call states - incoming call from far-end PBX" (page 551) and Figure 172 "Two-way, loop DR, tie trunk call connection sequence - incoming call from far-end PBX" (page 552) on.
NT8D14 Universal Trunk card or dial pulses. When the called party answers, an answer supervision signal is sent by the software, causing the CS 1000 to reverse battery and ground on the tip and ringleads to the far-end. Far-end disconnect is initiated by opening the loop while the near-end disconnect is initiated by restoring normal battery and ground.
Operation 543 far-end PBX" (page 547) and Figure 168 "Two-way, loop DR, TIE trunk call connection sequence - outgoing call to far-end PBX" (page 548) also applies to outgoing calls on a DID trunk. Figure 163 Two-way, loop DR, TIE trunk call states - outgoing call to far-end PBX Note: Where no far-end answer supervision is provided, the party at the near-end hangs up, after recognizing far-end call termination.
NT8D14 Universal Trunk card in Figure 173 "Two-way, loop DR, tie trunk call states - outgoing call to far-end PBX" (page 553) and Figure 174 "Two-way, loop DR, tie trunk call connection sequence - outgoing call to far-end PBX" (page 554) also applies to outgoing calls on a DID trunk. Note: Where no far-end answer supervision is provided, the party at the near-end hangs up after recognizing far-end call termination.
Operation Figure 165 Two-way, loop DR, TIE trunk call states - outgoing call to far-end PBX Nortel Communication Server 1000 Circuit Card Reference NN43001-311 02.06 Standard 27 August 2008 Copyright © 2003-2008 Nortel Networks .
NT8D14 Universal Trunk card Figure 166 Two-way, loop DR, TIE trunk call connection sequence - outgoing call to far-end PBX Nortel Communication Server 1000 Circuit Card Reference NN43001-311 02.06 Standard 27 August 2008 Copyright © 2003-2008 Nortel Networks .
Operation Figure 167 Two-way, loop DR, TIE trunk call states - outgoing call to far-end PBX Nortel Communication Server 1000 Circuit Card Reference NN43001-311 02.06 Standard 27 August 2008 Copyright © 2003-2008 Nortel Networks .
NT8D14 Universal Trunk card Figure 168 Two-way, loop DR, TIE trunk call connection sequence - outgoing call to far-end PBX Nortel Communication Server 1000 Circuit Card Reference NN43001-311 02.06 Standard 27 August 2008 Copyright © 2003-2008 Nortel Networks .
Operation Figure 169 DID trunk, loop DR call states - incoming call Nortel Communication Server 1000 Circuit Card Reference NN43001-311 02.06 Standard 27 August 2008 Copyright © 2003-2008 Nortel Networks .
NT8D14 Universal Trunk card Figure 170 DID trunk, loop DR call connection sequence - incoming call Nortel Communication Server 1000 Circuit Card Reference NN43001-311 02.06 Standard 27 August 2008 Copyright © 2003-2008 Nortel Networks .
Operation Figure 171 Two-way, loop DR, tie trunk call states - incoming call from far-end PBX Nortel Communication Server 1000 Circuit Card Reference NN43001-311 02.06 Standard 27 August 2008 Copyright © 2003-2008 Nortel Networks .
NT8D14 Universal Trunk card Figure 172 Two-way, loop DR, tie trunk call connection sequence - incoming call from far-end PBX Nortel Communication Server 1000 Circuit Card Reference NN43001-311 02.06 Standard 27 August 2008 Copyright © 2003-2008 Nortel Networks .
Operation Figure 173 Two-way, loop DR, tie trunk call states - outgoing call to far-end PBX Nortel Communication Server 1000 Circuit Card Reference NN43001-311 02.06 Standard 27 August 2008 Copyright © 2003-2008 Nortel Networks .
NT8D14 Universal Trunk card Figure 174 Two-way, loop DR, tie trunk call connection sequence - outgoing call to far-end PBX Nortel Communication Server 1000 Circuit Card Reference NN43001-311 02.06 Standard 27 August 2008 Copyright © 2003-2008 Nortel Networks .
Operation 555 Senderized operation for DID and two-way loop DR trunks Incoming calls If the far-end is senderized, the near-end can operate in any mode: Immediate Start (IMM), Delay Dial (DDL) or Wink (WNK) start, as assigned at the STRI prompt in the Trunk Administration program LD 14. See Figure 175 "Two-way, loop DR, TIE trunk call states - incoming call through senderized, tandem PBX from a CO/FX/WATS trunk" (page 556).
NT8D14 Universal Trunk card Figure 175 Two-way, loop DR, TIE trunk call states - incoming call through senderized, tandem PBX from a CO/FX/WATS trunk Nortel Communication Server 1000 Circuit Card Reference NN43001-311 02.06 Standard 27 August 2008 Copyright © 2003-2008 Nortel Networks .
Operation 557 Figure 176 Two-way, loop DR, TIE trunk call states - incoming call through senderized, tandem PBX from a CO/FX/WATS trunk Note: If a ground start trunk, the outpulse towards the office occurs after ground detection. If a loop start trunk, the outpulse toward the office occurs one second later. For immediate start, following the seizure signal, the far-end may start pulsing after the standard delay (normally 65 ms, minimum).
NT8D14 Universal Trunk card For delay dial or wink start modes, stop/go signaling (off hook/on hook or battery/ground reversal) is returned by the Meridian 1 after receipt of the seizure signal. The delay dial (stop) signal begins immediately upon seizure and ends (go signal) 384 ms later. The wink start (stop) signal begins 384 ms after seizure and ends (go signal) 256 ms later. The far-end detecting the go signal may start pulsing after the standard delay (normally 55 ms, minimum).
Operation 559 The operation represented in Figure 180 "Two-way, loop DR, tie trunk call states - incoming call through a senderized, tandem PBX from a CO" (page 563) also applies to incoming calls on a DID trunk from a CO. Outgoing calls When DDL or WNK mode is used, outgoing calls require a stop/go signal from the far-end so that the near-end cannot outpulse until the far-end is ready to receive digits.
NT8D14 Universal Trunk card Figure 177 Two-way, loop DR, TIE trunk call states - outgoing call through far-end PBX to CO/FX/WATS Nortel Communication Server 1000 Circuit Card Reference NN43001-311 02.06 Standard 27 August 2008 Copyright © 2003-2008 Nortel Networks .
Operation 561 Figure 178 Two-way, loop DR, TIE trunk call states - incoming call through senderized, tandem PBX from a CO/FX/WATS trunk Nortel Communication Server 1000 Circuit Card Reference NN43001-311 02.06 Standard 27 August 2008 Copyright © 2003-2008 Nortel Networks .
NT8D14 Universal Trunk card Figure 179 Two-way, loop DR, TIE trunk call states - outgoing call through far-end PBX to CO/FX/WATS Note: Pseudo-answer supervision is provided by near-end at expiration of end-of-dial timer. Where no far-end answer supervision is provided, the party at the far-end hangs up after recognizing near-end call termination. Nortel Communication Server 1000 Circuit Card Reference NN43001-311 02.06 Standard 27 August 2008 Copyright © 2003-2008 Nortel Networks .
Operation Figure 180 Two-way, loop DR, tie trunk call states - incoming call through a senderized, tandem PBX from a CO Nortel Communication Server 1000 Circuit Card Reference NN43001-311 02.06 Standard 27 August 2008 Copyright © 2003-2008 Nortel Networks .
NT8D14 Universal Trunk card Figure 181 Two-way, loop DR, tie trunk call states - outgoing call through far-end PBX to CO Outgoing automatic, incoming dial operation Incoming calls When the NT8D14 Universal Trunk card is seized by the far-end on an incoming call, a low-resistance loop is placed across the tip and ring leads. Addressing is then sent by the far-end in the form of battery-ground or loop pulses, or DTMF tones. The trunk is released at the far-end when the loop is opened.
Operation 565 See Figure 182 "Two-way, loop OAID, TIE trunk call states - incoming call from far-end PBX" (page 566) and Figure 183 "Two-way, loop OAID, TIE trunk call connection sequence - incoming call from far-end PBX" (page 567). When the universal trunk card is seized by the far-end on an incoming call, a low-resistance loop is placed across the tip and ring leads. Addressing is then sent by the far-end in the form of battery-ground or loop pulses, or DTMF tones.
NT8D14 Universal Trunk card Figure 182 Two-way, loop OAID, TIE trunk call states - incoming call from far-end PBX When seized as a dial-selected outgoing trunk, the near-end places battery on the tip and ground on the ring. This alerts the far-end of the seizure. The far-end responds with a low resistance across the tip and ring leads.
Operation Figure 183 Two-way, loop OAID, TIE trunk call connection sequence - incoming call from far-end PBX Nortel Communication Server 1000 Circuit Card Reference NN43001-311 02.06 Standard 27 August 2008 Copyright © 2003-2008 Nortel Networks .
NT8D14 Universal Trunk card Figure 184 Two-way, loop OAID, TIE trunk call states - outgoing call to far-end PBX When seized as a dial-selected outgoing trunk, the near-end places the battery on the tip and ground on the ring. This alerts the far-end of the seizure. The far-end responds with a low resistance across the tip and ring leads.
Operation Figure 185 Two-way, loop OAID, TIE trunk call connection sequence - outgoing call to far-end PBX Nortel Communication Server 1000 Circuit Card Reference NN43001-311 02.06 Standard 27 August 2008 Copyright © 2003-2008 Nortel Networks .
NT8D14 Universal Trunk card Figure 186 Two-way, loop OAID, TIE trunk call states - incoming call from far-end PBX When seized as a dial-selected outgoing trunk, the Universal Trunk places battery on the tip and ground on the ring. This alerts the far end of the seizure. The far end responds with a low resistance across the tip and ring leads. Nortel Communication Server 1000 Circuit Card Reference NN43001-311 02.06 Standard 27 August 2008 Copyright © 2003-2008 Nortel Networks .
Operation Figure 187 Two-way, loop OAID, tie trunk call states - incoming call from far-end PBX Nortel Communication Server 1000 Circuit Card Reference NN43001-311 02.06 Standard 27 August 2008 Copyright © 2003-2008 Nortel Networks .
NT8D14 Universal Trunk card Figure 188 Two-way, loop OAID, TIE trunk call connection sequence - incoming call from far-end PBX Nortel Communication Server 1000 Circuit Card Reference NN43001-311 02.06 Standard 27 August 2008 Copyright © 2003-2008 Nortel Networks .
Operation Figure 189 Two-way, loop OAID, TIE trunk call states - outgoing call to far-end PBX Nortel Communication Server 1000 Circuit Card Reference NN43001-311 02.06 Standard 27 August 2008 Copyright © 2003-2008 Nortel Networks .
NT8D14 Universal Trunk card Figure 190 Two-way, loop OAID, TIE trunk call connection sequence - outgoing call to far-end PBX Nortel Communication Server 1000 Circuit Card Reference NN43001-311 02.06 Standard 27 August 2008 Copyright © 2003-2008 Nortel Networks .
Operation Figure 191 Two-way, loop OAID, tie trunk call states - incoming call from far-end PBX Nortel Communication Server 1000 Circuit Card Reference NN43001-311 02.06 Standard 27 August 2008 Copyright © 2003-2008 Nortel Networks .
NT8D14 Universal Trunk card Figure 192 Two-way, loop OAID, tie trunk call states - outgoing call to far-end PBX Nortel Communication Server 1000 Circuit Card Reference NN43001-311 02.06 Standard 27 August 2008 Copyright © 2003-2008 Nortel Networks .
Operation 577 Figure 193 Two-way, loop OAID, tie trunk call connection sequence - outgoing call to far-end PBX Recorded announcement trunk operation Note: Refer to “Multi-Channel RAN modes” (page 586) for information on Multi-Channel RAN modes, which are not linked to a RAN machine or a given trunk. When configured for Recorded Announcement (RAN) operation, a trunk unit is connected to a customer-provided recorded announcement machine. Announcement machines must be compatible with RAN trunks.
NT8D14 Universal Trunk card • • pulse start, level start, or continuous operation modes • connection of up to 24 trunk units to a single announcement machine channel selectable termination of tip and ring leads into 600 or 900 ohms for interface with a low-impedance (2 or 4 ohms) source Note: Refer to “Multi-Channel RAN modes” (page 586) for information on Multi-Channel RAN modes, which are not linked to a RAN machine or a given trunk.
Operation 579 control pulses every 7 or 14 seconds (at the start of the announcement period). A number of trunks can be connected to one announcement machine. The Universal Trunk Card does not support the Code-A-Phone 210DC announcement recorder. Recorded announcement machines Recorded announcement machines store prerecorded voice messages that are played back to the trunk units to which they are connected.
NT8D14 Universal Trunk card Figure 194 Connecting RAN equipment to the NT8D14 Universal Trunk Card (typical) Recorded announcement machines store prerecorded voice messages that are played back to the trunk units to which they are connected. Most commercially available announcement machines store recordings digitally, although some drum and tape units are still in service. An announcement machine can provide one or more channels and each channel can be prerecorded with a different message.
Operation 581 Figure 195 "Connecting RAN equipment to the NT8D14 Universal Trunk Card (typical)" (page 582) shows a typical connection from a single announcement machine channel to unit 0 on a universal trunk card installed in slot 0 in an NT8D37 IPE Module. See Communication Server 1000M and Meridian 1 Large System Installation and Configuration (NN43021-310) for trunk wiring information.
NT8D14 Universal Trunk card Figure 195 Connecting RAN equipment to the NT8D14 Universal Trunk Card (typical) RAN modes of operation Figure 196 "RAN control signals (Control GRD = IDLE)" (page 584) shows the relationship of control signals to message playback for the operating modes available in announcement machines. The signal names shown in Figure 196 "RAN control signals (Control GRD = IDLE)" (page 584) are typical.
Operation 583 Figure 197 "RAN control signals (Control GRD = IDLE)" (page 585) shows the relationship of control signals to message playback for the operating modes available in announcement machines. The signal names shown in the figure are typical. Figure 198 "RAN control signals (Control GRD = IDLE)" (page 586) shows the relationship of control signals to message playback for the operating modes available in announcement machines. The signal names shown in the figure are typical.
NT8D14 Universal Trunk card Figure 196 RAN control signals (Control GRD = IDLE) Nortel Communication Server 1000 Circuit Card Reference NN43001-311 02.06 Standard 27 August 2008 Copyright © 2003-2008 Nortel Networks .
Operation Figure 197 RAN control signals (Control GRD = IDLE) Nortel Communication Server 1000 Circuit Card Reference NN43001-311 02.06 Standard 27 August 2008 Copyright © 2003-2008 Nortel Networks .
NT8D14 Universal Trunk card Figure 198 RAN control signals (Control GRD = IDLE) Note 1: For continuous operation mode, connect the trunk unit MB line to the announcer B line only, and ground the announcer ST+ line. For pulse start or level start modes, connect the trunk unit MB line to the announcer ST+ line only, and leave the announcer B line unconnected. Note 2: A maximum of 24 universal trunk card units can be paralleled to a single announcer channel.
Operation 587 Multi-channel machine types - Continuous Mode Multi-Channel (MCON), Pulse Start/Stop Multi-Channel (MPUL) and Level Start/Stop Multi-Channel (MLVL) – are not linked to a RAN machine or a given trunk. All trunks belonging to the RAN route are considered independent. RAN trunks and RAN machine channels are connected one-to-one. If one RAN trunk is detected as faulty, then all other trunks are not impacted. For the RAN machine types, the maximum length of the recorded announcement is two hours.
NT8D14 Universal Trunk card Start/Control Mode." This mode enables provisioning of multiple RAN channels for a RAN route (playing the same message independently on demand) cross-connected one-to-one to each RAN trunk in a multi-channel level start RAN route. Do not bridge RAN trunks in a multi-channel RAN route.
Operation 589 Refer to “Programming RAN trunks” (page 591) and to Software Input/Output Reference — Administration (NN43001-611) for instructions on service change programs. Continuous operation mode In the continuous operation mode (sometimes called the Audichron mode), a message is constantly played, over and over again. Callers "barge in" on a playing message or receive a ringback tone until the message plays again. The start line (ST+) is hardwired as always active.
NT8D14 Universal Trunk card "RAN control signals (Control GRD = IDLE)" (page 586). At the end of each message, a pulse is issued on the "C" line that is used by the trunk unit to cut through to the waiting call. Note: The "B" (busy) signal line indicates availability of an announcement machine message to the trunk unit when configured for the continuous operation mode.
Operation 591 In the pulse start mode, a start pulse activates playback of a message that continues until completion. The announcement machine ignores all other start pulses that might occur until the message is complete. In the level start mode, the start signal is a "level" rather than a pulse. The leading edge of the start signal initiates message playback that continues until either the trailing edge of the start signal occurs or the end of the message is reached.
NT8D14 Universal Trunk card The Customer Data Block program defines the type of intercept and the trunk route to which the intercept is to be connected. Refer to Software Input/Output Reference — Administration (NN43001-611) for instructions on service change programs.The type of intercept and the RAN trunk parameters are defined in the Trunk Administration LD 14, Customer Data Block LD 15, and Trunk Route Administration LD 16 programs.
Electrical specifications 593 Table 207 Universal trunk card - trunk interface electrical characteristics Trunk Types Characteristic CO / FX / WATS DID / TIE RAN Paging Terminal impedance 600 or 900 ohms (Note 1) 600 or 900 ohms (Note 1) 600/900 ohms (Note 1) 600 ohms Balance impedance 600 or 900 ohms (Note 1), 3COM, or 3CM2 (Note 2) 600 or 900 ohms (Note 1), 3COM, or 3CM2 (Note 2) N/A N/A Supervision type Ground or loop start (Note 3) Loop start (with ans sup) (Note 3) Continuous, level
NT8D14 Universal Trunk card Table 207 Universal trunk card - trunk interface electrical characteristics (cont’d.) Trunk Types Characteristic CO / FX / WATS DID / TIE RAN Paging Line leakage Š 30k ohms, tip-to-ring, tip-to-ground, ring-to-ground Š 30k ohms, tip-to-ring, tip-to-ground, ring-to-ground N/A N/A AC induction rejection 10 V rms, tip-to-ring, tip-to-ground, ring-to-ground 10 V rms, tip-to-ring, tip-to-ground, ring-to-ground N/A N/A Note 1: Selected in software.
Electrical specifications 595 Table 208 Universal trunk card - trunk interface electrical characteristics (cont’d.
NT8D14 Universal Trunk card Table 209 NT8D14 Universal trunk card - trunk interface electrical characteristics (cont’d.) CO/FX/WATS trunks DID or tie trunks RAN trunks Paging trunks DC signaling loop length (max) 1700-ohms loop with near-end battery of –42.75 V 2450-ohms loop with near-end battery of –44 V 600/ 900-ohms loop 600 ohms loop Far-end battery –42 to –52.5 V (Note 4) –42 to –52.
Electrical specifications 597 Table 210 Universal Trunk Card electrical characteristics (cont’d.) Characteristic DID trunk CO trunk Signaling range 2450 ohms 1700 ohms Signaling type Loop start Ground or loop start Far end battery - 42 to - 52.5 V - 42 to - 52.5 V Near end battery N/A - 42.75 to - 52.
NT8D14 Universal Trunk card Table 212 Power requirements (cont’d.) Voltage Tolerance Current (max.) –15.0 V dc ±5% 306 mA +5.0 V dc ±5% 750 mA +8.5 V dc ±2% 450 mA –48.0 V dc ±5% 415 mA Power to the NT8D14 Universal Trunk Card is provided by the module power supply (ac or dc). Table 213 Power requirements for universal trunk card Voltage Tolerance Current (max.) +15.0 V dc ±5% 306 mA –15.0 V dc ±5% 306 mA +5.0 V dc ±5% 750 mA +8.5 V dc ±2% 450 mA –48.
Electrical specifications Environmental specifications Table 215 "Environmental specifications for the NT8D14 Universal Trunk card" (page 599) lists the environmental specifications for the NT8D14 Universal Trunk card.
NT8D14 Universal Trunk card Table 218 Environmental specifications (cont’d.) Parameter Specifications Operating humidity 5 to 95% RH (non-condensing) Storage temperature - 40 to + 70 degrees C Release control Release control establishes which end of a call (near, far, either, joint, or originating) disconnects the call. Only incoming trunks in idle ground start configuration can provide disconnect supervision.
Electrical specifications 601 Table 219 Insertion Loss from IPE Ports to IPE Ports (measured in dB) The transmission properties of each trunk are characterized by the class-of-service (COS) you assign in the Trunk Data Block (LD 14). Transmission properties may be via net loss (VNL) or non via net loss (non-VNL).
NT8D14 Universal Trunk card In Option 11C systems, the insertion loss from IPE ports to IPE ports is as follows. Table 220 Insertion Loss from IPE Ports to IPE Ports (measured in dB) Connector pin assignments The universal trunk card connects the eight analog trunks to the backplane through a 160-pin connector shroud. Telephone trunks connect to the universal trunk card at the back of the Media Gateway using a 25-pin connector.
Connector pin assignments 603 Table 221 Universal trunk card - backplane pinouts (cont’d.
NT8D14 Universal Trunk card Table 222 Universal trunk card - backplane pinouts Signal Signal Trunk Number Backplane Pin RAN mode Paging mode Other modes Back-pl ane Pin RAN mode Paging mode Other modes 0 12A Tip Tip Tip 12B Ring Ring Ring 13A CP A N/A 13B MB RG N/A 14A Tip Tip Tip 14B Ring Ring Ring 15A CP A N/A 15B MB RG N/A 16A Tip Tip Tip 16B Ring Ring Ring 17A CP A N/A 17B MB RG N/A 18A Tip Tip Tip 18B Ring Ring Ring 19A CP A N
Connector pin assignments 605 Table 223 Universal trunk card - backplane pinouts (cont’d.
NT8D14 Universal Trunk card Figure 199 Universal trunk card - typical cross connect example Configuration The trunk type for each unit on the card as well as its terminating impedance and balance network configuration is selected by software service change entries at the system terminal and by jumper strap settings on the card. NT8D14 has a reduced jumper strap setting on the card. There are only three jumpers, J1.X, J2.X, and J3.X on each channel.
Configuration 607 NT8D14BB, NT8D14BB)" (page 608), and Table 226 "Trunk types termination impedance and balance network (NT8D14BA, NT8D14BB)" (page 608) show the functionality of these three jumpers. Table 224 Jumper strap settings - factory standard (NT8D14BA, NT8D14BB) Jumper strap settings (Note 1) J1.X J2.X J3.X J4.X (Note 2) Trunk types Loop length CO/FX/WATS 0–1524 m (5000 ft.
NT8D14 Universal Trunk card Table 225 Jumper strap settings - extended range (NT8D14BA, NT8D14BB, NT8D14BB) Jumper strap settings (Note 1) J1.X J2.X J4.X (Note 2) Trunk types Loop length J3.X CO/FX/WATS > 1524 m (5000 ft.) Off Off 1–2 2–3 DID > 600 ohms On On 1–2 2–3 RAN: pulse start or level start modes Not applicable: RAN trunks should not leave the building. Off Off 2–3 1–2 2-way TIE (LDR) 2-way TIE (OAID) Note 1: Jumper strap settings J1.X, J2.X, J3.X, and J4.
Configuration 609 Table 226 Trunk types - termination impedance and balance network (NT8D14BA, NT8D14BB) (cont’d.
NT8D14 Universal Trunk card The jumper strap settings must be changed, as shown in Table 225 "Jumper strap settings - extended range (NT8D14BA, NT8D14BB, NT8D14BB)" (page 608), for the following: • • • For CO/FX/WATS or TIE trunk loops exceeding 1524 meters (5000 ft.
Configuration 611 Figure 200 Universal trunk card - jumper locations for NT8D14BA and NT8D14BB Release 9 and below For most applications, the jumper strap settings remain set to the standard configuration as shipped from the factory. See Table 229 "Jumper strap settings - factory standard (NT8D14BA, NT8D14BB)" (page 614). For CO/FX/WATS or tie trunk loops exceeding 1524 meters (5000 ft.
NT8D14 Universal Trunk card Figure 202 "Universal trunk card - jumper locations for NT8D14BA and NT8D14BB Release 9 and below" (page 619) shows jumper locations on the universal trunk card (vintage BA). Service change entries The trunk type, terminating impedance, and balance network are selected by making service change entries in the Trunk Administration program LD 14.
Configuration 613 Table 227 Trunk types - termination impedance and balance network (NT8D14BA, NT8D14BB) (cont’d.
NT8D14 Universal Trunk card Table 229 Jumper strap settings - factory standard (NT8D14BA, NT8D14BB) Jumper strap settings (Note 1) J1.X J2.X J3.X J4.X (Note 2) Trunk types Loop length CO/FX/WATS 0–1524m (5000ft.) Off Off 1–2 1–2 DID 0–600 ohms Off Off 1–2 1–2 RAN: continuous operation mode Not applicable: RAN and paging trunks should not leave the building. Off Off 1–2 1–2 2-way TIE (LDR) 2-way TIE (OAID) Paging Note 1: Jumper strap settings J1.X, J2.X, J3.X, and J4.
Configuration 615 Table 230 Jumper strap settings - extended range (NT8D14BA, NT8D14BB, NT8D14BB Release 10 and up) Jumper strap settings (Note 1) J1.X J2.X J4.X (Note 2) Trunk types Loop length J3.X CO/FX/WATS >1524m(5000ft) Off Off 1–2 2–3 DID > 600 ohms On On 1–2 2–3 RAN: pulse start or level start modes Not applicable: RAN trunks should not leave the building. Off Off 2–3 1–2 2-way TIE (LDR) 2-way TIE (OAID) Note 1: Jumper strap settings J1.X, J2.X, J3.X, and J4.
NT8D14 Universal Trunk card Table 231 Trunk types - termination impedance and balance network (NT8D14BA, NT8D14BB) (cont’d.
Configuration 617 The trunk type, terminating impedance, and balance network are selected by making service change entries in the Trunk Administration program LD 14. See Table 231 "Trunk types - termination impedance and balance network (NT8D14BA, NT8D14BB)" (page 615) for the proper values for the trunk type and loop length. Refer to Software Input/Output Reference — Administration (NN43001-611) for LD 14 service change instructions.
NT8D14 Universal Trunk card Figure 201 Universal trunk card - jumper locations for NT8D14BB Release 10 and higher Nortel Communication Server 1000 Circuit Card Reference NN43001-311 02.06 Standard 27 August 2008 Copyright © 2003-2008 Nortel Networks .
Configuration Figure 202 Universal trunk card - jumper locations for NT8D14BA and NT8D14BB Release 9 and below Nortel Communication Server 1000 Circuit Card Reference NN43001-311 02.06 Standard 27 August 2008 Copyright © 2003-2008 Nortel Networks .
NT8D14 Universal Trunk card Table 233 Jumper strap settings - factory standard (NT8D14BA, NT8D14BB) Jumper strap settings (Note 1) Loop length J1.X J2.X J3.X J4.X (Note 2) 0–1524 m (5000 ft.) Off Off 1–2 1–2 DID 0–600 ohms Off Off 1–2 1–2 RAN: continuous operation mode Not applicable: RAN and paging trunks should not leave the building. Off Off 1–2 1–2 Trunk types CO/FX/WATS 2-way tie (LDR) 2-way tie (OAID) Paging Note 1: Jumper strap settings J1.X, J2.X, J3.X, and J4.
Configuration 621 Table 234 Jumper strap settings - extended range (NT8D14BA, NT8D14BB, NT8D14BB Release 10 and later) Jumper strap settings (Note 1) Loop length J1.X J2.X J3.X J4.X (Note 2) > 1524 m (5000 ft) Off Off 1–2 2–3 DID > 600 ohms On On 1–2 2–3 RAN: pulse start or level start modes Not applicable: RAN trunks should not leave the building. Off Off 2–3 1–2 Trunk types CO/FX/WATS 2-way tie (LDR) 2-way tie (OAID) Note 1: Jumper strap settings J1.X, J2.X, J3.X, and J4.
NT8D14 Universal Trunk card Table 235 Trunk types - termination impedance and balance network (NT8D14BA, NT8D14BB) (cont’d.
Configuration 623 The VNL class of service is assigned at the prompt CLS with the response VNL. The non-VNL class of service is assigned at prompt CLS by selecting either the Transmission Compensated (TRC) or Non-Transmission Compensated (NTC) response. Non-VNL trunks are assigned a TRC or NTC class of service to ensure stability and minimize echo when connecting to long-haul trunks, such as Tie trunks. The class of service determines the operation of the switchable pads contained in each unit.
NT8D14 Universal Trunk card • TRC for a 2-wire non-VNL trunk facility with a loss of greater than 2 dB, or for which impedance compensation is provided, or for a 4-wire non-VNL facility. • NTC for a 2-wire, non-VNL trunk facility with a loss of less than 2 dB, or when impedance compensation is not provided.
Configuration 625 The VNL class of service is assigned at the prompt CLS with the response VNL. The non-VNL class of service is assigned at prompt CLS by selecting either the Transmission Compensated (TRC) or Non-Transmission Compensated (NTC) response. Non-VNL trunks are assigned a TRC or NTC class of service to ensure stability and minimize echo when connecting to long-haul trunks, such as TIE trunks. The class of service determines the operation of the switchable pads contained in each unit.
NT8D14 Universal Trunk card Table 238 Pad switching algorithm (cont’d.) Port B pads Universal Trunk Pads Port-to-port loss (dB) Universal trunk card to Port B Transmit D to A Receive A to D Transmi D to A Receive A to D Port B to Universal trunk card PE CO/FX/WATS (TRC) Out Out In In 1 1 PE TIE Out Out In In 0.5 0.5 Port B Note 1: Transmit and receive designations are from and to the Meridian 1.
Applications 627 • TRC for a 2-wire non-VNL trunk facility with a loss of greater than 2 dB, or for which impedance compensation is provided, or for a 4-wire non-VNL facility. • NTC for a 2-wire, non-VNL trunk facility with a loss of less than 2 dB, or when impedance compensation is not provided.
NT8D14 Universal Trunk card Figure 204 "Connecting paging equipment to the NT8D14 Universal Trunk card (typical)" (page 628) shows a typical connection from customer-provided equipment to unit 0 on a universal trunk card that can be installed in slots 1, 2, and 3 in a Media Gateway and slots 7, 8, 9, and 10 in a Media Gateway Expansion. See Communication Server 1000M and Meridian 1 Large System Installation and Configuration (NN43021-310) for trunk wiring information.
Applications 629 In the Paging mode, the Universal Trunk is connected to a customer-provided paging amplifier system. When the trunk is accessed by dial-up or attendant key operation, it provides a loop closure across control leads A and B. In a typical application, it transfers the input of the paging amplifier system to the transmission path of the trunk. A universal trunk card unit can be configured as a paging trunk.
NT8D14 Universal Trunk card Figure 205 Connecting paging equipment to the NT8D14 Universal Trunk Card (typical) If the music source is equipped with contacts that close when music is online, use these contacts to provide a ground to the MB line; otherwise, ground the MB line at the MDF.A trunk unit can be connected to a music source. The audio source should provide an adjustable power output at 600 ohms.
Applications 631 Figure 206 Connecting paging equipment to the NT8D14 Universal Trunk Card (typical) If the music source is equipped with contacts that close when music is online, use these contacts to provide a ground to the MB line; otherwise, ground the MB line at the MDF. A trunk unit can be connected to a music source. The audio source should provide an adjustable power output at 600 ohms.
NT8D14 Universal Trunk card Nortel Communication Server 1000 Circuit Card Reference NN43001-311 02.06 Standard 27 August 2008 Copyright © 2003-2008 Nortel Networks .
. NT8D15 E and M Trunk card Contents This section contains information on the following topics: “Introduction” (page 633) “Physical description” (page 637) “Functional description” (page 641) “Operation” (page 665) “Electrical specifications” (page 691) “Connector pin assignments” (page 696) “Configuration” (page 702) “Applications” (page 713) Introduction The NT8D15 E and M Trunk card interfaces four analog telephone trunks to the switch.
NT8D15 E and M Trunk card • • • • 2-wire E and M Type I signaling trunks two-wire dial repeating trunks two or four wire tie trunks 4-wire E and M Trunks: — Type I or Type II signaling — duplex (DX) signaling • paging (PAG) trunks Type I signaling uses two signaling wires plus ground. Type II and DX signaling uses two pairs of signaling wires. Most electronic switching systems use Type II signaling.
Introduction 635 — Type I or Type II signaling — Duplex (DX) signaling • Paging (PAG) trunks Type I signaling utilizes two signaling wires plus ground. Type II and DX signaling utilizes two pairs of signaling wires. Most electronic switching systems use Type II signaling. Table 241 "Trunk and signaling matrix" (page 635) lists the signaling and trunk types supported by the E and M Trunk card.
NT8D15 E and M Trunk card Type I signaling uses two signaling wires plus ground. Type II and DX signaling uses two pairs of signaling wires. Most electronic switching systems use Type II signaling. Table 241 "Trunk and signaling matrix" (page 635) lists the signaling and trunk types supported by the NT8D15 E and M Trunk card.
Physical description 637 Table 243 "Supported trunk and signaling matrix" (page 637) shows a matrix of the trunk types and signaling supported by the NT8D15 E and M Trunk Card. Table 243 Supported trunk and signaling matrix Signaling RLM RLR ATV TIE PAG CSA CAA CAM 2-wire E and M yes yes yes yes yes 4-wire E and M yes yes yes yes yes Physical description The line interface and common multiplexing circuitry is mounted on a 31.75 cm by 25.40 cm (12.5 in. by 10 in.) printed circuit board.
NT8D15 E and M Trunk card maintenance programs. The card faceplate Light-Emitting Diode (LED) is lit while the self test is performed. If the self test passes, the faceplate LED flashes three times and stays lit until the card is enabled in software. If the test fails, the LED stays lit (does not flash). The E and M Trunk card mounts in any IPE slot. The line interface and common multiplexing circuitry is mounted on a 31.75 cm by 25.40 cm (12.5 in. by 10 in.) printed circuit board.
Physical description 639 Figure 207 E and M Trunk card - faceplate The E and M Trunk card mounts in slots 1, 2, 3, and 4 of the Media Gateway and slots 7, 8, 9, and 10 of the Media Gateway Expansion. The line interface and common multiplexing circuitry is mounted on a 31.75 cm by 25.40 cm (12.5 in. by 10 in.) printed circuit board. The E and M Trunk card connects to the backplane through a 160-pin connector shroud.
NT8D15 E and M Trunk card using a wiring plan similar to that used for line cards. See Communication Server 1000M and Meridian 1 Large System Installation and Configuration (NN43021-310) for termination and cross connect information. Figure 207 "E and M Trunk card - faceplate" (page 639) illustrates the faceplate of the E and M Trunk card. The words "Dict Trk" appear on the faceplate label because earlier versions of this card provided dictation trunk connections for third-party equipment.
Functional description 641 Figure 208 E and M Trunk card - faceplate Functional description The NT8D15 E and M Trunk card serves various transmission requirements. The trunk circuits on the card can operate in either A-Law or µ-Law companding modes. The mode of operation is set by service change entries. Nortel Communication Server 1000 Circuit Card Reference NN43001-311 02.06 Standard 27 August 2008 Copyright © 2003-2008 Nortel Networks .
NT8D15 E and M Trunk card Figure 209 "E and M Trunk card - block diagram" (page 643) shows a block diagram of the major functions contained on the E and M Trunk card. Each of these functions is discussed on the following pages. The NT8D15 E and M Trunk Card serves various transmission requirements. The trunk circuits on the card can operate in either A or µ-Law companding modes. The mode of operation is set by service change entries.
Functional description 643 Figure 209 E and M Trunk card - block diagram • Provides indication of card status from self-test diagnostics on faceplate Light Emitting Diode (LED). • • Supports loopback of PCM signals to DS30X for diagnostic purposes. Card ID provided for auto configuration and determining serial number and firmware level of card. Nortel Communication Server 1000 Circuit Card Reference NN43001-311 02.06 Standard 27 August 2008 Copyright © 2003-2008 Nortel Networks .
NT8D15 E and M Trunk card Figure 210 E and M Trunk card - block diagram • Software controlled terminating impedance (600, 900, or 1200 ohm) two and four-wire modes. • • Allows trunk type to be configured on a per port basis in software. Software controlled 600 ohm balance impedance is provided. Nortel Communication Server 1000 Circuit Card Reference NN43001-311 02.06 Standard 27 August 2008 Copyright © 2003-2008 Nortel Networks .
Functional description 645 Figure 211 E and M Trunk card - block diagram • • • Isolation of foreign potentials from transmission and signaling circuit. Software control of A/µ-Law mode. Software control of digit collection.
NT8D15 E and M Trunk card • Ability to enable and disable individual ports or the entire card under software control • Provides outpulsing on the card. Make break ratios are defined in software and down loaded at power up and by software commands.
Functional description 647 • • • provide 600-ohms termination impedance (4-wire configuration) • provide isolation of foreign potentials from transmission and signaling circuit • • provide software control of A-Law and µ-Law modes provide pad control for 2-wire and 4-wire facility connections enable trunk type and function to be configured on a per-port basis in software support loopback of pulse code modulation (PCM) signals to DS-30X for diagnostic purposes The E and M Trunk card passes voice an
NT8D15 E and M Trunk card • • provide software control of A-Law and µ-Law modes support loopback of pulse code modulation (PCM) signals to DS-30X for diagnostic purposes The E and M Trunk card passes voice and signaling data over DS-30X loops and maintenance data over the card LAN link. The E and M Trunk card contains four identical and independently configurable trunk interface units (also referred to as circuits).
Functional description 649 — Near-end seizure and outpulsing with M lead — Ground detection with E lead — Voice transmission through Tip and Ring for transmit and receive • Four-wire E and M signaling type I and II, two-way dial repeating (ESN and Non-ESN) — echo suppression for type I — Switchable seven dB and 16 dB for carrier interface for ESN applications — Transmit and receive of voice through two separate paths • Type I signaling through E and M leads — Type II signaling – Near-end seizure wi
NT8D15 E and M Trunk card • • 4-wire, DX signaling (see Figure 214 "4-wire DX signaling" (page 652)) paging trunk operation (see Figure 215 "Paging trunk operation" (page 653)) with support access by low-resistance path at the PG/A1 leads Note: Paging end-to-end signaling is not supported.
Functional description • 651 2-wire, E and M Type I signaling (see Figure 216 "E and M Type I signaling" (page 654)) with: — near-end seizure and outpulsing with M lead — ground detection with E lead — voice transmission through tip and ring for transmit and receive • 4-wire, E and M Type I and II signaling (see Figure 217 "E and M Type II signaling" (page 655)), 2-way dial repeating with: — echo suppression for Type I signaling — switchable 7 dB and 16 dB pads for carrier interface — voice transmiss
NT8D15 E and M Trunk card Figure 214 4-wire DX signaling Nortel Communication Server 1000 Circuit Card Reference NN43001-311 02.06 Standard 27 August 2008 Copyright © 2003-2008 Nortel Networks .
Functional description 653 Figure 215 Paging trunk operation — Type I signaling through E and M leads — Type II signaling with near-end seizure by SB/M leads and far-end detection by E/SG leads • • 4-wire, DX signaling (see Figure 218 "4-wire DX signaling" (page 656)) paging trunk operation (see Figure 219 "Paging trunk operation" (page 657)) with: — support access by low-resistance path at the PG/A1 leads — paging end-to-end signaling not supported The functions provided by each unit on the E and M T
NT8D15 E and M Trunk card Figure 216 E and M Type I signaling — near-end seizure and outpulsing with M lead — ground detection with E lead — voice transmission through tip and ring for transmit and receive • 4-wire, E and M Type I and II signaling, 2-way dial repeating with: — echo suppression for Type I signaling — switchable 7 dB and 16 dB pads for carrier interface — voice transmission and reception through two separate paths — Type I signaling through E and M leads — Type II signaling with nea
Functional description Figure 217 E and M Type II signaling Nortel Communication Server 1000 Circuit Card Reference NN43001-311 02.06 Standard 27 August 2008 Copyright © 2003-2008 Nortel Networks .
NT8D15 E and M Trunk card Figure 218 4-wire DX signaling Nortel Communication Server 1000 Circuit Card Reference NN43001-311 02.06 Standard 27 August 2008 Copyright © 2003-2008 Nortel Networks .
Functional description Figure 219 Paging trunk operation Figure 220 E and M Type I signaling Nortel Communication Server 1000 Circuit Card Reference NN43001-311 02.06 Standard 27 August 2008 Copyright © 2003-2008 Nortel Networks .
NT8D15 E and M Trunk card Figure 221 4-wire DX signaling Nortel Communication Server 1000 Circuit Card Reference NN43001-311 02.06 Standard 27 August 2008 Copyright © 2003-2008 Nortel Networks .
Functional description 659 Figure 222 Paging trunk operation Card control functions Control functions are provided by a microcontroller, a card LAN, and signaling and control circuits on the E and M Trunk card. Control functions are provided by a microcontroller, a card LAN, and signaling and control circuits on the E and M Trunk card. Control functions are provided by a microcontroller, a card LAN, and signaling and control circuits on the E and M Trunk card.
NT8D15 E and M Trunk card E and M Trunk card contains a microcontroller that controls the internal operation of the card and the serial communication link to the NT8D01 Controller Card. The microcontroller provides the following functions: • • • • • card-identification self-test control of card operation status report to the controller maintenance diagnostics The E and M Trunk card contains a microcontroller that controls the internal operation of the card.
Functional description 661 The card LAN provides a serial communication link for transferring maintenance data and control signals between the trunk card and the SSC card. The card LAN controls the microcontroller. The following functions are supported: • • • providing card ID/RLS reporting self-test status enabling/disabling of the DS-30X link The Card Lan interface supports maintenance functions.
NT8D15 E and M Trunk card Signaling and control The signaling and control portion of the E and M Trunk card works with the system CPU to operate the card hardware. The card receives messages from the CPU over a signaling channel in the DS-30X loop and returns status information to the CPU over the same channel. The signaling and control portion of the card provides analog loop terminations that establish, supervise, and take down call connections.
Functional description 663 the four units to configure trunk and signaling type. The remaining three messages are sent per card to select the make/break ratio and the A-Law and µ-Law modes.
NT8D15 E and M Trunk card — transmit PCM signals from each of the four units to one DS-30X timeslot in A10 format (ready to send/clear to send—flow control, handshake format) — transmit and receive signaling messages over a DS-30X signaling channel in A10 format • decode received messages to set configuration and activate/deactivate interface relays for PCM loopback diagnostic purposes • decode outpulsing messages (one per digit) from the CPU to drive outpulsing relays at 20 pps, 10 pps1 (primary
Operation 665 Maintenance features The following features are provided for maintenance of the E and M trunk: • • • • indication of card status from self-test software enable and disable capability for individual units or entire card loopback of PCM signals to DS-30X for diagnostic purposes card ID for autoconfiguration and determination of serial number and firmware level The following features are provided for maintenance of the E and M Trunk: • • • • indication of card status from self-test softwar
NT8D15 E and M Trunk card Signaling and call control The information in this section describes the signaling and call control of E and M Type I and II trunks. The call is terminated and the trunk released by a disconnect message sent to the associated unit. Figure 223 "Signaling orientation for tandem connection between E and M and CO trunks" (page 666) shows the trunk signaling orientation for a tandem connection between E and M and CO trunks.
Operation 667 Figure 227 "E and M Type I signaling patterns - originating party release" (page 671) shows E and M Type I signaling patterns for incoming and outgoing calls. Figure 228 "E and M Type I signaling patterns - originating party release on a tandem connection" (page 672) shows Type I signaling patterns on a tandem connection where the originating end is senderized and the route is over a CO/FX/WATS trunk (not applicable to CCSA).
NT8D15 E and M Trunk card Figure 224 E and M Type I signaling patterns - originating party release Nortel Communication Server 1000 Circuit Card Reference NN43001-311 02.06 Standard 27 August 2008 Copyright © 2003-2008 Nortel Networks .
Operation 669 Figure 225 E and M Type I signaling patterns - originating party release on a tandem connection — If answer supervision is provided by the far end, there is a change from open to ground on the E lead (ground detection). Outgoing calls are processed as follows: • The M lead changes from ground to battery. — If answer supervision is provided by the far-end, there is a change from open to ground on the E lead (ground detection).
NT8D15 E and M Trunk card Figure 226 Signaling orientation for tandem connection between E and M and CO trunks Outgoing calls are processed as follows: • The M lead changes from ground to battery. — If answer supervision is provided by the far end, there is a change from open to ground on the E lead (ground detection). Nortel Communication Server 1000 Circuit Card Reference NN43001-311 02.06 Standard 27 August 2008 Copyright © 2003-2008 Nortel Networks .
Operation Figure 227 E and M Type I signaling patterns - originating party release Nortel Communication Server 1000 Circuit Card Reference NN43001-311 02.06 Standard 27 August 2008 Copyright © 2003-2008 Nortel Networks .
NT8D15 E and M Trunk card Figure 228 E and M Type I signaling patterns - originating party release on a tandem connection Nortel Communication Server 1000 Circuit Card Reference NN43001-311 02.06 Standard 27 August 2008 Copyright © 2003-2008 Nortel Networks .
Operation 673 Incoming calls The far-end initiates calls as follows: • • The ground is placed on the E lead in E and M signaling. • If the far-end is equipped for sending, the system can operate in any mode (immediate start, delay dial, or wink start), as assigned on a start arrangement basis. See Table 244 "Operation Mode" (page 673). Dial pulses are subsequently applied from the far-end as ground open on the E lead. — In immediate start mode, there is no start signal from the called office.
NT8D15 E and M Trunk card the far-end may start pulsing after the standard delay (normally 70 ms minimum). — In delay dial mode, a 256–384 ms off hook/on hook signal is returned to the far-end immediately after receipt of the seizure signal. When the far-end detects the on hook state of the signal (the start signal), the far-end may start pulsing after the standard delay (normally 70 ms minimum).
Operation 675 Table 246 Operation Mode Operation mode Start arrangement Immediate start IMM Delay dial DDL Wink start WNK E and M Type II signaling Figure 229 "E and M Type II signaling patterns - originating party release" (page 677) shows E and M Type II signaling patterns for incoming and outgoing calls.
NT8D15 E and M Trunk card These can be specified for the Meridian 1 end (near-end), or for the CO or other PBX end (far-end). Joint party control can also be specified for the far-end. Release control of a call made over a trunk is specified in LD 16. Disconnect supervision is specified for each trunk group independently. The two options available are EITHER or ORIGINATING party control. These can be specified for the CS 1000 end (near-end), or for the CO or other PBX end (far-end).
Operation Figure 229 E and M Type II signaling patterns - originating party release Nortel Communication Server 1000 Circuit Card Reference NN43001-311 02.06 Standard 27 August 2008 Copyright © 2003-2008 Nortel Networks .
NT8D15 E and M Trunk card Figure 230 E and M Type II signaling patterns - originating party release on a tandem connection Duplex signaling Duplex (DX) signaling makes use of the voice transmission leads for signaling as well as for voice transmission. Nortel Communication Server 1000 Circuit Card Reference NN43001-311 02.06 Standard 27 August 2008 Copyright © 2003-2008 Nortel Networks .
Operation 679 For descriptive purposes, the lead pair Tip B/Ring B is designated the signaling pair. The other pair Tip A/Ring A conducts current in the opposite direction to balance the overall current flow between the near and far ends. During signaling, current flows through both Tip B and Ring B leads in the same direction.
NT8D15 E and M Trunk card Table 248 DX signaling - incoming calls with originating party release (cont’d.
Operation 681 Table 250 DX signaling - incoming calls with originating party release on tandem connections (cont’d.
NT8D15 E and M Trunk card Table 251 DX signaling - outgoing calls with originating party release Condition Current in signaling lead State of trunk detector Idle No current flow High Seizure (dial tone from far-end: far-end ready for digits) Current flow High Digits Current flow interrupted for each pulse High Far-end answers No current flow Low Far-end on hook first Current flow High Network taken down and trunk idled when near-end goes on hook No current flow High Near-end on ho
Operation 683 Table 253 DX signaling - outgoing calls with originating party release on tandem connections (cont’d.
NT8D15 E and M Trunk card Table 254 DX signaling - incoming calls with originating party release on tandem connections (cont’d.
Operation Figure 232 E and M type signaling patterns - originating party release Nortel Communication Server 1000 Circuit Card Reference NN43001-311 02.06 Standard 27 August 2008 Copyright © 2003-2008 Nortel Networks .
NT8D15 E and M Trunk card Figure 233 E and M Type I signaling patterns - originating party release on a tandem connection Nortel Communication Server 1000 Circuit Card Reference NN43001-311 02.06 Standard 27 August 2008 Copyright © 2003-2008 Nortel Networks .
Operation Figure 234 E and M Type II signaling patterns - originating party release Nortel Communication Server 1000 Circuit Card Reference NN43001-311 02.06 Standard 27 August 2008 Copyright © 2003-2008 Nortel Networks .
NT8D15 E and M Trunk card Figure 235 E and M Type II signaling patterns - originating party release on a tandem connection Table 251 "DX signaling - outgoing calls with originating party release" (page 682) and Table 252 "DX signaling - incoming calls with originating party release" (page 682) show call-connection and take-down sequencing for DX signaling.
Operation 689 Table 255 DX signaling - outgoing calls with originating party release Condition Current in signaling lead State of trunk detector Idle No current flow High Seizure (dial tone from far-end: far-end ready for digits) Current flow High Digits Current flow interrupted for each pulse High Far-end answers No current flow Low Far-end on hook first Current flow High Network taken down and trunk idled when near-end goes on hook No current flow High Near-end on hook first, networ
NT8D15 E and M Trunk card Table 257 DX signaling - outgoing calls with originating party release on tandem connections (cont’d.
Electrical specifications 691 Table 258 DX signaling - incoming calls with originating party release on tandem connections (cont’d.) Current in signaling lead State of trunk detector If no-answer supervision is enabled, CO end disconnects Current flow Low Originating end disconnects – network torn down and trunk idled No current flow High Condition Note: * – CO ground start: the trunk is idled and the network taken down, but the incoming tie trunk is controlled by the originating end.
NT8D15 E and M Trunk card Table 260 Electrical characteristics of trunk cards Characteristic DID Trunk CO trunk Nominal impedance 600 or 900 ohms, (selected by software) 600 or 900 ohms, (selected by software) Signaling range 2450 ohms 1700 ohms Signaling type Loop Ground or loop start Far-end battery -42 to -52.5 V -42 to -52.5 V Near-end battery N/A -42.75 to -52.
Electrical specifications 693 Table 261 "Electrical characteristics" (page 692) lists the electrical characteristics of the trunk interface on the E and M Trunk card. Table 262 Electrical characteristics of the E and M Trunk interface Characteristic 4-wire trunk 2-wire trunk Signaling range Type I 150 ohms Type II 300 ohms loop Type I 150 ohms Signaling type Type I, Type II Type I Far-end battery –42 to –52.5 V dc –42 to –52.5 V dc –42.75 to –52.5 V dc –42.75 to –52.
NT8D15 E and M Trunk card Table 264 Power requirements (cont’d.) Voltage Tolerance Max current +8.5 V dc ±2% 200 mA –48.0 V dc ±5 % 415 mA Table 264 "Power requirements" (page 693) lists the power requirements for the E and M Trunk card. Table 265 Power requirements Voltage Tolerance Max current +15.0 V dc ±5% 200 mA –15.0 V dc ±5% 200 mA +8.5 V dc ±2% 200 mA –48.
Electrical specifications Table 268 "Environmental specifications" (page 695) provides the environmental specifications for the E and M Trunk card.
NT8D15 E and M Trunk card Connector pin assignments The E and M Trunk card brings the four analog trunks to the backplane through a 160-pin connector shroud.The backplane is cabled to the I/O panel on the rear of the module, which is then connected to the Main Distribution Frame (MDF) by 25-pair cables. Telephone trunks connect to the E and M Trunk card at the MDF using a wiring plan similar to that used for line cards.
Connector pin assignments 697 Table 272 E and M Trunk card - backplane pinouts for 4-wire modes (cont’d.
NT8D15 E and M Trunk card Figure 236 E and M Trunk card - typical cross connection example A typical connection example is shown in Figure 237 "E and M Trunk card - typical cross connection example" (page 700); a list of the connections to the E and M Trunk card in the various 2-wire modes is shown in Table 273 "E and M Trunk card - backplane pinouts for 2-wire modes" (page 699); and a list of the connections to the E and M Trunk card in the various 4-wire modes is shown in Table 274 "E and M Trunk c
Connector pin assignments 699 Table 273 E and M Trunk card - backplane pinouts for 2-wire modes 2-wire Paging Mode 2-wire Type I Mode Trunk Number Pin Signal Pin Signal Pin Signal Pin Signal 0 12B Tip 12A Ring 12B Tip 12A Ring 15B A 15A PG 14B E 14A M 16B Tip 16A Ring 16B Tip 16A Ring 19B A 19A PG 18B E 18A M 62B Tip 62A Ring 62B Tip 62A Ring 65B A 65A PG 64B E 64A M 66B Tip 66A Ring 66B Tip 66A Ring 69B A 69A PG 48B E 68A M 1 2 3
NT8D15 E and M Trunk card A typical connection example is shown in Figure 237 "E and M Trunk card - typical cross connection example" (page 700). A list of the connections to the E and M Trunk card in the various 2-wire modes is shown in Table 273 "E and M Trunk card - backplane pinouts for 2-wire modes" (page 699). A list of the connections to the E and M Trunk card in the various 4-wire modes is shown in Table 274 "E and M Trunk card - backplane pinouts for 4-wire modes" (page 699).
Connector pin assignments 701 Figure 238 E and M Trunk card - typical cross connection example Table 275 E and M Trunk card - backplane pinouts for 2-wire modes 2-wire Paging Mode 2-wire Type I Mode Trunk Number Pin Signal Pin Signal Pin Signal Pin Signal 0 12B Tip 12A Ring 12B Tip 12A Ring 15B A 15A PG 14B E 14A M 16B Tip 16A Ring 16B Tip 16A Ring 19B A 19A PG 18B E 18A M 62B Tip 62A Ring 62B Tip 62A Ring 65B A 65A PG 64B E 64A M 1 2 Nortel Com
NT8D15 E and M Trunk card Table 275 E and M Trunk card - backplane pinouts for 2-wire modes (cont’d.
Configuration 703 Each of the four trunk circuits on the E and M trunk card can be individually configured for trunk type, companding mode, and port-to-port loss compensation. Configuring the card requires both jumper changes and configuration software service entries. The locations of the jumpers are shown in Figure 239 "E and M Trunk card - jumper locations" (page 704).
NT8D15 E and M Trunk card Figure 239 E and M Trunk card - jumper locations Nortel Communication Server 1000 Circuit Card Reference NN43001-311 02.06 Standard 27 August 2008 Copyright © 2003-2008 Nortel Networks .
Configuration 705 Table 277 E and M Trunk card - jumper strap settings Mode of operation (Note 2) 2-wire trunk 4-wire trunk DX tip & ring pair Jumper (Note 1) Type I Paging Type I Type II M—rcv E—xmt E—rcv M—xmt J1.X Off Off Off Off Pins 1–2 Pins 2–3 J2.X On On (Note 3) On On Off Off J3.X Off Off Off Off (Note 4) (Note 4) J4.X Off Off Off Off Pins 2–3 Pins 1–2 J5.X Off Off Off Off (Note 4) (Note 4) J6.X Off Off Off Off On On J7.
NT8D15 E and M Trunk card Table 278 E and M Trunk card - jumper strap settings Mode of operation (Note 2) 2-wire trunk 4-wire trunk DX tip & ring pair Jumper (Note 1) Type I Paging Type I Type II M—rcv E—xmt E—rcv M—xmt J1.X Off Off Off Off Pins 1–2 Pins 2–3 J2.X On On (Note 3) On On Off Off J3.X Off Off Off Off (Note 4) (Note 4) J4.X Off Off Off Off Pins 2–3 Pins 1–2 J5.X Off Off Off Off (Note 4) (Note 4) J6.X Off Off Off Off On On J7.
Configuration 707 Table 279 E and M Trunk card - jumper strap settings Mode of operation (Note 2) 2-wire trunk 4-wire trunk DX tip & ring pair Jumper (Note 1) Type I Paging Type I Type II M—rcv E—xmt E—rcv M—xmt J1.X Off Off Off Off Pins 1–2 Pins 2–3 J2.X On On (Note 3) On On Off Off J3.X Off Off Off Off (Note 4) (Note 4) J4.X Off Off Off Off Pins 2–3 Pins 1–2 J5.X Off Off Off Off (Note 4) (Note 4) J6.X Off Off Off Off On On J7.
NT8D15 E and M Trunk card Refer to Meridian 1 Software Input/Output Reference — Administration (NN43001-611) for LD 14 and LD 16 service change instructions. The trunk type is selected by making service change entries in the Route Data Block Program LD 16. The companding mode is selected by making service change entries in the Trunk Data Block Program (LD 14). Refer to Table 278 "E and M Trunk card - jumper strap settings" (page 706) to select the proper values for the trunk type being employed.
Configuration 709 • TRC for a 2-wire non-VNL trunk facility with a loss of greater than 2 dB, or for which impedance compensation is provided, or for a 4-wire non-VNL facility. • NTC for a 2-wire, non-VNL trunk facility with a loss of less than 2 dB, or when impedance compensation is not provided.
NT8D15 E and M Trunk card Figure 240 Pad orientation • • Class of service is assigned in LD 14. Facility termination is selected (2-wire or 4-wire) in LD 14 (the 2-wire setting provides 0.5 dB more loss in each direction of transmission for echo control). Note: Facilities associated with the Nortel Networks Electronic Switched Network (ESN) are recommended to be 4-wire for optimum transmission; so the 4-wire setting is generally referred to as the ESN setting.
Configuration 711 • TRC for a 2-wire non-VNL trunk facility with a loss of greater than 2 dB, or for which impedance compensation is provided, or for a 4-wire non-VNL facility • NTC for a 2-wire, non-VNL trunk facility with a loss of less than 2 dB, or when impedance compensation is not provided See Table 281 "Pad switching algorithm" (page 711) for the pad switching control for the various through connections and the actual port-to-port loss introduced for connections between the E and M Trunk card a
NT8D15 E and M Trunk card Loss parameters are selected on the E and M trunk card by a switchable pad controlled by CODEC emulation software. The pads settings are called "in" and "out." Pad settings are determined by the three factors listed below: the first two are under direct user control; the third is controlled indirectly. • • Class of Service is assigned in LD 14. Facility termination is selected (2-wire or 4-wire) in LD 14 (the 2-wire setting provides 0.
Applications 713 See Table 281 "Pad switching algorithm" (page 711) for the pad switching control for the various through connections and the actual port-to-port loss introduced for connections between the E and M Trunk card and any other IPE port designated as Port B. Figure 242 "Pad orientation" (page 713) shows the pad switching orientation.
NT8D15 E and M Trunk card The optional applications, features and signaling arrangements for each trunk are assigned through unique route and trunk data blocks. Refer to Features and Services (NN43001-106-B) for information about assigning features and services to trunks. PAD switching The transmission properties of each trunk are characterized by class-of-service (COS) assignments in the trunk data block (LD 14). The assignment may be non-Via Net Loss (non-VNL) or via Net Loss (VNL).
Applications 715 Table 283 Insertion Loss from IPE Ports to IPE Ports (measured in dB) (cont’d.) The transmission properties of each trunk are characterized by class-of-service (COS) assignments in the trunk data block (LD 14). The assignment may be non-Via Net Loss (non-VNL) or via Net Loss (VNL). To ensure stability and minimize echo when connecting to long-haul VNL (Tie) trunks, non-VNL trunks are assigned either Transmission Compensated (TRC) or Non-Transmission Compensated (NTC) class-of-service.
NT8D15 E and M Trunk card In Option 11C systems, Table 284 "Insertion Loss from IPE Ports to IPE Ports (measured in dB)" (page 716) shows the insertion loss from IPE port to IPE port. Table 284 Insertion Loss from IPE Ports to IPE Ports (measured in dB) Paging trunk operation When used in the paging mode, a trunk is connected to a customer-provided paging amplifier system (not zone selectable).
Applications 717 Figure 243 Paging trunk operation When used in the paging mode, a trunk is connected to a customer-provided paging amplifier system (not zone selectable). When the trunk is accessed by dial-up or attendant-key operation, it provides a loop closure across control leads PG and A1. See Figure 244 "Paging trunk operation" (page 718). In a typical application, this transfers the input of the paging amplifier system to the transmission path of the trunk.
NT8D15 E and M Trunk card Figure 244 Paging trunk operation Nortel Communication Server 1000 Circuit Card Reference NN43001-311 02.06 Standard 27 August 2008 Copyright © 2003-2008 Nortel Networks .
Applications Figure 245 Paging trunk operation Nortel Communication Server 1000 Circuit Card Reference NN43001-311 02.06 Standard 27 August 2008 Copyright © 2003-2008 Nortel Networks .
NT8D15 E and M Trunk card Nortel Communication Server 1000 Circuit Card Reference NN43001-311 02.06 Standard 27 August 2008 Copyright © 2003-2008 Nortel Networks .
. NT8D41BA Quad Serial Data Interface Paddle Board Contents This section contains information on the following topics: “Introduction” (page 721) “Physical description” (page 722) “Functional description” (page 722) “Connector pin assignments” (page 724) “Configuring the QSDI paddle board” (page 725) “Applications” (page 729) Introduction The NT8D41BA Quad Serial Data Interface (QSDI) paddle board provides four RS-232-C serial ports.
NT8D41BA Quad Serial Data Interface Paddle Board The QSDI paddle board is compatible with all existing system software, but can only be used with the system options listed above. It does not support the 110 baud rate or the 20 mA current loop interface. Physical description The NT8D41BA Quad Serial Data Interface paddle board is a printed circuit board measuring 31.12 by 12.7 cm (12.25 by 5.0 in.). See Figure 246 "NT8D41BA QSDI paddle board" (page 723).
Functional description 723 Figure 246 NT8D41BA QSDI paddle board Other logic on the card includes baud rate generators, RS-232-C driver/receiver pairs, and the switches and logic needed to configure each UART. Nortel Communication Server 1000 Circuit Card Reference NN43001-311 02.06 Standard 27 August 2008 Copyright © 2003-2008 Nortel Networks .
NT8D41BA Quad Serial Data Interface Paddle Board Figure 247 NT8D41BA QSDI paddle board block diagram System considerations For CS 1000 4.5 and 5.0, in dual-processor systems, the 2 card slots on the back of a CoreNet shelf supporting CP PII and CP PIV function regardless of which CPU is active. On Release 5.0 only the CP PII and CP PIV are supported. In Options 61C and 81C, CS 1000SG, and CS 1000MG, four NT8D41BB can be provisioned for a total of 16 SDI ports.
Configuring the QSDI paddle board 725 Table 285 Connectors J1, J2, J3, and J4 pin assignments Pin # Signal Purpose in DTE mode Purpose in DCE mode 1 DCD Data Carrier detect (Note 1) Data Carrier detect (Not used) 2 RD Transmitted data Received data 3 TD Received data Transmitted data 4 DTR Data terminal ready Data terminal ready (Note 2) 5 GND Signal Ground Signal Ground 6 DSR Data set ready (Note 1) Data set ready 7 RTS Request to send (Not Used) Request to send (Note 2) 8
NT8D41BA Quad Serial Data Interface Paddle Board Table 286 NT8D41BA baud rate switch settings SW13 (port 1), SW10 (port 2), SW11 (port 3), SW12 (port 4) Baud rate Baud Clock (kHz) 1 2 3 4 150 2.40 on off on on 300 4.80 on on off on 600 9.60 on off off on 1,200 19.20 on on on off 2,400 38.40 on off on off 4,800 76.80 on on off off 9,600 153.60 on off off off 19,200* 307.20 on on on on * For future use.
Configuring the QSDI paddle board 727 Table 288 NT8D41BA address switch settings SW15 Port 1 Port 2 SW16 Port 3 Port 4 1* 2+ 3 4 5 6 7 8 0 1 E X off off off off off off 2 3 E X off off off off off on 4 5 E X off off off off on off 6 7 E X off off off off on on 8 9 E X off off off on off off 10 11 E X off off off on off on 12 13 E X off off off on on off 14 15 E X off off off on on on Device pair addresses Swit
NT8D41BA Quad Serial Data Interface Paddle Board Table 289 NT8D41BA DTE/DCE/Fiber switch settings (cont’d.
Applications 729 Applications The NT8D41BA Quad Serial Data Interface paddle board is used to connect the switch to a variety of communication devices, printers, and peripherals. Any RS-232-C compatible device can be connected to either of the card’s two serial ports. The standard application for the paddle board is to connect the switch to the system console. This can be either a direct connection if the console is located near the switch, or through a modem for remote maintenance.
NT8D41BA Quad Serial Data Interface Paddle Board Figure 248 NT8D41BA QSDI paddle board cabling The QSDI paddle board is compatible with all existing system software, but can only be used with the Meridian 1 system options listed above. It does not support the 110 baud rate or the 20 mA current loop interface. Physical description The NT8D41BA Quad Serial Data Interface paddle board is a printed circuit board measuring 31.12 by 12.7 cm (12.25 by 5.0 in.).
Physical description 731 The front edge of the card has four serial port connectors, an Enable/Disable switch (ENB/DIS), and a red LED. The LED indicates the card status. It is lit when the following occurs: • • • the ENB/DIS switch is set to disable all four ports are disabled in software all four ports are not configured in the configuration record Figure 249 NT8D41BA QSDI paddle board Nortel Communication Server 1000 Circuit Card Reference NN43001-311 02.
NT8D41BA Quad Serial Data Interface Paddle Board Functional description The NT8D41BA QSDI paddle board has four asynchronous serial ports. These serial ports are connected to the I/O panel in the back of the shelf using special adapter cables. The serial ports can be used to connect the Meridian 1 system to a terminal, a printer, a modem, or to an other system processor.
Connector pin assignments 733 it to work when either of the system processors is active. Installing the paddle board into a socket in the CPU area of the backplane allows it to work only when that CPU is active. The QSDI paddle board is normally installed into a socket in the network area of the backplane. This allows it to be accessed by either of the system processors.
NT8D41BA Quad Serial Data Interface Paddle Board Table 291 Connectors J1, J2, J3, and J4 pin assignments Pin # Signal Purpose in DTE mode Purpose in DCE mode 1 D C D Data Carrier detect (Note 1) Data Carrier detect (Not used) 2 R D Transmitted data Received data 3 T D Received data Transmitted data 4 D T R Data terminal ready Data terminal ready (Note 2) 5 G N D Signal Ground Signal Ground 6 D S R Data set ready (Note 1) Data set ready 7 R T S Request to send (Not Used)
Configuring the QSDI paddle board 735 Once the board has been installed, the system software must be configured to recognize it. Instructions for doing this are found in the section titled “Software service changes” (page 728). Option switch settings Baud rate Switches SW13, SW10, SW11, and SW12 determine the baud rate for ports 1, 2, 3, and 4, respectively. See the settings for these switches in Table 292 "NT8D41BA baud rate switch settings" (page 735).
NT8D41BA Quad Serial Data Interface Paddle Board Table 293 NT8D41BA address switch settings SW15 Port 1 Port 2 SW16 Port 3 Port 4 1* 2+ 3 4 5 6 7 8 0 1 E X off off off off off off 2 3 E X off off off off off on 4 5 E X off off off off on off 6 7 E X off off off off on on 8 9 E X off off off on off off 10 11 E X off off off on off on 12 13 E X off off off on on off 14 15 E X off off off on on on Device pair a
Applications 737 Table 294 NT8D41BA DTE/DCE/Fiber switch settings (cont’d.
NT8D41BA Quad Serial Data Interface Paddle Board Bell 103/212 compatible dumb modems are recommended to connect a remote data terminal. If a smart modem (such as a Hayes modem) is used, configure the modem for the dumb mode of operation (Command Recognition OFF, Command Echo OFF) before connecting the modem to the asynchronous port. The serial data interface connectors on the paddle board are not RS-232-C standard DB-25 connectors.
. NTAG26 XMFR card Contents This section contains information on the following topics: “Introduction” (page 739) “MF signaling” (page 739) “Physical specifications” (page 742) Introduction The XMFR (Extended Multi-frequency receiver) card is used to receive MF digit information. Connections are made between a PBX and a central office. The XMFR card can only operate in systems using µ-law companding. You can install this card in any IPE slot.
NTAG26 XMFR card Table 295 MF frequency values (cont’d.
Introduction 741 Table 296 XMFR receiver specifications (cont’d.
NTAG26 XMFR card • TR-NPL-000258, Compatibility Information for F.G.D. switched access service, Bell Communication Research Technical Reference, Issue 1.0, October 1985. • TR-NPL-000275, Notes on the BOC Intra-LATA Networks, Bell Communication Research Technical Reference, Chapter 6, 1986. Physical specifications The physical specifications required by the NTAG26 XMFR circuit card are shown in Table 297 "Physical specifications" (page 742).
MF signaling Table 298 MF frequency values (cont’d.) Digit Backward direction DOD-Tx, DID-Rx 5 900 Hz + 1300 Hz 6 1100 Hz + 1300 Hz 7 700 Hz + 1500 Hz 8 900 Hz +1500 Hz 9 1100 Hz + 1500 Hz 0 1300 Hz + 1500 Hz KP 1100 Hz + 1700 Hz ST 1500 Hz + 1700 Hz STP(ST’) 900 Hz + 1700 Hz ST2P(ST") 1300 Hz + 1700 Hz ST3P(ST") 700 Hz + 1700 Hz XMFR receiver specifications Table 299 "XMFR receiver specifications" (page 743) provides the operating requirements for the NTAG26 circuit card.
NTAG26 XMFR card Table 299 XMFR receiver specifications (cont’d.
Physical specifications 745 • TR-NPL-000258, Compatibility Information for F.G.D. switched access service, Bell Communication Research Technical Reference, Issue 1.0, October 1985. • TR-NPL-000275, Notes on the BOC Intra-LATA Networks, Bell Communication Research Technical Reference, Chapter 6, 1986.
NTAG26 XMFR card Nortel Communication Server 1000 Circuit Card Reference NN43001-311 02.06 Standard 27 August 2008 Copyright © 2003-2008 Nortel Networks .
. NTAK02 SDI/DCH card Contents This section contains information on the following topics: “Introduction” (page 747) “NTAK02 SDI/DCH card” (page 747) Introduction The NTAK02 Serial Data Interface/D-channel (SDI/DCH) digital trunk card is supported in the Media Gateway only for the ISDN Signaling Link (ISL) D-channel. You can install this card in slots 1 through 4 in the Media Gateway. It is not supported in the Media Gateway Expansion. Up to four NTAK02 SDI/DCH cards are supported in a Media Gateway.
NTAK02 SDI/DCH card Table 302 Switch settings Port 0 Port 1 SW 1-1 SW 1-2 SDI (not supported) DCH OFF OFF SDI (not supported) DCH OFF ON — ESDI ON ON Port 2 Port 3 SW 1-3 SW 1-4 SDI (not supported) DCH OFF OFF SDI (not supported) DCH OFF ON — ESDI ON ON Note: Digital Private Network Signaling System DPNSS can replace the DCH function in the U.K. Two ports offer the option for DTE/DCE configuration. This option is selected from a jumper on the card.
NTAK02 SDI/DCH card 749 Table 304 NTAK02 pinouts - Port 0 at the cross-connect terminal RS232 Cable Designations I=Input O=Output Signal Pair Color DTE DCE DTE DCE 1T 1R W-BL BL-W 0 DTR 0 DCD — O — I 2T 2R W-O O-W DSR DCD CH/CI DTR I I O O 3T 3R W-G G-W RTS CTS CTS RTS O I I O 4T 4R W-BR BR-W RX TX TX RX I O O I 5T 5R W-S S-W — SG — SG — — — — Table 305 NTAK02 connections at the cross-connect terminal - Port 1 RS422 Cable RS232 Designations I=Input O=Output Signal
NTAK02 SDI/DCH card Table 306 NTAK02 connections at the cross-connect terminal - Port 2 RS422 Cable Pair Color 13T 13R Designations I=Input O=Output Signal DTE RS232 DCE Designations I=Input O=Output Signal DTE DCE DTE DCE DTE DCE BK-G G-BK — — — — — O — I — DTR — DCD 14T 14R BK-BR BR-BK — — — — I I O O DSR DCD CH/CI DTR 15T 15R BK-S S-BK — — — — O I I O RTS CTS CTS RTS 16T 16R Y-BL BL-Y — — — — I O O I RX TX TXD RXD 17T 17R Y-O O-Y O — I — O — I —
NTAK02 SDI/DCH card 751 Table 307 NTAK02 connections at the cross-connect terminal - Port 3 (cont’d.) RS422 Cable RS232 Designations I=Input O=Output Signal Designations I=Input O=Output Signal Pair Color DTE DCE DTE DCE DTE DCE DTE DCE 24T 24R V-BR BR-V RXDB TXDB TXDB RXDB I O OI — — — — — — — — 25T 25R V-S S-V — SG — SG — — — — — — — — SG — SG — Characteristics of the low speed port Ports 0 and 2 are asynchronous, low speed ports.
NTAK02 SDI/DCH card Introduction The NTAK02 Serial Data Interface/D-channel (SDI/DCH) digital trunk card is supported in the Media Gateway only for the ISDN Signaling Link (ISL) D-channel. Up to four NTAK02 SDI/DCH cards are supported in a Media Gateway. The NTAK02 SDI/DCH card can be installed in slots 1, 2, 3, and 4 of the Media Gateway. The NTAK02 SDI/DCH card is not supported in the Media Gateway Expansion.
NTAK02 SDI/DCH card 753 Two ports offer the option for DTE/DCE configuration. This option is selected from a jumper on the card. Table 310 "Jumper settings" (page 753) shows the jumper settings.
NTAK02 SDI/DCH card Table 312 NTAK02 connections at the cross-connect terminal - Port 1 RS422 Cabl e RS232 Designations I=Input O=O utput Designations I=I nput O=Output Signal Signal Pair Color DTE DCE DTE DCE DTE DCE DTE DCE 5T 5R W-S S-W SCTEA — SCTA — O — I — O — I — SCT — SCT — 6T 6R R-BL BL-R SCTEB DTR SCTB DCD O O I I — — — — CH/CI DTR — DCD 7T 7R R-O O-R DSR DCD CH/CI DTR I I O O I I O O DSR DCD CH/CI DTR 8T 8R R-G G-R RTS CTS CTS RTS O I I O O
NTAK02 SDI/DCH card 755 Table 313 NTAK02 connections at the cross-connect terminal - Port 2 (cont’d.
NTAK02 SDI/DCH card The characteristics of the low speed port are as follows: • Baud rate: 300; 600; 1200; 2400; 4800; 9600; 19,200 Default = 1200 • Parity: Odd, even, none Default = none • Stop bits: 1, 1.5, 2 Default = 1 • Flow control: XON/XOFF, CTS, non.
. NTAK09 1.5 Mb DTI/PRI card Contents This section contains information on the following topics: “Introduction” (page 757) “Physical description” (page 758) “Functional description” (page 765) “Architecture” (page 767) Introduction The NTAK09 1.5 Mb DTI/PRI digital trunk card is a standard-size IPE circuit card. The NTAK09 provides 1.5Mb ISDN primary rate interface and digital trunk interface capability.
NTAK09 1.5 Mb DTI/PRI card The NTAK09 is a standard-size intelligent peripheral equipment circuit card in the Option 11C main and IP expansion cabinets. It provides 1.5Mb ISDN primary rate interface and digital trunk interface capability. The NTAK09 can be equipped with two daughterboards: the NTAK20 clock controller and the NTAK93/NTBK51 D-Channel handler interface. The NTAK09 is being replaced by the NTRB21 - TMDI (DTI/PRI/DCH) which is described in “NTRB21 DTI/PRI/DCH TMDI card” (page 953).
Physical description 759 Figure 252 NTAK09 DTI/PRI circuit card The NTAK09 DTI/PRI card has seven faceplate LEDs. The first five LEDs are associated with the NTAK09 card. The remaining two LEDs are associated with the clock controller and DCHI daughterboards. The first five LEDs operate as follows: • • During system power up, the LEDs are on. When the self-test is in progress, the LEDs flash three times and then go into their appropriate states, as shown in Table 315 "NTAK09 LED states" (page 759).
NTAK09 1.5 Mb DTI/PRI card Table 315 NTAK09 LED states (cont’d.) LED State Definition RED On (Red) A red-alarm state has been detected. Off No red alarm. On (Yellow) A yellow alarm state has been detected. Off No yellow alarm. On (Green) NTAK09 is in loop-back mode. Off NTAK09 is not in loop-back mode. YEL LBK The DTI/PRI card uses a standard IPEsized (9.5" by 12.5"), multilayer printed circuit board with buried power and ground layers. It is keyed to prevent insertion in slot 10.
Physical description 761 The DTI/PRI card uses a 9.5" by 12.5" multilayer printed circuit board with buried power and ground layers. The clock controller and D-channel daughterboards are fastened by standoffs and connectors. See Figure 253 "NTAK09 DTI/PRI circuit card" (page 761). The NTAK09 DTI/PRI card has seven faceplate LEDs. The first five LEDs are associated with the NTAK09 card. The remaining two LEDs are associated with the clock controller and DCHI daughterboards.
NTAK09 1.5 Mb DTI/PRI card Table 317 NTAK09 LED states (cont’d.) LED State Definition ACT On (Green) The NTAK09 circuit card is in an active state. No alarm states exist, the card is not disabled, and it is not in a loopback state. Off An alarm state or loopback state exists, or the card has been disabled. See the other LEDs for more information. On (Red) A red-alarm state has been detected. Off No red alarm. On (Yellow) A yellow alarm state has been detected. Off No yellow alarm.
Physical description 763 Table 319 NTAK09 LED states during self-test Action LED State Power up system Top five LEDs light for eleven seconds. Self-test in progress Top five LEDs go out for one second. If the self-test passes, the top five LEDs flash on and off three times. If the self-test detects a partial failure, the top five LEDs flash on and off five times. When the self-test is completed, the LEDs are set to their appropriate states.
NTAK09 1.5 Mb DTI/PRI card Self-tests of the NTAK93 daughterboard are invoked manually by commands in LD 96. The NTAK93 DCHI daughterboard LED is the bottom LED on the faceplate of the NTAK09 DTI/PRI card. The NTAK93 DCHI daughterboard does not perform a self-test when power is applied to it. When power is applied, it turns red and remain steadily lit, indicating the DCH is disabled. When the DCH is enabled, the LED turns green and remains steadily lit.
Functional description 765 Foreign and surge voltage protection Lightning protectors must be installed between an external T1 carrier facility and the system. For public T1 facilities, this protection is provided by the local operating company. In a private T1 facility environment (a campus, for example), the NTAK92 protection assembly can be used. The NTAK09 circuit card conforms to safety and performance standards for foreign and surge voltage protection in an internal environment.
NTAK09 1.5 Mb DTI/PRI card • • faceplate monitor jacks for T1 interface • self-test configurable D-channel data rate with 64 Kbps, 56 Kbps or 64 Kbps inverted. NTAK09 provides the following features and functions: • configurable parameters, including A/µ-Law operation, digital pads on a per channel basis, and Superframe or Extended Superframe formats • • • • • • • • • AMI or B8ZS line coding • • faceplate monitor jacks for T1 interface • self-test 1.
Architecture 767 • integrated trunk access (both D-channel and in-band A/B signaling can be mixed on the same PRI) • • faceplate monitor jacks for T-1 interface • self-test configurable D-channel data rate with 64 Kbps, 56 Kbps or 64 Kbps inverted. Architecture Signaling interface The signaling interface performs an 8 Kbps signaling for all 24 channels and interfaces directly to the DS-30X link. Messages in both directions of transmission are three bytes long.
NTAK09 1.5 Mb DTI/PRI card Microprocessor The NTAK09 is equipped with bit-slice microprocessors that handle the following major tasks: • Task handler: also referred to as an executive, the task handler provides orderly per-channel task execution to maintain real-time task ordering constraints. • Transmit voice: inserts digital pads, manipulates transmit AB bits for DS1, and provides graceful entry into T-Link data mode when the data module connected to the DTI/PRI trunk is answering the call.
Architecture 769 • Task handler: also referred to as an executive, the task handler provides orderly per-channel task execution to maintain real-time task ordering constraints. • Transmit voice: inserts digital pads, manipulates transmit AB bits for DS1, and provides graceful entry into T-Link data mode when the data module connected to the DTI/PRI trunk is answering the call.
NTAK09 1.5 Mb DTI/PRI card Table 320 Digital pad values and offset allocations (cont’d.) Offset PAD set 0 PAD set 1 B unassigned code, FF 14db C 1dB spare D –2dB spare E –5db spare F –6db spare The digital pad is an EPROM whose address-input to data-output transfer function meets the characteristics of a digital attenuator. The digital pad accommodates both µ255-law and A-Law coding. There are 32 combinations each for µ255 to µ255, µ255 to A-Law, A-Law to µ255, and A-Law to A-Law.
Architecture 771 combinations each for µ255 to µ255, µ255 to A-law, A-law to µ255, and A-law to A-law. These values are selected to meet the EIA loss and level plan. Table 322 Digital pad values and offset allocations Offset PAD set 0 PAD set 1 0 0dB -7db 1 2dB -8db 2 3dB -9db 3 4dB -10db 4 5dB 0.6db 5 6.
NTAK09 1.5 Mb DTI/PRI card On the NTAK09 use switch 1 and position 1 to select either the D-channel feature or the DPNSS feature, as follows: • • OFF = D-channel ON = DPNSS (U.K.) The D-channel interface is a 64 Kbps, full-duplex, serial bit-stream configured as a DCE device. The data signals include receive data output, transmit data input, receive clock output, and transmit clock output.
Architecture 773 On the NTAK09 use switch 1, position 1 to select either the D-channel feature or the DPNSS feature, as follows: • • OFF = D-channel ON = DPNSS (U.K.) DS-1 Carrier interface Transmitter The transmitter takes the binary data (dual unipolar) from the PCM transceiver and produces bipolar pulses for transmission to the external digital facility. The DS1 transmit equalizer enables the cabling distance to extend from the card to the DSX-1 or LD-1.
NTAK09 1.5 Mb DTI/PRI card The transmitter takes the binary data (dual unipolar) from the PCM transceiver and produces bipolar pulses for transmission to the external digital facility. The DS1 transmit equalizer enables the cabling distance to extend from the card to the DSX-1 or LD-1. Equalizers are switch selectable through dip-switches. The settings are shown in Table 325 "NTAK09 switch settings" (page 774).
Architecture 775 Table 326 DS-1 line interface pinout for NTBK04 cable (cont’d.) From 50-pin MDF connector To DB-15 Signal name Description pin 23 pin 9 R transmit ring to network pin 25 pin 2 FGND frame ground pin 49 pin 3 T1 receive tip from network pin 24 pin 11 R1 receive ring from network The connection to the external digital carrier is through a 15-position male D-type connector.
NTAK09 1.5 Mb DTI/PRI card ATTENTION IMPORTANT! Each Media Gateway that has a digital trunk must have a clock controller clocked to an external reference clock. Note: Clocking slips can occur between systems that are clocked from different Central Offices (COs), if the COs are not synchronized. The slips can degrade voice quality. The purpose of the clock controller interface is to provide the recovered clock from the external digital facility to the clock controller daughterboard via the backplane.
. NTAK10 2.0 Mb DTI card Contents This section contains information on the following topics: “Introduction” (page 777) “Physical description” (page 778) “Functional description” (page 781) “Architecture” (page 783) Introduction The NTAK10 2.0 Mb DTI card is a digital trunk card that provides an IPE-compatible 2.0 Mb DTI interface. This circuit card includes an on-board clock controller that can be manually switched in or out of service.
NTAK10 2.0 Mb DTI card ATTENTION IMPORTANT! Each Media Gateway that has a digital trunk must have a clock controller clocked to an external reference clock. Note: Clocking slips can occur between systems that are clocked from different COs, if the COs are not synchronized. The slips can degrade voice quality. The NTAK10 2.0 Mb DTI card is a digital trunk card that provides an IPE-compatible 2.0 Mb DTI interface for the CS 1000 system.
Physical description 779 Table 329 NTAK10 LED states (cont’d.) LED State Definition LBK On (Yellow) NTAK10 is in loop-back mode. Off NTAK10 is not in loop-back mode. On (Red) The clock controller is switched on and disabled. On (Green) The clock controller is switched on and is either locked to a reference or is in free-run mode. Flashing (Green) The clock controller is switched on and locking onto the primary reference. Off The clock controller is switched off.
NTAK10 2.0 Mb DTI card Table 330 NTAK10 LED states (cont’d.) LED Definition State On (Green) Flashing (Green) Off The clock controller is switched on and is either locked to a reference or is in free-run mode The clock controller is switched on and locking onto the primary reference The clock controller is switched off Note: See “Clock controller interface” (page 793) in this chapter for more on tracking and free-run operation. The 2 Mb DTI pack uses a standard 9.5" by 12.
Functional description 781 Table 331 NTAK10 LED states (cont’d.) LED State Definition Flashing (Green) The clock controller is switched on and locking onto the primary reference. Off The clock controller is switched off. Note: See “Clock controller interface” (page 793) in this chapter for more on tracking and free-run operation. Power requirements The 2MB DTI obtains its power from the backplane. It draws less than 2 A on +5 V, 50 mA on +15 V and 50 mA on –15 V.
NTAK10 2.
Architecture • per-channel and all-channel loopback capabilities for near-end and far-end • • • self-test 783 download of incoming ABCD validation times from software warm SYSLOAD (TS16 AS16 transmitted) Applicability to France Features specific to DTI requirements for France are implemented in firmware, and are switch-accessed.
NTAK10 2.0 Mb DTI card • • • • digital pad Card-LAN interface carrier interface clock controller interface The main functional blocks of the NTAK10 architecture include: • • • • • • • DS-30X interface signaling interface three microprocessors digital pad. Card-LAN interface. carrier interface. clock controller interface. A description of each block follows.
Architecture 785 The NTAK10 card interfaces to one DS-30X bus which contains 32 byte-interleaved timeslots operating at 2.56 Mb. Each timeslot contains 10 bits in a 10 message format; eight are assigned to voice/data (64 Kbps), one to signaling (8 Kbps), and one is a data valid bit (8 Kbps). Transmit data To transmit data on the carrier, the incoming serial bit stream from the NTAK02 circuit card is converted to 8-bit parallel bytes. The signaling bits are extracted by the signaling interface circuitry.
NTAK10 2.0 Mb DTI card alarm information is sent. The multiplexer output is fed to the carrier interface which can forward it to the carrier or perform per channel loopback. Receive data To receive data, PCM/Data from the carrier interface is converted from serial to parallel, is buffered, and is fed to the pad prom. It then sent onto the DS-30X interface, where signaling information from the signaling interface circuitry is multiplexed.
Architecture 787 • receiving TS16 messages from the TS16 microprocessor and passing these messages to the A07 • • • • • • providing the 19.
NTAK10 2.0 Mb DTI card Signaling interface Interconnections The external connection is through a 50-pin MDF connector with the NTBK05 carrier cable A0394217. The external interconnection is through a 50-pin MDF connector with a NTBK05 carrier cable A0394217. The external connection is through a 50-pin MDF connector with the NTBK05 carrier cable A0394217.
Architecture 789 cable. The impedance is switch set. The switch-settings table at the end of this chapter describes the options. See Table 334 "2 MB DTI switch options" (page 800) “Switch settings” (page 799). If a coaxial interface is required, use NT5K85 in conjunction with the NTBK05. Channel associated signaling Channel associated signaling means that each traffic carrying channel has its own signaling channel permanently associated with it.
NTAK10 2.0 Mb DTI card Outgoing supervisory signals The desired ABCD bit pattern for a channel is output by the NTAK10, under the control of the system controller card. The bit pattern to be transmitted is held on the line for a minimum period of time. This time is specified in the same message and ensures that the signal is detected correctly at the far end.
Architecture 791 TS16 microprocessor The functions of this microprocessor include: • receiving signaling messages supplied by the DS-30X microprocessor, decoding these messages, and taking subsequent actions • • • • • • transmitting messages to the DS-30X microprocessor handling PPM updating the TS16 select RAM and TS16 data RAM providing outpulsing receive data from the change-of-state microprocessor transmitting AIS for CNET (France) application The functions of this microprocessor include: • rec
NTAK10 2.0 Mb DTI card Change-of-state microprocessor The functions of this processor are: • • detecting valid change of state in TS16 when a valid change has been found, passing the new abcd bits to the TS16 microprocessor, along with five bits to indicate the associated channel The functions of this processor are: • • detecting valid change of state in TS16.
Architecture 793 loopback. Clock recovery circuitry within the receiving device extracts the 2.0 MHz clock. This clock is used to generate the frame and multiframe count and is sent to the clock controller as a reference. The AMI data of the carrier is converted to digital and fed to the input selector as well as the output selector for far end loopback. Clock recovery circuitry within the receiving device extracts the 2.0 MHz clock.
NTAK10 2.0 Mb DTI card ATTENTION IMPORTANT! Each Media Gateway that has a digital trunk must have a clock controller clocked to an external reference clock. Note: Clocking slips can occur between systems that are clocked from different COs, if the COs are not synchronized. The slips can degrade voice quality. The recovered clock from the external digital facility is provided to the clock controller through the backplane-to-clock controller interface.
Architecture 795 If the incoming reference is unstable, the internal clock controller remains continuously in the tracking stage with the LED flashing green all the time. This condition does not present a problem, rather, it shows that the clock controller is continually attempting to lock onto the signal. If slips are occurring, however, it means that there is a problem with the clock controller or the incoming line.
NTAK10 2.0 Mb DTI card the primary and secondary clock sources are lost due to hardware faults or when invoked by using software commands. Clock controller functions and features The NTAK10 2MB DTI clock controller functions and features include: • phase-locking to a reference, generating the 10.24 Mhz system clock, and distributing it to the CPU through the backplane. Up to two references at a time can be accepted.
Architecture • providing error burst detection and correction, holdover, and free running capabilities • • • • complying with 2.0 Mb CCITT specifications 797 communicating with software filtering jitter making use of an algorithm to aid in detecting crystal aging and to qualify clocking information Reference switchover Switchover may occur in the case of reference degradation or reference failure.
NTAK10 2.0 Mb DTI card that it is within specifications. On failure (both out of specification), the clock controller enters the HOLDOVER mode and continuously monitors both references. An automatic switchover is initiated to the reference that recovers first. If the primary recovers first, then the clock controller tracks to the primary, but switches over to the secondary whenever the secondary recovers. If the secondary recovers first, then the clock controller tracks to the secondary.
Architecture 799 the clock controller. The secondary reference is obtained from another 2 Mbps DTI card, which is designated by a craft person. No other clocks originating from other 2MB DTI packs are used. The clock controller provides an external timing interface and is capable of accepting two signals as timing references. In this case, an external reference refers to an auxiliary timing source which is bridged from a traffic carrying signal.
NTAK10 2.0 Mb DTI card Table 333 2 MB DTI switch options Switch Off (Switch Open) On (Switch Closed) S1-1 — — S1-2 CC Enabled CC Disabled S2-1 120 ohms 75 ohms S2-2 75 ohms 120 ohms S3-1 non-French Firmware French Firmware S3-2 — — Note: The ON position for all the switches is toward the bottom of the card. This is indicated by a white dot printed on the board next to the bottom left corner of each individual switch. Various 2MB DTI switchable options exist on the NTAK10.
Architecture 801 Table 334 2 MB DTI switch options (cont’d.) Switch Off (Switch Open) On (Switch Closed) S2-2 75 ohms 120 ohms S3-1 non-French Firmware French Firmware S3-2 — — Note: The ON position for all the switches is toward the bottom of the card. This is indicated by a white dot printed on the board next to the bottom left corner of each individual switch. Nortel Communication Server 1000 Circuit Card Reference NN43001-311 02.
NTAK10 2.0 Mb DTI card Nortel Communication Server 1000 Circuit Card Reference NN43001-311 02.06 Standard 27 August 2008 Copyright © 2003-2008 Nortel Networks .
. NTAK20 Clock Controller daughterboard Contents This section contains information on the following topics: “Introduction” (page 803) “Physical description” (page 809) “Functional description” (page 810) Introduction Digital trunking requires synchronized clocking so that a shift in one clock source results in an equivalent shift in all parts of the network. Synchronization is accomplished with an NTAK20 clock controller daughterboard in each Media Gateway that contains a digital trunk card.
NTAK20 Clock Controller daughterboard ATTENTION IMPORTANT! Each Media Gateway that has a digital trunk must have a clock controller clocked to an external reference clock. If an IP Expansion multi-cabinet system is equipped with digital trunk cards, it is mandatory that at least one trunk card is placed in the Main cabinet. Note: Clocking slips can occur between systems that are clocked from different COs, if the COs are not synchronized. The slips can degrade voice quality.
Introduction 805 It is consequently located in slots 1 to 9 of the main and IP expansion cabinets and can support 1.5 Mb, 2.0 Mb, and 2.56 Mb clock recovery rates Note: The card is restricted to slots 1 through 3 in EMC- type cabinets (such as NAK11Dx and NTAK11Fx cabinets). It does not work in slots 4 through 10 in these cabinets.
NTAK20 Clock Controller daughterboard The NTAK20 clock controller card can support 1.5 Mb, 2.0 Mb, and 2.56 Mb clock recovery rates. ATTENTION IMPORTANT! Each Media Gateway that has a digital trunk must have a clock controller clocked to an external reference clock. Note: Clocking slips can occur between Media Gateways that are clocked from different COs, if the COs are not synchronized. The slips can degrade voice quality.
Introduction 807 Tracking mode In tracking mode, one or more DTI/PRI cards supply a clock reference to the NTAK20 clock controller daughterboard. When operating in tracking mode, one DTI/PRI card is defined as the Primary Reference Source (PREF) for clock synchronization. The other DTI/PRI card is defined as the Secondary Reference Source (SREF). PREF and SREF are defined in LD 73.
NTAK20 Clock Controller daughterboard When this happens, the internal clock controller briefly enters the tracking stage. The green LED flashes momentarily until the clock controller is locked on to the reference once again. If the incoming reference is unstable, the internal clock controller remains continuously in the tracking stage with the LED flashing green all the time.
Physical description 809 intended to be a slave to an external network clock. Free-run mode can occur when both the primary and secondary clock sources are lost due to hardware faults or invoked using software commands. In free-run mode, the clock controller does not synchronize on any source, it provides its own internal clock to the system. This mode can be used when the Option 11C is used as a master clock source for other systems in the network.
NTAK20 Clock Controller daughterboard Table 336 Faceplate LEDs State Definition On (Red) NTAK20 is equipped and disabled. On (Green) NTAK20 is equipped, enabled, and is either locked to a reference or is in free run mode. Flashing (Green) NTAK20 is equipped and is attempting to lock (tracking mode) to a reference. If the LED flashes continuously over an extended period of time, check the CC STAT in LD60. If the CC is tracking this may be an acceptable state.
Functional description • • • microprocessor CPU interface external timing interface The main functional blocks of the NTAK20 architecture include: • • • • • • • • • • phase difference detector circuit digital phase-lock loop clock detection circuit digital-to-analog converter CPU MUX bus interface signal conditioning drivers and buffers sanity timer microprocessor CPU interface external timing interface A description of each block follows.
NTAK20 Clock Controller daughterboard The phase difference is used for making frequency measurements and evaluating input jitter and PLL performance. This circuit, under firmware control, allows a phase difference measurement to be taken between the reference entering the PLL and the system clock. The phase difference is used for making frequency measurements, and evaluating input jitter and PLL performance.
Functional description 813 System clock specification and characteristics Since the accuracy requirements for CCITT and EIA Stratum 3 are different, it is necessary to have two TCVCXOs which feature different values of frequency tuning sensitivity. See Table 338 "System clock specification and characteristics" (page 813). Table 338 System clock specification and characteristics Specifications CCITT EIA Base Frequency 20.48 MHz 20.
NTAK20 Clock Controller daughterboard Table 340 System clock specification and characteristics (cont’d.) Specifications CCITT EIA Operating Temperature 0 to 70 C ±1 ppm 0 to 70 C ±1 ppm Drift Rate (Aging) ±1 ppm per year ±4 ppm in 20 years Tuning Range (minimum) ±60 ppm min. ±10 ppm min. ±90 ppm max. ±15 ppm max. 0 to 10 volts, 5V center 0 to 10 volts, 5V center Input Voltage Range EIA/CCITT compliance The clock controller complies with 1.5 Mb EIA Stratum 3ND, 2.0 Mb CCITT or 2.
Functional description 815 Switchover may occur in the case of reference degradation or loss of signal. When performance of the reference degrades to a point where the system clock is no longer allowed to follow the timing signal, then the reference is out of specification. If the reference being used is out of specification and the other reference is still within specification, an automatic switchover is initiated without software intervention.
NTAK20 Clock Controller daughterboard If the command "track to primary" is given, the clock controller tracks to the primary reference and continuously monitors the quality of both primary and secondary references. If the primary goes out of specification, the clock controller automatically tracks to secondary if that is within specifications. On failure (both out of specification), the clock controller enters the HOLDOVER mode and continuously monitors both references.
Functional description 817 recovers first. If the primary recovers first, the clock controller tracks to the primary, but switches over to the secondary when the secondary recovers. If the secondary recovers first, the clock controller tracks to the secondary even if the primary recovers. To prevent chatter due to repeated automatic switching between primary and secondary reference sources, a time-out mechanism of at least 10 seconds is implemented.
NTAK20 Clock Controller daughterboard If the command "free run" is given, the clock controller enters the free-run mode and remains there until a new command is received. Note that the free-run mode of operation automatically initiates after the clock controller has been enabled. In the temporary absence of a synchronization reference signal, or when sudden changes occur on the incoming reference due to error bursts, the clock controller provides a stable holdover.
Functional description • • 819 provides a self-test during initialization minimizes the propagation of impairments on the system clock due to errors on the primary or secondary reference clocks The microprocessor does the following: • • • • communicates with software monitors 2 references provides a self-test during initialization minimizes the propagation of impairments on the system clock due to errors on the primary or secondary reference clocks The microprocessor does the following: • • • • com
NTAK20 Clock Controller daughterboard External timing interface The clock controller provides an external timing interface and accepts two signals as timing references. An external reference is an auxiliary timing clock which is bridged from a traffic carrying signal and is not intended to be a dedicated non-traffic-bearing timing signal. The clock controller uses either the external/auxiliary references or the DTI/PRI references.
Functional description Item Specification Humidity IEC 68-2-3 Vibration/Shock IEC 68-2-6 IEC 68-2-7 IEC 68-2-29 IEC 68-2-31 IEC 68-2-32 hardware integrity and regulatory specifications: EMI FCC part 15 sub- part J CSA C108.
NTAK20 Clock Controller daughterboard Item Specification Temperature IEC 68-2-1 IEC 68-2-2 IEC 68-2-14 Humidity IEC 68-2-3 Vibration/Shock IEC 68-2-6 IEC 68-2-7 IEC 68-2-29 IEC 68-2-31 IEC 68-2-32 Nortel Communication Server 1000 Circuit Card Reference NN43001-311 02.06 Standard 27 August 2008 Copyright © 2003-2008 Nortel Networks .
. NTAK79 2.0 Mb PRI card Contents This section contains information on the following topics: “Introduction” (page 823) “Physical description” (page 824) “Functional description” (page 832) “Architecture” (page 833) Introduction The NTAK79 2.0 Mb Primary Rate Interface (PRI) card provides a 2.0 Mb interface and an onboard D-channel handler (DCH). The NTAK79 card also includes an onboard clock controller (equivalent to the NTAK20 Clock Controller) that can be manually switched into or out of service.
NTAK79 2.0 Mb PRI card The NTAK79, which can be located in the main and IP expansion cabinets, provides a 2.0 Mb PRI interface and an onboard D-channel handler (DCH) for the Option 11C system. This circuit card also includes onboard circuitry equivalent to the NTAK20 Clock Controller that can be manually switched in or out of service. The NTAK79 2 MB Primary Rate Interface (PRI) card provides a 2.0 Mb interface and an onboard D-channel handler (DCH) for the CS 1000 system.
Physical description 825 Table 341 NTAK79 LEDs (cont’d.) LED State Definition ACT On (Green) The NTAK79 2 MB PRI circuit card is in an active state. Off The NTAK79 2 MB PRI is in a disabled state. The OOS LED turns red. On (Red) A red alarm state has been detected. This represents a local alarm state of: Loss of Carrier (LOS) Loss of Frame (LFAS), or Loss of CRC Multiframe (LMAS). Off No red (local) alarm. On (Yellow) A yellow alarm state has been detected.
NTAK79 2.0 Mb PRI card Table 342 NTAK79 LEDs LED State OOS On (Red) Definition The NTAK79 2MB PRI circuit card is either disabled or out-of-service. Off ACT The NTAK79 2MB PRI is not in a disabled state. On (Green) The NTAK79 2MB PRI circuit card is in an active state. Off RED The NTAK79 2MB PRI is not in a disabled state. The OOS LED turns red. On (Red) A red alarm state has been detected.
Physical description 827 associated with the on-board Clock Controller and the on-board D-channel interface (DCHI). The LEDs are described in Table 342 "NTAK79 LEDs" (page 826). Table 343 NTAK79 LEDs LED State Definition OOS On (Red) The NTAK79 2MB PRI circuit card is disabled or out-of-service. Off The NTAK79 2MB PRI is not in a disabled state. On (Green) The NTAK79 2MB PRI circuit card is in an active state. Off The NTAK79 2MB PRI is in a disabled state. The OOS LED turns red.
NTAK79 2.0 Mb PRI card NTAK79 switches The NTAK79 card incorporates four on-board dip switches. The tables that follow provide information on the various settings and related functions of these switches. Note: The ON position for all the switches is towards the bottom of the card. This is indicated by a white dot printed on the board adjacent to the bottom left corner of each individual switch.
Physical description 829 Switch SW2 - Carrier Impedance Configuration This switch sets the carrier impedance to either 120 ohms or 75 ohms. Twisted pair cable is usually associated with 120 ohms. Coaxial cable is usually associated with the 75 ohms setting. Table 345 Switch SW2 Cable Type SW 2-1 SW 2-2 75 ohms Up (Off) Down (On) 120 ohms Down (On) Up (Off) Switch SW3 - Clock Controller Configuration This switch enables/disables (H/W) the on-board Clock Controller.
NTAK79 2.0 Mb PRI card Figure 255 NTAK79 card with switch locations Switch SW1 - DCHI Configuration This switch enables/disables the on-board DCHI and sets the operating mode of the DCHI. DPNSS1 mode is not supported at this time. For all other countries that do not use DPNSS, use Q.931 mode. Table 348 Switch SW1 Switch Down (On) Up (Off) SW 1-1 enable DCHI disable DCHI SW 1-2 DPNSS1/DASS2 Q.
Physical description 831 Table 349 Switch SW2 Cable Type SW 2-1 SW 2-2 75 ohms Up (Off) Down (On) 120 ohms Down (On) Up (Off) Switch SW3 - Clock Controller Configuration This switch enables/disables (H/W) the on-board Clock Controller. Disable the SW 3-2 if the on-board clock controller is not in use.
NTAK79 2.0 Mb PRI card Environment The NTAK79 meets all applicable Nortel Network’s operating specifications. The NTAK79 meets all applicable Nortel Network’s operating specifications. The NTAK79 meets all applicable Nortel Network’s operating specifications. Functional description The NTAK79 card provides the following features and functions: • recovery of the 2.
Architecture • • • • • • 833 supporting National and International bits in time slot 0 on-board clock controller onboard D-channel interface 32 software-selectable Tx & Rx Pad values conversion of PCM commanding Laws (A-A, u-u, A-u, u-A) Card-LAN for maintenance communications The NTAK79 card provides the following features and functions: • recovery of the 2.
NTAK79 2.0 Mb PRI card • • 8031 microcontroller Card-LAN / echo / test port interface The main functional blocks of the NTAK79 architecture include: • • • • • • • • • DS-30X interface A07 signaling interface digital pad carrier interface CEPT transceiver SLIP control D-Channel support interface 8031 microcontroller Card-LAN / echo / test port interface A description of each block follows.
Architecture 835 The signaling bits are extracted and inserted by the A07 signaling interface circuitry. The DS-30X timeslot number is mapped to the PCM-30 channel number. Timeslots 0 and 16 are currently unused for PCM. The NTAK79 interfaces to one DS-30X bus which contains 32 byte-interleaved timeslots operating at 2.56 Mb. Each timeslot contains 10 bits in A10 message format; 8 are assigned to voice/data (64 Kbps), one to signaling (8 Kbps), and one is a data valid bit (8 Kbps).
NTAK79 2.0 Mb PRI card Table 352 Digital pad values and offset allocations (cont’d.) PAD SET 0 PAD SET 1 Offset PAD Offset PAD 1 1.0 dB 1 –1.0 dB 2 2.0 dB 2 –2.0 dB 3 3.0 dB 3 –3.0 dB 4 4.0 dB 4 –4.0 dB 5 5.0 dB 5 –5.0 dB 6 6.1 dB 6 –6.0 dB 7 7.0 dB 7 –7.0 dB 8 8.0 dB 8 –8.0 dB 9 9.0 dB 9 –9.0 dB 10 10.0 dB 10 –10.0 dB 11 11.0 dB 11 spare 12 12.0 dB 12 spare 13 13.0 dB 13 spare 14 14.
Architecture 837 Table 353 Digital Pad - values and offset allocations (cont’d.) PAD SET 0 PAD SET 1 Offset PAD Offset PAD 6 6.1 dB 6 -6.0 dB 7 7.0 dB 7 -7.0 dB 8 8.0 dB 8 -8.0 dB 9 9.0 dB 9 -9.0 dB 10 10.0 dB 10 -10.0 dB 11 11.0 dB 11 spare 12 12.0 dB 12 spare 13 13.0 dB 13 spare 14 14.0 dB 14 Idle Code 15 spare 15 Unassigned Code Software selects A-Law or Mu-Law and one of 32 possible PAD values for each channel.
NTAK79 2.0 Mb PRI card Table 354 Digital pad values and offset allocations (cont’d.) PAD SET 0 PAD SET 1 Offset PAD Offset PAD 10 10.0 dB 10 –10.0 dB 11 11.0 dB 11 spare 12 12.0 dB 12 spare 13 13.0 dB 13 spare 14 14.0 dB 14 Idle Code 15 spare 15 Unassigned Code Signaling interface The signaling interface consists of the A07 DS-30X signaling controller. This interface provides an 8 Kbps signaling link through the DS-30X timeslot zero data bit zero.
Architecture 839 Impedance matching The line interface provides for the use of either 75 ohms coaxial or 120 ohms twisted pair cable. The impedance is selected by a switch, as shown in Table 355 "Impedance matching switch selection" (page 839). Table 355 Impedance matching switch selection Cable On Off 75 ohms S2 S1 120 ohms S1 S2 Note: The ON position for all the switches is towards the bottom of the card.
NTAK79 2.0 Mb PRI card Carrier grounding The NTAK79 card provides the capability of selectively grounding the shield of the Tx and/or Rx pairs of the carrier. Closing (down) the on-board switch applies FGND to the appropriate carrier cable shield. The switch settings are shown in Table 358 "Carrier shield grounding switch settings" (page 840).
Architecture 841 The receiver extracts data and clock from an AMI (Alternate Mark Inversion) coded signal and outputs clock and synchronized data. The receiver is sensitive to signals over the entire range of cable lengths and requires no equalization. The clock and data recovery meets or exceeds the jitter specifications of the CCITT recommendation G.823 and the jitter attenuation requirements of CCITT recommendation G.742.
NTAK79 2.0 Mb PRI card The remote loopback function causes the device to transmit the same data that it receives, using the jitter attenuated receive clock. The data is also available at the receive data outputs. Local loopback causes the transmit data and clock to appear at the receive clock and data outputs. This data is also transmitted on the line unless transmit AIS is selected. CEPT transceiver The transmitter and receiver functions are used for synchronization, channel, and signal extraction.
Architecture • • 843 receive clock output transmit clock output The receive and transmit clocks have slightly different bit rates from each other, as determined by the transmit and receive carrier clocks. The NTAK79 has an onboard D-Channel Handler Interface (DCHI). It is the equivalent to a single port of an NTAK02 SDI/DCH pack. This enables for a completely operational ISDN PRA link with clock synchronization and D-channel on a single circuit card.
NTAK79 2.0 Mb PRI card The on-board DCHI can be operated in two separate modes as defined by an on-board dip switch. It can operate in a standard DCHI mode common to most ISDN standard countries. It can also operate in an U.K. specific mode using the DPNSS format. Table 362 Settings for the DCHI dip switch (SW1) Switch Function On Off S1-1 En/Dis Enabled Disabled S1-2 F/W Mode DPNSS DCHI The D-channel support interface is a 64 Kbps, full-duplex serial bit stream configured as a DCE device.
Architecture 845 DCHI special applications connection The connection between the PRI2 and the on-board D-channel Handler Interface card is also available at the MDF connector. Connections are made to these pins for normal on-board DCHI operation. They can also be used for future or special applications. The signals conform to the EIA RS-422 standard. The connection between the PRI2 and the on-board D-Channel Handler Interface card is also available at the MDF connector.
NTAK79 2.0 Mb PRI card The connection to the echo canceler/test port is available at the backplane/MDF connector. The signals at this port conform to the EIA RS-232C standard. Clock controller interface The clock controller circuitry on the NTAK79 is identical to that of the NTAK20 clock controller. Though several DTI/PRI packs can exist in one system, only one clock controller may be activated. All other DTI/PRI clock controllers must be switched off.
Architecture 847 When tracking a reference, the clock controller uses an algorithm to match its frequency to the frequency of the incoming clock. When the frequencies are very near to being matched, the clock controller is locked onto the reference. The clock controller makes small adjustments to its own frequency until both the incoming and system frequencies correspond. If the incoming clock reference is stable, the internal clock controller tracks it, locks onto it, and matches frequencies exactly.
NTAK79 2.0 Mb PRI card If the incoming reference is unstable, the internal clock controller remains continuously in the tracking stage with the LED flashing green all the time. This condition does not present a problem, rather, it shows that the clock controller is continually attempting to lock onto the signal. If slips are occurring, however, it means that there is a problem with the clock controller or the incoming line.
Architecture • • 849 provide jitter filtering make use of an algorithm to aid in detecting crystal aging and to qualify clocking information The NTAK79 clock controller functions and features include: • phase lock to a reference, generate the 10.24 MHz system clock, and distribute it to the CPU through the backplane. Up to two references at a time are accepted • • • primary to secondary switchover (auto-recovery is provided) • • • • compliance with 2.
NTAK79 2.0 Mb PRI card secondary provided that it is within specifications. On failure (both out of specification), the clock controller enters the HOLDOVER mode and continuously monitors both references. An automatic switchover is initiated to the reference that recovers first. If the secondary recovers first, then the clock controller tracks to the secondary, but switches over to the primary when the primary recovers. If the primary recovers first, the clock controller tracks to the primary.
Architecture 851 A time-out mechanism prevents chatter due to repeated automatic switching between primary and secondary reference sources. See “Autorecovery and chatter” (page 815). Holdover and free-run In the temporary absence of a synchronization reference signal, or when sudden changes occur on the incoming reference due to error bursts, the clock controller provides a stable holdover.
NTAK79 2.0 Mb PRI card timing signal. The clock controller uses either the two external/auxiliary references or the NTAK79 references. NTAK79 has the necessary hardware for routing its reference to the appropriate line on the backplane Software is responsible for the distribution of the secondary references and ensures that no contention is present on the REFCLK1 backplane line. Software designates the NTAK79 as a primary reference source to the clock controller.
. NTAK93 D-channel Handler Interface daughterboard Contents This section contains information on the following topics: “Introduction” (page 853) “Physical description” (page 855) “Functional description” (page 856) Introduction The NTAK93 provides the D-channel handler interfaces required by the ISDN PRI trunk. The DCHI performs D-channel Layer 2 message processing and transfers Layer 3 signaling information between two adjacent network switches. It is mounted on the NTAK09 1.
NTAK93 D-channel Handler Interface daughterboard The DCHI performs D-channel Layer 2 message processing and transfers Layer 3 signaling information between two adjacent network switches. It is mounted on the NTAK09 1.5 Mb DTI/PRI card or the NTBK50 2.0 Mb PRI card (installed in the Media Gateway) using standoff reference pins and connectors. The NTAK93 daughterboard, when mounted on the NTBK50 PRI digital trunk card, is addressed in the same slot as the NTBK50.
Physical description 855 The NTAK93 daughterboard provides the following features and functions: • • D-channel interface or DPNSS interface Special features included for LAPD implementation at DCH: — system parameters are service changeable (system parameters are downloaded from software) — incoming Layer 3 message validation procedures are implemented in the D-PORT firmware — supported message units and information elements can be service changed — translation of the CCITT message types information
NTAK93 D-channel Handler Interface daughterboard Table 365 Faceplate LEDs State Definition On (Red) NTAK93 is equipped and disabled. On (Green) NTAK93 is equipped and enabled, but not necessarily established. Off NTAK93 is not equipped. LEDs are located on the faceplate of the NTAK09 and NTBK50 cards. The DCHI LED is dual-color (red and green). The LEDs are described in Table 366 "Faceplate LEDs" (page 856). Table 366 Faceplate LEDs State Definition On (Red) NTAK93 is equipped and disabled.
Functional description 857 The microprocessors also handle some D-channel data processing in DCHI mode. One microprocessor handles data transfer between each pair of serial ports and software, reports the status of each port and takes commands from software to control the activities of the ports. The microprocessors also do some of D-channel data processing in DCHI mode.
NTAK93 D-channel Handler Interface daughterboard A total of 32K bytes of ROM space for each pair of ports is reserved as a code section of the DCH-PORT firmware. LAPD data link/asynchronous controller One chip controls each pair of independent communication ports. It performs the functions of serial-to-parallel and parallel-to-serial conversions, error detection, and frame recognition (in HDLC). The parameters of these functions are supplied by the DCH-PORT firmware.
Functional description 859 DPNSS/DCHI Port The mode of operation of the DCH-PORT is controlled by a switch setting on the NTAK09/NTBK50. For DPNSS the switch is ON; for DCHI it is OFF. The port operates at: Data Rate Duplex Clock Interface 56kbps, 64kbps Full Internal / External RS422 The address of ports is selected by hardwired backplane card address. Port characteristics and LAPD parameters are downloaded from software.
NTAK93 D-channel Handler Interface daughterboard D-Port - SDTI/PRI interface Below is a brief description of signals.
. NTBK22 MISP card Contents This section contains information on the following topics: “Introduction” (page 861) “Physical description” (page 861) “Functional description” (page 862) Introduction The NTBK22 Multi-Purpose ISDN Signaling Processor (MISP) card is a microprocessor-controlled signaling processor that performs Data Link (Layer 2) and Network (Layer 3) processing associated with ISDN BRI and the OSI protocol.
NTBK22 MISP card You can install this card in slots 1 through 4 in the Media Gateway. The card is not supported in the Media Gateway Expansion. Note: When configuring BRI trunks, the MISP (NTBK22) card must be co-located in the same Media Gateway as the SILC (NT6D70) and UILC (NT6D71) cards the MISP is supporting. Refer to ISDN Basic Rate Interface: Installation and Configuration (NN43001-318) and ISDN Basic Rate Interface: Features (NN43001-580) for additional information.
Functional description 863 • separate D-channel data from signaling information and route the data to the packet handler • send call control messages to ISDN BRI terminals over the D-channel Each MISP can support 4 line cards (UILC or SILC or any combination of the two). Each line card supports 8 DSLs, therefore each MISP supports 32 DSLs. Since each DSL uses two B-channels and one D-channel the MISP supports 64 B-channels and 32 D-channels.
NTBK22 MISP card The NTBK22 MISP Card interfaces with the S/T Interface Line Cards (SILCs) and the U Interface Line Cards (UILCs).
Functional description 865 • a serially transmitted, zero-inserted, CRC protected message that has a starting and an ending flag • a data structure CPU to MISP bus interface Information exchange between the CPU and the MISP is performed with packetized messages transmitted over the CPU bus. This interface has a 16-bit data bus, an 18-bit address bus, and interrupt and read/write control lines.
NTBK22 MISP card Power consumption Power consumption is +5V at 2 A; +15V at 50 mA; and -15V at 50 mA. Power consumption is +5V at 2 A; +15V at 50 mA; and -15V at 50 mA. Nortel Communication Server 1000 Circuit Card Reference NN43001-311 02.06 Standard 27 August 2008 Copyright © 2003-2008 Nortel Networks .
. NTBK50 2.0 Mb PRI card Contents This section contains information on the following topics: “Introduction” (page 867) “Physical description” (page 868) “Functional description” (page 873) “Architecture” (page 875) Introduction The NTBK50 2.0 Mb PRI card provides a 2.0 Mb PRI interface. It supports the NTAK20 clock controller daughterboard and either the NTAK93 D-channel interface or the NTBK51 Downloadable D-channel handler.
NTBK50 2.0 Mb PRI card daughterboard provides identical performance to the on-board NTAK79 DCHI. The NTBK51 DDCH daughterboard provides support for protocols based on the MSDL platform. The NTBK50 2.0 Mb PRI card provides a 2 Mb PRI interface for the CS 1000. The NTBK50 card sups the NTAK20 clock controller daughterboard and either the NTAK93 D-channel interface or the NTBK51 Downloadable D-channel handler. The NTAK93 DCHI daughterboard provides identical performance to the on-board NTAK79 DCHI.
Physical description Figure 256 NTBK50 2.0 Mb PRI card with daughterboards The LEDs are described in Table 367 "NTBK50 faceplate LEDs" (page 869). Table 367 NTBK50 faceplate LEDs LED State Definition OOS On (Red) The NTBK50 2.0 Mb PRI circuit card is disabled or out-of-service. Also, the state of the card after power-up, completion of self test, and exiting remote loopback. Off The NTBK50 2.0 Mb PRI is not in a disabled state. On (Green) The NTBK50 2.0 Mb PRI circuit card is in an active state.
NTBK50 2.0 Mb PRI card Table 367 NTBK50 faceplate LEDs (cont’d.) LED State Definition RED On (Red) A red alarm state has been detected. This represents a local alarm state of Loss of Carrier (LOS), Loss of Frame (LFAS), or Loss of CRC Multiframe (LMAS). Off No red (local) alarm. On (Yellow) A yellow alarm state has been detected. This represents a remote alarm indication from the far end. The alarm may be either Alarm Indication (AIS) or Remote Alarm (RAI). Off No yellow (remote) alarm.
Physical description 871 Table 368 NTBK50 faceplate LEDs (cont’d.) LED RED YEL LBK CC DCH State Definition Off The NTBK50 2.0 Mb PRI is in a disabled state. The OOS LED is red. On (Red) A red alarm state has been detected. This represents a local alarm state of Loss of Carrier (LOS), Loss of Frame (LFAS) or Loss of CRC Multiframe (LMAS). Off No red (local) alarm. On (Yellow) A yellow alarm state has been detected. This represents a remote alarm indication from the far end.
NTBK50 2.0 Mb PRI card Table 369 NTBK50 faceplate LEDs (cont’d.) LED RED YEL LBK CC DCH State Definition Off The NTBK50 2.0 Mb PRI is in a disabled state. The OOS LED is red. On (Red) A red alarm state has been detected. This represents a local alarm state of Loss of Carrier (LOS), Loss of Frame (LFAS), or Loss of CRC Multiframe (LMAS). Off No red (local) alarm. On (Yellow) A yellow alarm state has been detected. This represents a remote alarm indication from the far end.
Functional description 873 The NTBK50 meets all applicable Nortel Networks operating specifications. The NTBK50 meets all applicable Nortel Networks operating specifications. Figure 257 NTBK50 2.0 Mb PRI card with daughterboards Functional description NTBK50 provides the following features and components: • recovery of the 2.
NTBK50 2.0 Mb PRI card • • • • • • • • • transmission of remote alarm when instructed slip-buffering receive messages support of National and International bits in timeslot 0 clock controller daughterboard D-channel interface daughterboard downloadable D-channel handler daughterboard 32 software-selectable Tx and Rx Pad values conversion of PCM commanding Laws (A-A, u-u, A-u, u-A) Card-LAN for maintenance communication NTBK50 provides the following features and functions: • recovery of the 2.
Architecture • • • • • • • • • • monitoring of receive carrier alarms including AIS, LOS, and RAI transmission of remote alarm when instructed slip-buffering receive messages support of National and International bits in timeslot 0 clock controller daughterboard D-channel interface daughterboard downloadable D-channel handler daughterboard 32 software-selectable Tx and Rx Pad values conversion of PCM commanding Laws (A-A, u-u, A-u, u-A) Card-LAN for maintenance communications Architecture The main functi
NTBK50 2.0 Mb PRI card • • Card-LAN / echo / test port interface 80C51FA Microcontroller A description of each block follows.
Architecture 877 NTBK50 interfaces to one DS-30X bus which contains 32-byte interleaved timeslots operating at 2.56 Mb. Each timeslot contains 10 bits in A10 message format; eight are assigned to voice/data (64 Kbps), one to signaling (8 Kbps), and one is a data valid bit (8 Kbps). The incoming serial bit stream is converted to 8-bit parallel bytes to be directed to padding control. The signaling bits are extracted and inserted by the A07 signaling interface circuitry.
NTBK50 2.0 Mb PRI card Table 370 Digital Pad - values and offset allocations (cont’d.) PAD SET 0 PAD SET 1 Offset PAD Offset PAD 14 14.0 dB 14 Idle Code 15 spare 15 Unassigned Code Software selects A-law or Mu-Law and one of 32 possible PAD values for each channel. These values are provided in a PROM through which the data is routed. The idle code for A-law is 54H and for Mu-law is 7FH. The unequipped code is FFH for both A-law and Mu-law.
Architecture 879 The software selects A-Law or Mu-Law and one of 32 possible PAD values for each channel. These values are provided in a PROM through which the data is routed. The idle code for A-Law is 54H and for Mu-Law is 7FH. The unequipped code is FFH for both A-Law and Mu-Law. As the idle code and unequipped code can be country dependent, the software instructs the NTBK50 to use different codes for each direction.
NTBK50 2.0 Mb PRI card The signaling interface consists of the A07 DS-30X signaling controller. This interface provides an 8 Kbps signaling link via the DS-30X timeslot zero data bit zero. Messages are 3 bytes in length. Carrier interface For the E1 interface, the connection to the external digital carrier is provided by the line interface chip. This device provides accurate pulse shaping to meet the CCITT pulse mask requirements.
Architecture 881 Table 374 Impedance matching switch settings Cable Type SW 2-1 753/4 Down (On) 120 /4 Up (Off) 3 Note: The ON position for all the switches is towards the bottom of the card. This is indicated by a white dot printed on the board adjacent to the bottom left corner of each individual switch. The line interface provides for the use of either 75 ohms coaxial or 120 ohms twisted pair cable.
NTBK50 2.0 Mb PRI card NTBK50 enables the shield of the Tx and/or Rx pairs of the carrier to be selectively grounded. Closing (down position) the on-board switch applies FGND to the appropriate carrier cable shield. The switch settings are shown in Table 379 "Carrier Shield grounding switch settings" (page 882). Carrier Shield grounding (Switch SW4) Table 377 "Carrier Shield grounding switch settings" (page 882) lists the Carrier Shield ground switch settings.
Architecture 883 Receiver functions The receiver extracts data and clock from an AMI (Alternate Mark Inversion) coded signal and outputs clock and synchronized data. The receiver is sensitive to signals over the entire range of cable lengths and requires no equalization. The clock and data recovery meets or exceeds the jitter specifications of the CCITT recommendation G.823 and the jitter attenuation requirements of the CCITT recommendation G.742.
NTBK50 2.0 Mb PRI card loopback causes the transmit data and clock to appear at the near-end clock and receive data outputs. This data is also transmitted on the line unless an Alarm Indication Signal (AIS) is transmitted instead. The remote loopback function causes the device to transmit the same data that it receives using the jitter attenuated receive clock. The data is additionally available at the receive data outputs.
Architecture 885 Slip control provides organized recovery of PCM when the clock recovered from the external facility is at a different frequency with respect to the local clock. Slip control provides organized recovery of PCM when the clock recovered from the external facility is at a different frequency with respect to the local clock. D-channel support interface The D-channel support interface is a 64 Kbps, full-duplex serial bit stream configured as a DCE device.
NTBK50 2.0 Mb PRI card • • receive clock output transmit clock output The receive and transmit clocks can be of slightly different bit rates from each other as determined by the transmit and receive carrier clocks. The NTBK50 supports a D-Channel Handler Interface (DCHI) daughterboard. It is equivalent to a single port of an NTAK02 SDI/DCH card. The NTBK50 also supports a Downloadable D-Channel Handler interface (DDCH) daughterboard. The DDCH brings MSDL D-channel capability to the CS 1000 system.
Architecture Table 382 Settings for the DCHI dip switch (SW1) Switch Function On Off S1-1 — — — S1-2 F/W Mode DPNSS DCHI Card-LAN interface A Dual Port UART handles the functions of the serial ports for the Card-LAN serial link test port interface. The test interface is an asynchronous 4800 bps 8 bit connected to port A of the UART. The card-LAN interface is an asynchronous 19.2 kbps 9 bit start/stop connected to port B of the UART.
NTBK50 2.0 Mb PRI card Nortel Communication Server 1000 Circuit Card Reference NN43001-311 02.06 Standard 27 August 2008 Copyright © 2003-2008 Nortel Networks .
. NTBK51 Downloadable D-channel Handler daughterboard Contents This section contains information on the following topics: “Functional description” (page 903) “Physical description” (page 890) “Functional description” (page 892) “Download operation” (page 897) Introduction The NTBK51 daughterboard provides Downloadable D-channel Handler (DDCH) interfaces based on the Multipurpose Serial Data Link (MSDL).
NTBK51 Downloadable D-channel Handler daughterboard — management and maintenance — LAPD- software for data link layer processing — DCH interface — Layer 3 preprocessor — traffic reporting including link capacity The NTBK51 provides the following features and functions: • • • • ISDN D-channel related protocol Selftest Loopback D-channel loadware including: — management and maintenance — LAPD- software for data link layer processing — Meridian 1 DCH interface — Layer 3 preprocessor — traffic reportin
Physical description 891 You can install this card in: • slots 1 through 9 in the main cabinet or slots 11-19, 21-29, 31-39, or 41-49 in the expansion cabinets • slots 1 through 4 in the Media Gateway. The card is not supported in the Media Gateway Expansion. The NTBK51 daughterboard, when installed on the NTAK09 digital trunk card, is addressed in the same slot as the NTAK09. One NTBK51 daughterboard is required for each PRI link. LEDs are located on the faceplate of the NTAK09/NTBK50 card.
NTBK51 Downloadable D-channel Handler daughterboard The NTBK51 daughterboard, when installed on the NTAK09 digital trunk card, is addressed in the same slot as the NTAK09. One NTBK51 daughterboard is required for each PRI link. LEDs are located on the faceplate of the NTAK09/NTBK50 card. The DCHI LED is a dual-color (red/green). The LED is described in Table 385 "Faceplate LED" (page 892). Table 385 Faceplate LED State Definition On (Red) NTBK51 is disabled.
Functional description • • • 893 Serial communication controller Sanity timer Bus timer The main functional blocks of the NTBK51 architecture include the following: • • • • • • • • • Microprocessors Main memory Shared memory EPROM memory Flash EPROM memory EEPROM memory Serial communication controller Sanity timer Bus timer Microprocessors One microprocessor handles data transfer between each serial interface and software, reports the status of each port and takes commands from the software to contro
NTBK51 Downloadable D-channel Handler daughterboard • • • • Sanity check and self tests Message handling between the Option 11C and the card Four port serial communication controller handling with DMA Program download from Option 11C CPU One microprocessor handles data transfer between each serial interface and software, reports the status of each port and takes commands from the software to control the activities of the ports.
Functional description 895 The shared memory is the interface between the CS 1000 CPU and the 68EC020 MPU. This memory is a 16 Kbyte RAM, expandable to 64 kbytes and accessible in 8 or 16 bits. EPROM memory The Bootstrap code resides in this 27C1000 EPROM and is executed on power up or reset. The Bootstrap code resides in this 27C1000 EPROM and is executed on power up or reset. The Bootstrap code resides in this 27C1000 EPROM and is executed on power up or reset.
NTBK51 Downloadable D-channel Handler daughterboard Serial communication controller The serial controller is the Zilog Z16C35 and is referenced as the Integrated Controller (ISCC). The ISCC includes a flexible Bus Interface Unit (BIU) and four Direct Memory Access (DMA) channels, one for each receive and transmit. The DMA core of the ISCC controls the data transfer between local RAM and the communication ports.
Download operation 897 Download operation Downloading is performed in either of two modes: background mode or maintenance mode. Before a download takes place, a D-channel link must be configured.
NTBK51 Downloadable D-channel Handler daughterboard When new base or application software is installed on a CS 1000, the download decision is made during system initialization. The actual MSDL base software download is done in background mode and can take several minutes to complete, depending on switch traffic and the size of the MSDL base software.
Download operation 899 Card reset After a card reset, the MSDL base code and the D-channel application software are validated by the CPU. The software is stored in flash EPROM on the DDCH card and need not be downloaded. But if the software is missing due to new installation, corruption, or loadware version mismatch, the CPU automatically downloads the base/application into the DDCH card. Following a card reset, the MSDL base code and the D-channel application software are validated by the Option 11C CPU.
NTBK51 Downloadable D-channel Handler daughterboard Nortel Communication Server 1000 Circuit Card Reference NN43001-311 02.06 Standard 27 August 2008 Copyright © 2003-2008 Nortel Networks .
. NTCK16 Generic Central Office Trunk cards Contents This section contains information on the following topics: “Introduction” (page 901) “Physical description” (page 902) “Functional description” (page 903) “Operation” (page 903) “Electrical specifications” (page 905) “Connector pin assignments” (page 906) “Introduction” (page 823) “Applications” (page 914) Introduction The NTCK16 generic Central Office trunk cards support up to eight analog Central Office trunks.
NTCK16 Generic Central Office Trunk cards The cards listed below are minimum vintage required to support the following countries: • NTCK16AA generic Central Office trunk card with PPM — Ireland • NTCK16BC generic Central Office trunk card without PPM. — Brazil — Ireland — Mexico — Tortolla — Singapore • NTCK16AD generic Central Office trunk card with PPM — Turkey • NTCK16BD generic Central Office trunk card without PPM.
Operation 903 Self-test When the NTCK16AX and NTCK16BX trunk cards are installed and power is applied to them, a self-test is performed on each card. The red LED on the faceplate flashes three times, then remains continuously lit until the card is enabled in software. If the self-test fails, the LED remains lit. Functional description The NTCK16AX and NTCK16BX generic Central Office trunk cards support up to eight analog Central Office trunks. They can be installed in any IPE slot.
NTCK16 Generic Central Office Trunk cards • • • Loss Switching Trunk-to-Trunk connections Call Disconnect In addition, the NTCK16AX circuit card supports internal 12/16 kHz PPM detection. Loop start operation Loop start operation is configured in software and is implemented in the card through software download messages. Idle state In the idle state, the ringing detector is connected across the tip and ring wires, providing a high impedance loop toward the Central Office.
Electrical specifications 905 CS 1000E, CS 1000M, and Meridian 1disconnect The CS 1000E, CS 1000M, and Meridian 1disconnects the call by removing the loop between the tip and ring leads and replacing the ringing detector. Trunks configured for battery supervision send a release confirm message to software. Electrical specifications Power requirements Table 386 "NTCK16 circuit card power requirements" (page 905) shows the power requirements for the NTCK16AX and NTCK16BX generic Central Office trunk cards.
NTCK16 Generic Central Office Trunk cards Pad switching The NTCK16AX and NTCK16BX generic Central Office trunk cards support the North American loss plan. Software configuration allows the selection of 4 dB loss pads on a per unit basis. Table 388 NTCK16 pad switching Loss Analog-to-Digital Digital-to-Analog PAD out 0 dB –3 dB PAD in +4 dB +1 dB Note: The tolerance for the above nominal values is +0.3 dB, -0.7 dB.
Configuration Figure 258 NTCK16 Central Office trunk connections for NT8D37 I/O panel connectors A, E, K, R Nortel Communication Server 1000 Circuit Card Reference NN43001-311 02.06 Standard 27 August 2008 Copyright © 2003-2008 Nortel Networks .
NTCK16 Generic Central Office Trunk cards Figure 259 NTCK16 Central Office trunk connections for NT8D37 I/O panel connectors B, F, L, S Nortel Communication Server 1000 Circuit Card Reference NN43001-311 02.06 Standard 27 August 2008 Copyright © 2003-2008 Nortel Networks .
Configuration Figure 260 NTCK16 Central Office trunk connections for NT8D37 I/O panel connectors C, G, M, T NTCK16AX Central Office trunk card Route Data Block Respond to the prompts in LD 16 as shown. Nortel Communication Server 1000 Circuit Card Reference NN43001-311 02.06 Standard 27 August 2008 Copyright © 2003-2008 Nortel Networks .
NTCK16 Generic Central Office Trunk cards Table 389 LD 16 - Route Data Block for NTCK16AX. Prompt Response Description REQ: NEW Define a new unit TYPE: COT Define a new Route Data Block CUST xx Customer number as defined in LD 15.
Configuration 911 Table 390 LD 14 - Trunk Data Block for NTCK16AX. (cont’d.) Prompt Response Description BTID (See "page 803" (page 911) .) Xx Enter the country busy tone ID: SUPN (NO) YES Supervision yes (no) STYP BTS Busy tone supervision enabled BAT Loop break supervision enabled (LOL) SHL Attenuation Pads In, (Out) DTN, (DIP) Digitone signaling, (digipulse) P20, P12, (P10) Make-break ratio for pulse dialing speed.
NTCK16 Generic Central Office Trunk cards Table 391 LD 16 - Route Data Block for NTCK16BX. Prompt Response Description REQ: NEW Define a new unit TYPE: COT Define a new Route Data Block CUST xx Customer number as defined in LD 15.
Configuration Table 392 LD 14 - Trunk Data Block for NTCK16BX (cont’d.) Prompt Response Description BTID (See "807" (page 914) .) Xx Enter the country busy tone ID: SUPN (NO) YES Supervision yes (no) STYP BTS Busy tone supervision enabled BAT Loop break supervision enabled (LOL) SHL Attenuation Pads In, (Out) (DIP) DTN Digitone signaling, (digipulse) (P10) P12 P20 Make-break ratio for pulse dialing speed.
NTCK16 Generic Central Office Trunk cards Applications Periodic Pulse Metering All trunk units on the NTCK16AX trunk card can be individually configured to support the Periodic Pulse Metering (PPM) feature. Note: PPM is available on the NTCK16AX trunk card. It is not supported on the NTCK16BX trunk card. PPM allows the user of a telephone to keep an accurate record of Central Office calls for billing or administration purposes.
Applications 915 Therefore the following steps must be followed when the Generic XFCOT is installed: 1. Define Loss Switching mode. Respond to the prompts in LD 97 as shown. Table 393 LD 97 - Defining Loss Switching mode. Prompt Response Description REQ: CHG TYPE: SYSP IPE system parameters configuration YES Select North American transmission plan. ... NATP Note: The default to the NATP prompt is NO, and therefore this prompt must always be checked during installation. 2.
NTCK16 Generic Central Office Trunk cards Trunk to Trunk connection When any disconnect supervision is configured (CLS = BAT, BTS), the Loop Start Trunk of the Generic XFCOT is marked as having disconnect supervision and therefore follows the same rules as a Ground Start Trunk. There is no configuration involved for this operation. Call disconnect If any disconnect supervision is configured (CLS = BAT, BTS), the Loop Start Trunk is released when the disconnect signal is received.
. NTDK20 Small System Controller card Contents This section contains information on the following topics: “Introduction” (page 917) “Memory” (page 919) “100BaseT IP daughterboards” (page 920) “PC card interface” (page 923) “Security device” (page 924) “SDI ports” (page 924) “Conferencing” (page 925) “Media Gateway/Media Gateway Expansion card slot assignment” (page 925) Introduction This chapter introduces the NTDK20GA Small System Controller (SSC) Card used in the Call Server, Media Gateway, and Med
NTDK20 Small System Controller card The NTDK20GA SSC card has the following components and features: • NTTK25 daughterboard Flash memory, NTAK19 SIMM module (16 MB) DRAM, and Backup memory Note: The NTTK13 daughterboard is still supported.
Memory 919 Figure 261 NTDK20 SSC card and expansion daughterboard in the Call Server Memory The majority of system and customer configured data is both controlled and stored on the NTDK20 SSC card’s Flash ROM. An active and backup copy of customer data is also kept on the Flash ROM. In the event of data loss, the NTDK20 SSC card also retains a copy of customer files in an area called the Backup flash drive. The NTDK20 SSC card is equipped with 8MB of temporary memory space called DRAM.
NTDK20 Small System Controller card and processes temporary automated routines and user-programmed commands while the system is running. The DRAM on the SSC card stores operating system files, user files, overlay data, patch codes, and the active copy of the customer database. The NTDK20 SSC card’s Flash daughterboard is the NTTK25. It performs most of the system software storage and data processing.
100BaseT IP daughterboards 921 An optional second NTDK83 daughterboard can be mounted on the NTDK20 SSC card in the Call Server. Adding the second NTDK83 daughterboard provides support for up to four Media Gateways. See Figure 262 "NTDK83AA dual-port 100BaseT IP daughterboard" (page 921). The NTDK99AA (single-port) daughterboard is mounted on the NTDK20 SSC card in the Media Gateway to provide connectivity to the Call Server. See Figure 263 "NTDK99A single-port 100BaseT IP daughterboard" (page 922).
NTDK20 Small System Controller card Figure 263 NTDK99A single-port 100BaseT IP daughterboard Table 395 Expansion daughterboards Daughterboard Number of ports NTDK99 (used in Media Gateway) one NTDK83 (used in Call Server two Cable type Use the supplied NTTK34AA UTP CAT 5 RJ-45 2 m cross-over cable to connect the Call Server and Media Gateway using the 100BaseT daughterboards. Max. distance between Call Server and Media Gateway systems Media Gateways can be located up to 100 m (328 ft.
PC card interface 923 • Use 100BaseT to connect to the LAN for voice distribution over a data network. • Use 100BaseT cable if connected point-to-point (directly) to the Media Gateway. The NTTK34AA crossover cable must be used. The Media Gateways can be located up to 100 meters from the Call Server. • Use Media Conversion devices (third party converters) to convert 100BaseT to fiber for distances from 100 m to 40 km. See Figure 264 "Call Server connection to Media Gateway" (page 923).
NTDK20 Small System Controller card Security device The NTDK20 SSC card in each Media Gateway must contain a NTDK57DA Security device, a remote dongle (NT_Rem) which is keyed to match the NTDK57AA Security device on the Call Server and a standard dongle (NT_STD). This maintains the requirement of a single keycode for each system. Refer to Figure 261 "NTDK20 SSC card and expansion daughterboard in the Call Server" (page 919) for the location of the device.
Media Gateway/Media Gateway Expansion card slot assignment 925 Conferencing Thirty-two conference channels are provided by the NTDK20 SSC card’s conference devices. Conference capability can be increased by mounting expansion daughterboards on the NTDK20 SSC card. Each dual IP daughterboard increases the total number of conference channels by 32. The maximum number of conference ports is 96. Each conference device provides 32 ports of conferencing capabilities (one conference participant for each port).
NTDK20 Small System Controller card Table 397 Media Gateway and Media Gateway Expansion slot assignments Media Gateway/Media Gateway Expansion First Media Gateway Media Gateway/ Expans ion Third Second Physic al card slot Logical card slot Physic al card slot Logical card slot Physic al card slot Logical card slot Physic al card slot Logical card slot 1 11 1 21 1 31 1 41 2 12 2 22 2 32 2 42 3 13 3 23 3 33 3 43 4 14 4 24 4 34 4 44 5 * 5 * 5 * 5 * 6
Media Gateway/Media Gateway Expansion card slot assignment Figure 266 Media Gateway Expansion slots Nortel Communication Server 1000 Circuit Card Reference NN43001-311 02.06 Standard 27 August 2008 Copyright © 2003-2008 Nortel Networks .
NTDK20 Small System Controller card Nortel Communication Server 1000 Circuit Card Reference NN43001-311 02.06 Standard 27 August 2008 Copyright © 2003-2008 Nortel Networks .
. NTDW60 Media Gateway Controller Card Contents This section contains information on the following topics: “Introduction” (page 929) “Processor” (page 932) “Ethernet ports” (page 932) “Expansion daughterboards” (page 932) “Backplane interface” (page 932) “Serial data interface ports” (page 933) “Faceplate LED display” (page 933) Introduction The NTDW60 Media Gateway Controller (MGC) card provides a gateway controller for MG 1000E IP Media Gateways in a CS 1000E system.
NTDW60 Media Gateway Controller Card The MGC card, without expansion daughterboards, includes the following components and features: • • • • Arm processor. • • Embedded Ethernet switch. • • Four character LED display on the faceplate. • • • Real time clock (RTC). 128 MB RAM. 4MB boot flash. Internal CompactFlash (CF) card mounted on the card. It appears to the software as a standard ATA hard drive. Six 100 BaseT Ethernet ports for connection to external networking equipment.
Introduction Figure 267 MGC block diagram Nortel Communication Server 1000 Circuit Card Reference NN43001-311 02.06 Standard 27 August 2008 Copyright © 2003-2008 Nortel Networks .
NTDW60 Media Gateway Controller Card Processor The processor combines RISC processors, DSP resources, SDRAM controller, and UARTs. The processor runs the application as well as providing tone and conference functions. It interfaces to the rest of the system using Ethernet. Ethernet ports External connections Of the six external Ethernet ports, three are reserved for ELAN subnet connections and three for TLAN subnet connections.
Faceplate LED display 933 Serial data interface ports The MGC has three serial data interface (SDI) ports. The ports can be used locally for debugging, or they can be configured in the CS 1000E Call Sever as system terminals. Only ports SDI 0 and SDI 1 can be used to access the installation menu during initial configuration of the MGC. SDI 2 is not available during bootup. Due to a limitation of the three port cable used, SDI 1 and SDI 2 do not use hardware flow control. Only SDI 0 has full modem support.
NTDW60 Media Gateway Controller Card Table 398 Faceplate display (cont’d.) LOAD Application software is loading. LLL:S IPMG super loop and MGC shelf number. LLL is the superloop number. S is the shelf number. For example, 032:0, 120:1 Faceplate LED display In a normal boot process the diagnostic messages would be displayed in the following order: 1. BOOT 2. POST 3. PASS 4.
. NTDW61 and NTDW66 Common Processor Pentium Mobile Card Contents This section contains information on the following topics: “Introduction” (page 935) “Cabinet/chassis support” (page 938) “Media storage” (page 939) “Memory” (page 939) “Ethernet interfaces” (page 939) “Serial data interface ports” (page 940) “USB 2.
NTDW61 and NTDW66 Common Processor Pentium Mobile Card The CP PM hardware includes the following components and features: • • • Intel Pentium processor. • • • • • DDR RAM expandable up to 2 GB. Integrated Intel 855GME GMCH/Intel ICH-4 controller chipset. Two CompactFlash sockets: (1) a fixed media disk (FMD) on the card and (2) a hot swappable removable media disk (RMD) accessible on the faceplate. Three Ethernet ports. Two serial data interface ports. One USB port. Security device.
Introduction Figure 268 CP PM high level hardware block diagram Nortel Communication Server 1000 Circuit Card Reference NN43001-311 02.06 Standard 27 August 2008 Copyright © 2003-2008 Nortel Networks .
NTDW61 and NTDW66 Common Processor Pentium Mobile Card Figure 269 CP PM card Cabinet/chassis support The CP PM NTDW61 single-slot card is supported in the following chassis: • • • • • • Option 11C cabinet (except for slot 0). Option 11C expansion cabinet (except for slot 0). Option 11C Mini chassis (except for slot 0 and slot 4). Option 11C Mini expander chassis. MG 1000E main chassis (except for slot 0). MG 1000E expander chassis.
Ethernet interfaces 939 Media storage Fixed media drive The fixed media drive (FMD) is a CompactFlash (CF) card that is internal to the CP PM card. It is accessible only when the CP PM card is removed from the system. The FMD serves as a hard drive. The Fixed Media Drive is used when CP PM is a Call Server. It is connected directly to the ATA controller in the chipset, which is also known as the hard drive controller.
NTDW61 and NTDW66 Common Processor Pentium Mobile Card Serial data interface ports The CP PM has two serial data interface (SDI) ports: Port 0 and Port 1. Both ports are standard RS232 DTE ports. They are routed through the backplane of the shelf to a 50-pin main distribution frame (MDF) connector on the back of the shelf. A cable (NTAK19ECE6) that adapts the 50-pin MDF to a pair of 25-pin DB connectors is shipped with the CP PM.
Faceplate 941 Faceplate The CP PM faceplate is available in two sizes: NTDW61 single slot, and NTDW66 double slot. The CP PM card faceplate is equipped with Status, Active CPU, CF, and Ethernet LED indicators. Nortel Communication Server 1000 Circuit Card Reference NN43001-311 02.06 Standard 27 August 2008 Copyright © 2003-2008 Nortel Networks .
NTDW61 and NTDW66 Common Processor Pentium Mobile Card Figure 270 CP PM NTDW61 and NTDW66 faceplates Nortel Communication Server 1000 Circuit Card Reference NN43001-311 02.06 Standard 27 August 2008 Copyright © 2003-2008 Nortel Networks .
LED indicators 943 Faceplate buttons Reset Reset (RST) generates a hard reset of the card. Init Init (INI) generates a manual initialization of the software. DIP switch The DIP switch selects the media drive. CF MASTER/POSITION1 selects the Compact Flash (CF) FMD and HD MASTER/POSITION2 selects the Hard Drive FMD. LED indicators Status LED The functionality of the Status LED is summarized in the following table.
NTDW61 and NTDW66 Common Processor Pentium Mobile Card Ethernet LEDs ELAN and TLAN LEDs The functionality of the ELAN and TLAN network interface LED indicators is depicted in the following figure. Figure 271 ELAN and TLAN port LED indicators HSP LEDs The functionality of the HSP port LED indicators is depicted in the following figure. Figure 272 HSP port LED indicators Removable and fixed media drive LEDs LEDs are provided to indicate the access/activity of the removable and fixed media drives.
. NTDW62 and NTDW64 Media Gateway Controller Daughterboards Contents This section contains information on the following topics: “Introduction” (page 945) “Media Gateway Controller card” (page 945) “Daughterboard configurations” (page 946) Introduction The NTDW60 Media Gateway Controller (MGC) card has two PCI Telephony Mezzanine Card form factor expansion sites. Daughterboards (DB) in the expansion sites provide Digital Signal Processor (DSP) resources for VoIP.
NTDW62 and NTDW64 Media Gateway Controller Daughterboards Figure 273 Media Gateway Controller with daughterboards Figure 274 Daughterboard Daughterboard configurations The DBs are available in two sizes: An NTDW62 32-port daughterboard (DB-32) and an NTDW64 96-port daughterboard (DB-96). There are four possible Media Gateway configurations: • A pure TDM single Media Gateway with no DSP daughterboards or Media Cards. • A system with only Media Card.
Media Gateway Controller card • • 947 A system with only DSP daughterboards. A system with both DSP daughterboards and Media Cards. The DB-96 is supported only in expansion site #1 on the MGC card. If a DB-96 is detected in expansion site #2 during bootup, an installation error message is displayed on the MGC faceplate. The installation error message remains on the MGC faceplate display until the DB-96 is removed from expansion site #2.
NTDW62 and NTDW64 Media Gateway Controller Daughterboards Nortel Communication Server 1000 Circuit Card Reference NN43001-311 02.06 Standard 27 August 2008 Copyright © 2003-2008 Nortel Networks .
. NTDW65 Voice Gateway Media Card Contents This section contains information on the following topics: “Introduction” (page 949) “Ethernet ports” (page 950) “Backplane interfaces” (page 950) “Serial data interface ports” (page 951) “Faceplate LED display” (page 951) Introduction The NTDW65 MC32S Media Card provides 32 IP-TDM gateway ports between an IP device and a TDM device in a CS 1000 network. The MC32S replaces the previous media card or ITG card. The Media Card comes in an IPE form factor.
NTDW65 Voice Gateway Media Card • 10/100 BaseT ELAN network interface for management and signalling messages. • • • • 10/100BaseT TLAN network interface for telephony voice traffic. FPGA for backplane interfaces. Two TTY ports on the processor for debugging. 100BaseT faceplate port for debugging. Figure 275 Voice Gateway Media card block diagram Ethernet ports External connections There are TLAN and ELAN network interfaces for connection to external networks, and a faceplate debug port.
Faceplate LED display • • • 951 CardLan interface. Hardware watchdog. Time-switch for flexible TDM timeslot mapping. Serial data interface ports The Media Card has two serial data interface ports on the master MSP. The installation menu can by accessed through either port. TTY settings The default tty settings for both ports are: • • • • • Baud rate: 9600. Data bit length: 8. Stop bit: 1. Parity: none. Flow control: none.
NTDW65 Voice Gateway Media Card If there is a fatal self-test error during bootup, an error code appears and the PASS and LOAD message are not displayed. During normal operation after bootup, the faceplate displays Leader (L) or Follower (F) and the number of registered sets. For example, ’L027’ means Leader of 27 sets Nortel Communication Server 1000 Circuit Card Reference NN43001-311 02.06 Standard 27 August 2008 Copyright © 2003-2008 Nortel Networks .
. NTRB21 DTI/PRI/DCH TMDI card Contents This section contains information on the following topics: “Introduction” (page 953) “Physical description” (page 955) “Functional description” (page 963) “Software description” (page 965) “Hardware description” (page 965) “Architecture” (page 967) Introduction The NTRB21 (DTI/PRI/DCH) TMDI digital trunk card is a 1.5 Mb DTI or PRI interface to the CS 1000E, CS 1000M Cabinet, and Meridian 1 PBX 11C Cabinet. The NTRB21 card has a built-in downloadable D-channel.
NTRB21 DTI/PRI/DCH TMDI card You can install this card in slots 1 through 4 in the Media Gateway. The card is not supported in the Media Gateway Expansion. Up to four digital trunks are supported in each Media Gateway. Note 1: For CISPR B group cabinets, the active Clock Controller (NTAK20) can only occupy slots 1-3. For FCC and/or CISPR A group cabinets, this limitation does not exist - the Clock Controller can occupy any available slot 1-9.
Physical description 955 • the introduction of a new prompt to replace a function that was handled by a dip switch on the NTAK09 • • an extra loadware application to handle Layer 1 a change to the existing loadware files into 32 bit format from the original 16 bit format To provide CEMUX communication with the card, changes are also required to create an I/O entry for the card. This card replaces the NTAK09 described in “NTAK09 1.5 Mb DTI/PRI card” (page 757).
NTRB21 DTI/PRI/DCH TMDI card Figure 276 NTRB21 TMDI card with clock controller In general, the first five LEDs operate as follows: • • During system power up, the LEDs are on. When the self-test is in progress, the LEDs flash on and off three times, then go into their appropriate states, as shown in Table 403 "NTRB21 LED states" (page 956). Table 403 NTRB21 LED states LED State Definition DIS On (Red) The NTRB21 circuit card is disabled. Off The NTRB21 is not in a disabled state.
Physical description 957 Table 403 NTRB21 LED states (cont’d.) LED State Definition YEL On (Yellow) A yellow alarm state has been detected. Off No yellow alarm. On (Green) NTRB21 is in loop-back mode. Off NTRB21 is not in loop-back mode. LBK Figure 277 "NTRB21 TMDI card faceplate" (page 958) shows the faceplate of the NTRB21 TMDI card. The NTRB21 card uses a standard IPE-sized (9.5" by 12.5"), multi-layer printed circuit board with buried power and ground layers.
NTRB21 DTI/PRI/DCH TMDI card Figure 277 NTRB21 TMDI card faceplate The NTRB21 card has seven faceplate LEDs. The first five LEDs are associated with the NTRB21 card, the remaining two LEDs are associated with the clock controller and DCHI daughterboards. In general, the first five LEDs operate as follows: Nortel Communication Server 1000 Circuit Card Reference NN43001-311 02.06 Standard 27 August 2008 Copyright © 2003-2008 Nortel Networks .
Physical description • • 959 During system power up, the LEDs are on. When the self-test is in progress, the LEDs flash on and off three times, then go into their appropriate states, as shown in Table 404 "NTRB21 LED states" (page 959). Table 404 NTRB21 LED states LED State Definition DIS On (Red) The NTRB21 circuit card is disabled. Off The NTRB21 is not in a disabled state. On (Green) The NTRB21 circuit card is in an active state.
NTRB21 DTI/PRI/DCH TMDI card Figure 278 NTRB21 TMDI card with clock controller In general, the first five LEDs operate as follows: • • During system power up, the LEDs are on. When the self-test is in progress, the LEDs flash on and off three times, then go into their appropriate states, as shown in Table 404 "NTRB21 LED states" (page 959). Table 405 NTRB21 LED states LED State Definition DIS On (Red) The NTRB21 circuit card is disabled. Off The NTRB21 is not disabled.
Physical description 961 Table 405 NTRB21 LED states (cont’d.) LED State Definition YEL On (Yellow) A yellow alarm state has been detected. Off No yellow alarm. On (Green) NTRB21 is in loop-back mode. Off NTRB21 is not in loop-back mode. LBK Figure 279 "NTRB21 TMDI card faceplate" (page 962) shows the faceplate of the NTRB21 TMDI card. Nortel Communication Server 1000 Circuit Card Reference NN43001-311 02.06 Standard 27 August 2008 Copyright © 2003-2008 Nortel Networks .
NTRB21 DTI/PRI/DCH TMDI card Figure 279 NTRB21 TMDI card faceplate Power requirements The DTI/PRI obtains its power from the backplane, and draws less than 2 amps on +5 V, 50 mA on +12 V, and 50 mA on –12 V. Nortel Communication Server 1000 Circuit Card Reference NN43001-311 02.06 Standard 27 August 2008 Copyright © 2003-2008 Nortel Networks .
Functional description 963 The DTI/PRI obtains its power from the backplane, and draws less than 2 amps on +5 V, 50 mA on +12 V, and 50 mA on -12 V. The DTI/PRI obtains its power from the backplane, and draws less than 2 amps on +5 V, 50 mA on +12 V, and 50 mA on –12 V. Foreign and surge voltage protection Lightning protectors must be installed between an external T1 carrier facility and the system. For public T1 facilities, this protection is provided by the local operating company.
NTRB21 DTI/PRI/DCH TMDI card • • • • • automatic alarm monitoring and handling • • faceplate monitor jacks for T1 interface • self-test Card-LAN for maintenance communication loopback capabilities for both near-end and far-end echo canceler interface integrated trunk access (both D-channel and in-band A/B signaling can be mixed on the same PRI) configurable D-channel data rate with 64 kbps, 56 kbps or 64 kbps inverted NTRB21 provides the following features and functions: • configurable param
Hardware description • • • • • • • • • 1.5 Mb Digital Trunk Interface and 1.5 Mb Primary Rate Interface • • faceplate monitor jacks for T-1 interface • self-test 965 1.
NTRB21 DTI/PRI/DCH TMDI card The NTRB21 TMDI card provides 1.5 MBits Digital Trunk Interface or Primary Rate Interface functionality on the Option 11C. The NTRB21 has a built-in downloadable D-channel, and may occupy card slots 1-9 on the Option 11C main cabinet. Figure 280 NTRB21 TMDI card faceplate Note 1: For CISPR B group cabinets, the active Clock Controller (NTAK20) can only occupy slots 1-3.
Architecture 967 equipped together with the NTAK09 DTI/PRI card (with the NTBK51 downloadable D-channel daughterboard). Figure 281 "NTRB21 TMDI card faceplate" (page 968) shows a faceplate of the NTRB21 TMDI card. The NTRB21 TMDI card provides 1.5 MBits Digital Trunk Interface or Primary Rate Interface functionality on the CS 1000. The NTRB21 has a built-in downloadable D-channel. Note: The NTRB21 can be used with the NTAK09 DTI/PRI card (with the NTBK51 downloadable D-channel daughterboard).
NTRB21 DTI/PRI/DCH TMDI card Figure 281 NTRB21 TMDI card faceplate Interconnection The interconnection to the carrier is by NTBK04, a 1.5 Mb 20 ft. carrier cable. The NT8D97AX, a fifty-foot extension cable, is also available. The interconnection to the carrier is by NTBK04 1.5Mb carrier cable (A0394216). The NTBK04 is twenty feet long. The NT8D97AX, a fifty-foot extension, is also available if required. Nortel Communication Server 1000 Circuit Card Reference NN43001-311 02.
Architecture 969 The interconnection to the carrier is by NTBK04, a 1.5 Mb 20 ft. carrier cable. The NT8D97AX, a fifty-foot extension cable, is also available. Microprocessor The NTRB21 is equipped with bit-slice microprocessors that handle the following major tasks: • Task handler: also referred to as an executive. The task handler provides orderly per-channel task execution to maintain real-time task ordering constraints.
NTRB21 DTI/PRI/DCH TMDI card The NTRB21 is equipped with bit-slice microprocessors that handle the following major tasks: • Task handler: also referred to as an executive. The task handler provides orderly per-channel task execution to maintain real-time task ordering constraints. • Transmit voice: inserts digital pads, manipulates transmit AB bits for DS1, and provides graceful entry into T-Link data mode when the data module connected to the DTI/PRI trunk is answering the call.
Architecture 971 Table 406 Digital pad values and offset allocations (cont’d.) Offset PAD set 0 PAD set 1 A idle code, 7F 3db B unassigned code, FF 14db C 1dB spare D –2dB spare E –5db spare F –6db spare The digital pad is an EPROM whose address-input to data-output transfer function meets the characteristics of a digital attenuator. The digital pad accommodates both µ255-law and A-law coding.
NTRB21 DTI/PRI/DCH TMDI card combinations each for Mu255 to Mu255, Mu255 to A-Law, A-Law to Mu255, and A-Law to A-Law. These values are selected to meet the EIA loss and level plan. Table 408 Digital pad values and offset allocations Offset PAD set 0 PAD set 1 0 0dB –7db 1 2dB –8db 2 3dB –9db 3 4dB –10db 4 5dB 0.6db 5 6.
Architecture • • • 973 56 kbps 64 kbps clear 64 kbps inverted (64 Kbps restricted) DCHI can be enabled and disabled independent of the PRI card, as long as the PRI card is inserted in its cabinet slot. The D-channel data link cannot be established unless the PRI loop is enabled. On the NTRB21 use switch 1, position 1 to select either the D-channel feature or the DPNSS feature, as follows: OFF = D-channel The ON setting for DPNSS (U.K.) is not supported at this time.
NTRB21 DTI/PRI/DCH TMDI card • • receive clock output transmit clock output The bit rate of the receive and transmit clocks can vary slightly from each other. This is determined by the transmit and receive carrier clocks. Feature selection through software configuration for the D-channel includes: • • • 56 kbps 64 kbps clear 64 kbps inverted (64 Kbps restricted) DCHI can be enabled and disabled independent of the PRI card, as long as the PRI card is inserted in its cabinet slot.
Architecture 975 The transmitter takes the binary data (dual unipolar) from the PCM transceiver and produces bipolar pulses for transmission to the external digital facility. The DS1 transmit equalizer allows the cabling distance to be extended from the card to the DSX-1 or LD-1 configured in LD 17. The transmitter takes the binary data (dual unipolar) from the PCM transceiver and produces bipolar pulses for transmission to the external digital facility.
NTRB21 DTI/PRI/DCH TMDI card Table 411 DS-1 line interface pinout for NTBK04 cable From 50-pin MDF connector To DB-15 Signal name Description pin 48 pin 1 T transmit tip to network pin 23 pin 9 R transmit ring to network pin 25 pin 2 FGND frame ground pin 49 pin 3 T1 receive tip from network pin 24 pin 11 R1 receive ring from network The connection to the external digital carrier is via a 15 position Male D type connector.
Architecture 977 Table 413 DS-1 line interface pinout for NTBK04 cable (cont’d.) From 50-pin MDF connector To DB-15 Signal name Description pin 49 pin 3 T1 receive tip from network pin 24 pin 11 R1 receive ring from network NTAK20 Clock Controller (CC) daughterboard Digital Trunking requires synchronized clocking so that a shift in one clock source results in an equivalent shift of the same size and direction in all parts of the network.
NTRB21 DTI/PRI/DCH TMDI card The NTAK20AA version of the clock controller meets AT&T Stratum 3 and Bell Canada Node Category D specifications. The NTAK20BA version meets CCITT stratum 4 specifications. “Electrical specifications” (page 905) ATTENTION IMPORTANT! If an IP Expansion multi-cabinet system is equipped with digital trunk cards, it is mandatory that at least one trunk card is placed in the Main Option 11C cabinet. A cabinet that has a digital trunk must use a clock controller.
Architecture 979 The 1.5 Mb clock is generated by a Phase-Locked Loop (PLL). The PLL synchronizes the 1.5 Mb DS1 clock to the 2.56 Mb system clock through the common multiple of 8 kHz by using the main frame synchronization signal. Nortel Communication Server 1000 Circuit Card Reference NN43001-311 02.06 Standard 27 August 2008 Copyright © 2003-2008 Nortel Networks .
NTRB21 DTI/PRI/DCH TMDI card Nortel Communication Server 1000 Circuit Card Reference NN43001-311 02.06 Standard 27 August 2008 Copyright © 2003-2008 Nortel Networks .
. NTVQ01xx Media Card Contents This section contains information on the following topics: “Physical description” (page 981) “Hardware architecture” (page 982) “Functional description” (page 984) Survivability Physical description The Media Card replaces the ITG Pentium card and is available as an 8-port or 32-port card. You can install this card in slots 1 through 4 in the Media Gateway or slots 7 through 10 in the Media Gateway Expansion.
NTVQ01xx Media Card Figure 282 NTVQ01xx Media Card The NTVQ01xx Media Card provides faceplate and backplane interfaces, which are used to connect external LANs. This section provides information on the faceplate connectors and indicators. Hardware architecture The Media Card comes in two versions: 8-port and 32-port. Faceplate connectors and indicators Figure 283 "NTVQ01xx Media Card faceplate" (page 983) shows the NTVQ01xx Media Card faceplate.
Hardware architecture 983 Ethernet activity LEDs The NTVQ01xx Media Card faceplate contains Ethernet activity LEDs for each network. Maintenance hex display This is a four-digit LED-based hexadecimal display that provides the status of the NTVQ01xx Media Card at all times. The hex display provides an indication of fault conditions and the progress of PC card-based software upgrades or backups. It also indicates the progress of the internal self-test in the form of T:xx.
NTVQ01xx Media Card RS-232 Asynchronous Maintenance Port An 8-pin mini-DIN socket on the NTVQ01xx Media Card faceplate provides access to the RS-232 port. This faceplate port can provide access to the Media Card for OA&M purposes. The maintenance port is also available through a female DB9 connector on the 50-pin I/O Adaptor. This should be used to make a permanent terminal connection.
. QPC841 Quad Serial Data Interface card Contents This section contains information on the following topics: “Introduction” (page 985) “Physical description” (page 986) “Functional description” (page 987) “Connector pin assignments” (page 988) “Configuring the QSDI card” (page 990) “Applications” (page 994) Introduction The QPC841 Quad Serial Data Interface (QSDI) card provides four RS-232-C serial ports between the system and external devices.
QPC841 Quad Serial Data Interface card • • • NT6D60 Core module (slots 0 through 5) NT8D35 Network module (slots 5 through 13) NT9D11 Core/Network module (slots 0 through 8) Note: When a QSDI card is installed in an NT6D60 Core module, an NT8D34 CPU module, or slot 13 of an NT6D39 CPU/Network module in a dual-CPU system, any input/output I/O device connected to the card does not function when the CPU in that module is inactive.
Functional description 987 Figure 284 QPC841 QSDI card front panel Functional description The QPC841 Quad Serial Data Interface card contains all the logic for four asynchronous serial ports, including the baud rate generators. These serial ports are directly accessed by the system processor using memory reads and writes. The QPC841 Quad Serial Data Interface card contains four universal asynchronous receiver/transmitters (UARTs) and the logic necessary to connect the UARTs to the system processor bus.
QPC841 Quad Serial Data Interface card "QPC841 QSDI card block diagram" (page 988). The other logic on the card consists of four baud rate generators, four RS-232-C driver/receiver pairs, and the jumpers and logic needed to configure the UARTs. The address select switches and logic on the card always address the UARTs using two pairs of addresses: 0 and 1, and 2 and 3 through 15 and 16. The pairs do not need to be consecutive.
Connector pin assignments 989 Table 414 "Connector J1 pin assignments" (page 989) shows the pinouts for connector J1, and Table 415 "Connector J2 pin assignments" (page 989) shows the pinouts for connector J2.
QPC841 Quad Serial Data Interface card Table 415 Connector J2 pin assignments (cont’d.
Configuring the QSDI card 991 Address switch settings Table 416 "QSDI card address switch settings" (page 991) lists the address switch settings for the QPC841 Quad Serial Data Interface card. The address select jumpers and logic on the card address the UARTs using two pairs of addresses: 0 and 1, 2 and 3, through 15 and 16. The pairs do not need to be consecutive. Switch SW14 is used to select the addresses for ports 1 and 2. Switch SW15 is used to select the addresses for ports 3 and 4.
QPC841 Quad Serial Data Interface card Table 417 QSDI card baud rate switch settings (cont’d.
Configuring the QSDI card Figure 286 QSDI card option switch locations Software service changes Once the QPC841 QSDI card has been installed in the system, the system software needs to be configured to recognize it. This is done using the Configuration Record programLD 17. Instructions for running the Configuration Record program are found in Software Input/Output Reference — Administration (NN43001-611). Nortel Communication Server 1000 Circuit Card Reference NN43001-311 02.
QPC841 Quad Serial Data Interface card Some of the prompts that are commonly used when running the Configuration Record program LD 17 are shown in Table 419 "LD 17 Serial port configuration parameters" (page 994) These parameters must be configured for each port that is being used. Table 419 LD 17 - Serial port configuration parameters Prompt Response Description REQ: CHG Change configuration. TYPE: CFN Configuration type. IOTB YES Change input/output devices.
Applications 995 the three remaining serial ports (ports 2, 3, and 4), on a single DB-25 connector. An adapter cable must be used to connect to standard RS-232-C peripherals. Cables that are applicable to the QSDI card are: • SDI male-to-female flat cables (internal module use only) — NT8D82 — QCAD290 Note: This cable is available in different lengths.
QPC841 Quad Serial Data Interface card Figure 287 QPC841 QSDI card cabling Nortel Communication Server 1000 Circuit Card Reference NN43001-311 02.06 Standard 27 August 2008 Copyright © 2003-2008 Nortel Networks .
. The TDS/DTR card Contents This section contains information on the following topics: “Introduction” (page 997) “Features” (page 997) Introduction The TDS/DTR card function was incorporated into the NTDK20 SSC. However, it is still supported on the system. The TDS/DTR functionality is also incorporated into the NTDK97 MSC card used with Chassis system. The TDS/DTR is not required in a 2 chassis Chassis system. You can install this card in slots 1 through 9 in the main cabinet.
The TDS/DTR card The TDS/DTR card does not provide the Music on Hold feature as do other TDS cards. The music source must come from a standard trunk card. Tone detector The TDS/DTR card provides eight channels of DTMF (Dual Tone Multi-Frequency) detection in A-Law or µ-Law. In North America, pre-programmed data is configured for µ-Law tone detection. SDI function The TDS/DTR card provides two SDI (Serial Data Interface) ports.
Features 999 Table 420 NTAK03, NTDK20, and NTDK97 Mu-Law tones and cadence (cont’d.
The TDS/DTR card Table 420 NTAK03, NTDK20, and NTDK97 Mu-Law tones and cadence (cont’d.
Features 1001 Table 420 NTAK03, NTDK20, and NTDK97 Mu-Law tones and cadence (cont’d.
The TDS/DTR card Table 421 NTAK03, NTDK20, and NTDK97 A-Law tones and cadences Precision Ringing Tones Tone # Frequency (Hz) dB below overload 1 940 X 1630 -14/-13 P 2 700 X 1210 -14/-13 1 3 700 X 1340 -14/-13 2 4 700 X 1480 -14/-13 3 5 770 X 1210 -14/-13 4 6 770 X 1340 -14/-13 5 7 770 X 1480 -14/-13 6 8 850 X 1210 -14/-13 7 9 850 X 1340 -14/-13 8 10 850 X 1480 -14/-13 9 11 940 X 1340 -14/-13 0 12 940 X 1210 -14/-13 * 13 940 X 1480 -14/-13 # 14
Features 1003 Table 421 NTAK03, NTDK20, and NTDK97 A-Law tones and cadences (cont’d.
The TDS/DTR card Table 421 NTAK03, NTDK20, and NTDK97 A-Law tones and cadences (cont’d.
Features 1005 Table 421 NTAK03, NTDK20, and NTDK97 A-Law tones and cadences (cont’d.
The TDS/DTR card Table 421 NTAK03, NTDK20, and NTDK97 A-Law tones and cadences (cont’d.
Features 1007 Table 421 NTAK03, NTDK20, and NTDK97 A-Law tones and cadences (cont’d.
The TDS/DTR card Nortel Communication Server 1000 Circuit Card Reference NN43001-311 02.06 Standard 27 August 2008 Copyright © 2003-2008 Nortel Networks .
. Appendix LAPB Data Link Control protocol Contents This section contains information on the following topics: “Introduction” (page 1009) “Operation” (page 1009) “Frame structure” (page 1010) “LAPB balanced class of procedure” (page 1011) “Commands and responses” (page 1011) “Description of procedure” (page 1012) Introduction This chapter describes the LAPB Data Link Control protocol used with the QPC513 ESDI card.
LAPB Data Link Control protocol Frame structure All transmissions are in frames and each frame conforms to the format shown in Table 422 "LAPB frame structure" (page 1010). In particular, frame elements for applications using a port on the QPC513 follow these LAPB conventions: • • Zero information field is permitted. • Extensions for the address field or the control field are not permitted. This requirement imposes constraints to satellite operations.
Commands and responses 1011 LAPB balanced class of procedure Applications which use ports on the QPC513 are automatically designated as BAC, 2, 8 (for example, balanced operation, asynchronous balanced mode class of procedure with optional functions 2 and 8 implemented).
LAPB Data Link Control protocol Table 423 Commands and responses (cont’d.
Nortel Communication Server 1000 Circuit Card Reference Copyright © 2003-2008 Nortel Networks All Rights Reserved. Release: 5.5 Publication: NN43001-311 Document status: Standard Document revision: 02.06 Document release date: 27 August 2008 To provide feedback or to report a problem in this document, go to www.nortel.com/documentfeedback. www.nortel.
